IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Hi! I'm Brian Myers and welcome to
Designing a House in Revit Architecture.
| | 00:08 | In this course, we'll look at
the process of modeling a home in
| | 00:11 | Revit Architecture.
| | 00:12 | I'll start by showing you how to draw
your exterior walls for your home, then
| | 00:16 | we'll use the floor tools to create the
various types of floors you'll find in
| | 00:19 | a typical residence.
| | 00:21 | We'll then see how to create a
residential roof using the Roof tools.
| | 00:25 | We'll be covering all these features,
plus plenty of other tools and techniques
| | 00:29 | to generate your ceiling,
site plans, renderings and more.
| | 00:33 | Now let's get started with
Designing a House in Revit Architecture.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| What you should know before watching this course| 00:00 | Before taking this course, you may
want to consider taking Paul F. Aubin's
| | 00:04 | course: Revit Architecture
2011 Essential Training.
| | 00:08 | Even though this is being recorded
with Revit Architecture 2012, all the same
| | 00:13 | picks and clicks are involved in
order to get around inside of the program.
| | 00:17 | Also a little bit of a tip;
| | 00:19 | whenever you're using your mouse, you
can move around the model fairly easily.
| | 00:23 | How I'm moving around and zooming in
and zooming out in these exercises is by
| | 00:28 | spinning the wheel on the mouse.
| | 00:29 | So if you point your wheel, or you
point your mouse and the arrow toward a
| | 00:34 | specific object and then use the
wheel, it'll zoom in at that object.
| | 00:39 | If you roll the wheel again on
your mouse, it'll zoom it back out.
| | 00:43 | If you want to be able to pan from side
to side to see something with a little bit
| | 00:46 | more clarity, hold the wheel down your
mouse and pull to the left or pull to the
| | 00:52 | right, or up and down.
| | 00:55 | If you want to be able to see a
specific object, zoom in, in the general area
| | 00:59 | of that object, select on the object,
and then there's this object up here
| | 01:03 | called the view cube.
| | 01:05 | If you click on a corner of the view
cube, it'll take you to that view of
| | 01:09 | that specific object.
| | 01:10 | For instance, if I want to be able to
see this column from the top, looking down
| | 01:16 | at an angle, I could pick the
upper corner of the view cube.
| | 01:19 | In this case, I'll select on it and you
can see, it's spinning us down and it's
| | 01:23 | taking us in at that
particular corner of the view cube.
| | 01:27 | These are just some simple steps
that you might need and if you have any
| | 01:31 | questions, feel free to take a look
at Paul F. Aubin's course of Revit
| | 01:35 | Architecture 2011 Essential Training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you're a premium member of lynda.com
Online Training Library, or if you're
| | 00:04 | watching this tutorial on a DVD-ROM,
you have access to the exercise files
| | 00:08 | used throughout this title.
| | 00:10 | We have our exercise files and we open
up that folder, we can see the different
| | 00:14 | chapters that contain the
different exercise files.
| | 00:17 | Open up the chapter, and we can see the
different exercises inside of the folders.
| | 00:23 | If you're a monthly member or an
annual member of lynda.com, you don't have
| | 00:27 | access to these exercise files, but you can
follow along from scratch with your own assets.
| | 00:32 | So let's go ahead and get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Setting Up a ProjectReviewing the project requirements| 00:00 | In this series of videos, we'll be
recreating this American bungalow style of house.
| | 00:05 | Now whenever we're talking about an
American bungalow style of house, oftentimes
| | 00:09 | it's a one-and-a-half story building.
| | 00:11 | In this case, I've cheated a little
bit by making it one main floor with a
| | 00:16 | finished basement area, looking out
over whatever our view happens to be.
| | 00:21 | If we take a look at the first floor
plan, we'll see that the main living
| | 00:25 | area is all here on the first floor, which is
another typical feature of a bungalow style.
| | 00:30 | You have the great room up here, a
dining room area, a kitchen, pantry, master
| | 00:36 | bathroom, which also serves as
the main bathroom for this floor.
| | 00:39 | There is a bedroom area, which might be considered
the master bedroom, and a closet for it.
| | 00:43 | And also, if we take look down in
our basement, you'll see that we have a
| | 00:47 | storage room area, a living room area,
a bedroom area, which might be the guest
| | 00:52 | bedroom, as well as a utility room,
which is going to have our dryer, a washing
| | 00:56 | machine, water heater and a furnace
in it, and the always easy-to-overlook
| | 01:01 | electrical panel here, actually
supplying electricity to our building here.
| | 01:05 | Now that we walked through the building,
let's go ahead and take this in the
| | 01:08 | Revit Architecture and recreate it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating multiple levels| 00:00 | Levels in Revit are used to
establish the heights and depths of objects
| | 00:03 | inside of a Revit project.
| | 00:05 | In this instance, we can see that we
already have levels for our first floor, as
| | 00:09 | well as our top of plate, which I am
just abbreviating to be called TOP.
| | 00:13 | If we would execute the Wall tool, it
would be possible for us to draw the walls
| | 00:17 | in at the first floor level.
| | 00:18 | Now if we did that, the walls would
need to know how tall they needed to be.
| | 00:23 | In this instance, since we would have
a level up above it, we could tell the
| | 00:26 | walls go up to the top of plate
level, which is really where your walls
| | 00:29 | were typically going to stop if you are
dealing with the first floor of the building.
| | 00:33 | Because these different levels end
up or are associated with these different
| | 00:37 | objects, and we have a basement area
as well, we need to draw in some extra
| | 00:42 | levels in order to be able to; one,
host those objects so that they have
| | 00:46 | something to sit on and two, it will
also give them an elevation height at which
| | 00:51 | they will be drawn in at.
| | 00:53 | Next, we need to add the additional levels.
| | 00:55 | These levels are pre-calculated and
make the building structurally sound and
| | 00:59 | give it the proper aesthetic appeal.
| | 01:01 | So I am going to come up to the
Level tool up here, and select on level.
| | 01:06 | Now I know for a fact that we are
going to have six more levels that come in
| | 01:10 | underneath the first floor.
| | 01:12 | So I am going to draw in six more levels here.
| | 01:14 | Now don't worry about the fact that it's
called Level 13, Level 14, Level 15, we
| | 01:19 | will be renaming those.
| | 01:21 | And they are going to be renamed to
correspond to the different kinds of objects,
| | 01:25 | as well as the different kinds of
floor plans, that might be related to those
| | 01:28 | objects inside of the Revit project.
| | 01:31 | Now it looks like we have two more to do.
| | 01:33 | So I am going to draw in one and two right here.
| | 01:37 | Now I am going to zoom in on this side,
and we need to rename these levels now.
| | 01:45 | This one is going to be
called Top of Foundation.
| | 01:49 | Now it's a pretty self-explanatory name
there because this is going to be where the
| | 01:53 | top of your foundation walls are
going to come up to.
| | 01:56 | If it asked, would you like to rename the
corresponding views, just say yes to that.
| | 02:01 | What that does is it will add the
name over here in the Project browser.
| | 02:06 | We are going to click on Level 14 next, and
we are going to name this Basement Ceiling.
| | 02:13 | Of course that's where the basement
ceiling is going to be sitting on when
| | 02:16 | it's all said and done.
| | 02:18 | The next one is going to be abbreviated
and that's going to be just called TOF,
| | 02:24 | and in this case, it's not Top of
Foundation, it stands for Top of Footing, and
| | 02:28 | this footing is going to be
supporting the front porch that we have on the
| | 02:32 | front of the building.
| | 02:35 | The next one we are going to rename
this one Basement and this going to be
| | 02:39 | for our basement floor.
| | 02:44 | The one underneath that is going to
also be called TOF, but I am not going to
| | 02:48 | add a little dash after it, the
reason is that this is going to be our main
| | 02:51 | footing depth throughout the project.
| | 02:53 | I'll go ahead and rename those views
as well, and then finally, I am going to
| | 03:00 | rename this also a TOF and
this is going to be Walk Out.
| | 03:04 | And the idea behind this one is that
this is going to be the walls that go below
| | 03:09 | the frost line of our building.
| | 03:11 | So in case you are in an area where
you end up having a lot of freezing and
| | 03:15 | thawing, the building will still be structurally
sound and the footings that are
| | 03:18 | supporting the walls up above
aren't going to be moving around a lot.
| | 03:22 | So it needs to be deep enough which
is why we are creating this level.
| | 03:26 | Now we also need to be able to set
the elevations for each of these.
| | 03:30 | Now I'm going to start with this TOF Walk Out,
and I am going to make this be
| | 03:35 | -11 foot 5 inches, just
happened to be close when I drew it in.
| | 03:42 | This next one is going
to go down -9 foot 1 inch.
| | 03:47 | So make sure to always
put that negative sign in.
| | 03:50 | It's probably the number one mistake
that I find that people do is they forget
| | 03:53 | to put that negative sign in and
wonder why it goes up to be 9 foot 1 inch
| | 03:57 | above their first floor. That's
obviously not going to work too well for the
| | 04:01 | footings of your building.
| | 04:02 | Now we are going to have the basement
elevation, but you can see a little bit of
| | 04:06 | an issue here because I can't
easily get to this number right here.
| | 04:09 | I might be able to click and get it to work.
| | 04:11 | But in order to be able to reach out
and touch it a little bit better, I am
| | 04:14 | going to select on this level here,
I'm going to click on the little break
| | 04:17 | symbol, and you can see how it
dropped down that Top of Footing elevation.
| | 04:22 | Now it didn't really change the elevation,
it just changed the marker for the elevation.
| | 04:27 | But it's going to allow us to get in
here and click on that number fairly easily
| | 04:31 | and also allow us to read
that number fairly easily.
| | 04:34 | Now I am going to change
this to be -8 foot 9 inch.
| | 04:37 | You can see how it raises that level up,
and we will go ahead and clean this up
| | 04:43 | here in just a minute, so that
these aren't touching each other.
| | 04:46 | You have the Top of Footing at the porch.
| | 04:48 | This is going to need to be -4 feet 9 inches.
| | 04:55 | Next we are going to select on this
basement ceiling level and see if we can
| | 04:59 | click on this, it looks like we can.
| | 05:01 | And this should actually be -1 foot 8 1/2.
| | 05:04 | So I am going to type in -1 foot 8, and
I could do a space and one half or you
| | 05:12 | can just type in .5, either one
will work just fine, and you can see how
| | 05:16 | it raises it up, it's now at
the 1 foot 8 1/2 inch dimension.
| | 05:22 | Now that crossed over another level
which is our Top of Foundation here and this
| | 05:26 | needs to be at -1 foot 1 inch.
| | 05:29 | You can see how that brings that up
and this has all of our levels at the
| | 05:36 | appropriate elevation marks, but we still
can't read all these numbers just quite right.
| | 05:40 | So I am going to select on one of these
levels, and there's this little break
| | 05:43 | symbol that shows up here. I am going
to click on the little break symbol, and
| | 05:46 | I am going to pull this up a little,
pull this over in order to help clean this
| | 05:51 | up, make this be very easy to read,
select here where it has the Basement
| | 05:56 | Ceiling here, click on little break,
move this over, move this piece over to
| | 06:03 | here.
| | 06:04 | We can read the Top of Foundation.
| | 06:07 | Now I always like to keep these
things nice and clean and lined up, so I am
| | 06:10 | going to select where we have our First
Floor, click on the little dot and just
| | 06:14 | drag this directly over.
| | 06:16 | Whenever you have is blue dash line
coming straight down you know that this is
| | 06:20 | all going to be lined up.
| | 06:23 | It looks like our Top of Foundation
here is just a little bit off.
| | 06:26 | So I am going to click on
that as well and drag that over.
| | 06:29 | You can see it has that dash line that shows
up, so we know that that's lined up as well.
| | 06:34 | And with this first floor,
it's kind of overlapping.
| | 06:37 | So I want to clean that up
too and drag this dot up.
| | 06:41 | And we'll zoom out to make
sure that it's looking okay.
| | 06:44 | One last thing, I always like to have
these lines lined up too, and you will find
| | 06:48 | that a lot of people that work
inside of architecture offices out in
| | 06:52 | construction trailers,
they like to see that too.
| | 06:55 | So we will go ahead and clean that up
and get all of those levels lined up and
| | 06:59 | it will look the same in the flip view
of this as well in the south elevation if
| | 07:03 | we would look at it in there.
| | 07:05 | That being said, since we've
created these levels now and in our future
| | 07:09 | exercises we'll be able to use these
to begin drawing our building objects in
| | 07:14 | at the proper elevations. Now let's move
on and start creating actual objects we
| | 07:19 | are going to be placing in the building.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Entering project information| 00:00 | At this stage in the project, I'd
like to enter in some extra project
| | 00:03 | related information.
| | 00:04 | In this case, it's going to be the
information related to the Room Schedule.
| | 00:08 | Now I'd like to have all of our rooms
showing up on the list before I even start
| | 00:12 | drawing in my first walls.
| | 00:14 | The reasoning behind it is you usually know
when you're going to be drawing your building
| | 00:17 | that it needs to have a bedroom, a bathroom,
a dining room, whatever the case may be.
| | 00:23 | And it's always nice to get that
written out and just available for you so you
| | 00:26 | can reference it in the
future, later on in your project.
| | 00:29 | Here inside of the Room
Schedule, go ahead and select on New.
| | 00:32 | Now when you first do that, there is
a good chance it will have a different
| | 00:35 | number other than number 1.
| | 00:36 | Now you always your first one on
your schedule to be a number 1.
| | 00:39 | So I am going to change
this to be our first room.
| | 00:43 | I am going to click on New and I
happen to know from doing a little bit of
| | 00:46 | pre-work that we are going to have 13
different rooms inside of this house.
| | 00:50 | So I am going to just keep clicking the
New button until we have 13 individual
| | 00:54 | rooms showing up on the Room Schedule.
| | 00:56 | Next, I am going to rename each one of
these so that it has the appropriate name
| | 01:01 | for that kind of space.
| | 01:03 | In this example, we are
going to type in here Great Room.
| | 01:07 | The second space is going to be a dining room.
| | 01:11 | The next one will be a kitchen.
| | 01:13 | Another space it will need is going
to be a pantry that's going to be right
| | 01:17 | off of the kitchen.
| | 01:18 | We will have a Bedroom 1,
| | 01:20 | which if you want to call that the
master bedroom, you can, because that's what
| | 01:24 | it's going to be in our house.
| | 01:26 | This next one I am calling
MBath which stands for master bath.
| | 01:30 | It's also going to be main bath on
the first floor of our building.
| | 01:33 | This is going to be a closet and
this is going to serve as a closet for
| | 01:37 | our master bedroom.
| | 01:39 | Number 8 here is going to be a living room.
| | 01:41 | That's going to be down in our basement area.
| | 01:45 | Number 9 is going to be Bedroom 2.
| | 01:47 | You could also call it guestroom if you wish.
| | 01:49 | I am going to name it Bedroom 2.
| | 01:52 | Number 10 is going to be the closet.
| | 01:54 | Number 11 will be the utility room.
| | 02:00 | 12 here is going to be the lower
level bath and I am just going to
| | 02:03 | abbreviate that LL Bath.
| | 02:08 | Number 13 here is going to be the storage room.
| | 02:13 | I also want to point out if you've
typed it in once, which is one of the things
| | 02:17 | I did with the closet, is that you
could always pull it off of a pulldown list
| | 02:20 | because this pulldown list that shows up
here has all the names that you just typed in.
| | 02:25 | So we had future closets we wanted
to add, future bathrooms, we could
| | 02:28 | just pick that off of the list and away we go,
without having to type in the total line.
| | 02:33 | Now another advantage of adding in this
room information at this point is when
| | 02:38 | it comes time to actually draw in
our very first walls, so we will end up
| | 02:41 | drawing in our exterior walls, then
our interior walls, once those are up and
| | 02:47 | we want to know, okay, do we have all the
rooms that we need, all spaces that we need?
| | 02:52 | You can always refer back to this Room Schedule.
| | 02:54 | I also want to point out that you can
always go over to the first floor plan now.
| | 02:58 | Then if we look at our Room command
here, click on that, we will see that
| | 03:02 | there is a Room pulldown, and this is
all the information that we just entered
| | 03:05 | into that schedule.
| | 03:07 | It's really nice, because once those
walls are already drawn in and are in
| | 03:10 | place, we can just select the
appropriate room off of the list, and then
| | 03:14 | just place it inside of those walls,
and the space will automatically expand
| | 03:18 | itself out and take on the form and
shape of whatever that room is that we
| | 03:22 | just finished creating.
| | 03:23 | The nice thing is that once we do that, it
will remove itself off of this list.
| | 03:29 | Once you've actually gotten through and
you've placed all those rooms, if you've
| | 03:32 | done it right you shouldn't have any
rooms left on the list, because well, you
| | 03:35 | have placed them all
already inside of your building.
| | 03:39 | Entering this information in early in
the project helps automate a lot of the
| | 03:42 | upcoming steps that we still need to accomplish.
| | 03:45 | It can also be leveraged as a good
reference for the upcoming design that we are
| | 03:50 | getting ready to do when we drawn in
our walls, doors, windows, and everything
| | 03:55 | else that's left in our project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Creating WallsCreating exterior walls| 00:00 | At the start in most projects it's
very likely that you'll start by drawing
| | 00:03 | your exterior walls.
| | 00:05 | At least that will be the first thing
that you model inside of your project.
| | 00:08 | Now in order to be able to accomplish
that, you need to come into your first
| | 00:11 | floor plan and then come up here
to Walls underneath the Home tab.
| | 00:14 | Now by selecting on that you'll have a
pulldown list here that's called your
| | 00:18 | Type Selector list, and you'll see that
there's a wide variety of different kinds
| | 00:22 | of walls that we can choose from.
| | 00:24 | In this case, we're doing a residential design.
| | 00:26 | Because we're doing a residential design,
there is going to be a lot of brick and
| | 00:29 | siding and that kind of construction.
| | 00:32 | Depending on your area of the country, you
might have different things, maybe adobe,
| | 00:35 | or different kinds of construction
that are available to you.
| | 00:38 | But in this case, we're going to go
with something very common, it's just going
| | 00:41 | to be siding for our exterior walls.
| | 00:45 | I'm going to come in here and I'm going
to select on the Exterior Siding wall.
| | 00:48 | Now this is just your typical
2x4 construction.
| | 00:51 | In order to be able to see that, if I
select on the Edit Type button here, I can
| | 00:56 | then come up here and select on Edit
right next to the word Structure, and we
| | 01:00 | can see each layer of
material that's available to us.
| | 01:04 | In this case, I was saying that this is
a 2x4 wall, and it says this is 3 1/2
| | 01:08 | inches thick and that is true because
your typical 2x4, once it goes to the
| | 01:12 | milling process, ends up getting down to
about 3.5 inchesx1.5 inches in size. So
| | 01:18 | it's not actually 2x4, it's
something just a little bit smaller.
| | 01:23 | And you can see here whether it's
siding, or sheathing, or whatever the
| | 01:26 | case may be, each material inside
of this wall has its own real-life
| | 01:31 | thickness associated with it.
| | 01:33 | In reality, this wall is a total of 5
inches thick, but we're still going to
| | 01:36 | call it, at least I'll probably still
call it a 2x4 wall because that's really
| | 01:40 | the terminology for it.
| | 01:41 | I'll go ahead and click on OK, I'll select
OK again, and it's an Exterior Siding wall.
| | 01:50 | I'm going to begin by actually coming up
here to where it has this Location Line
| | 01:54 | and I want to make sure that this
isn't to the Finish Face Exterior.
| | 01:58 | I'm going to draw this to
the Core Face of the exterior.
| | 02:01 | Also, we need to check on
a few other settings first.
| | 02:03 | One is, is that the base constraint of
it is going to be on the first floor, and
| | 02:09 | what that means is that the wall, the
bottom of the wall, the base of the wall,
| | 02:12 | is going to be drawn from
level 1, the first floor.
| | 02:16 | But on this case it's saying it's trying
to give us a base offset at 8 foot, and
| | 02:20 | that's just not right.
| | 02:21 | So I just want to say that it's 0 feet to
0 inches off of the top of the floor.
| | 02:25 | The next thing, I need to just know what
the height of this wall is going to be.
| | 02:30 | You can see right now it's saying that
there is a Unconnected Height associated
| | 02:33 | with it, and that's not right because
in this case, it would have made the wall
| | 02:36 | 9 foot tall and that's not exactly what I want.
| | 02:39 | I want it to come up to, Up to level: TOP,
| | 02:41 | and that's the Top of Plate.
| | 02:43 | And the plate is the boards
that run along the top of the wall.
| | 02:47 | Finally, this wall has something a
little bit special and that is that it has
| | 02:51 | siding going down the outside edge of it.
| | 02:54 | And I'd like that siding to do a
couple of different things for me.
| | 02:57 | One, I'd like it to hide the
structural members of the floor, so that when we
| | 03:01 | build this house up, we can't see the
boards on the outside of the building that
| | 03:07 | make up the outside edges of the floor.
| | 03:09 | We need something to cover that up and in
this case, it is going to be the siding.
| | 03:12 | Also the siding is going to cover a
little bit of the foundation wall, which is
| | 03:16 | just going to achieve part of the
look that we want to accomplish.
| | 03:18 | Now in order to do that we need to
adjust the base extension of the wall, and
| | 03:23 | in this case, I'm going to
make it be 1 foot 8 inches.
| | 03:29 | Now that's going to bring the siding
on the wall down 1 foot 8 inches below
| | 03:34 | where the structural members of
the floor are currently drawn in.
| | 03:38 | And we'll see that here in just a minute.
| | 03:41 | Now I'm going to go ahead and
start drawing these floors in.
| | 03:43 | I'm going to move my cursor just somewhere
in here and this is probably a good spot.
| | 03:48 | I'm going to click once.
| | 03:49 | You'll see as I move down, let's draw
in the wall straight down, that blue dash
| | 03:55 | line shows up there, that's on the
Core Face which means it's on the outside
| | 04:00 | edge of the 2x4 walls, the actual
structural members that hold this wall up.
| | 04:07 | So I'm going to come down and
we're going to go down 10 feet.
| | 04:10 | So you just type in the numbers 10 foot.
| | 04:15 | Next, I'm going to move over to the
left, I'm going to type in 16 foot.
| | 04:19 | You can see how it's automatically
cleaning these walls up at the corners.
| | 04:23 | I'm going to come up, 46
feet now with this wall.
| | 04:30 | I'll move over 36 feet for this wall,
I'll move down 33 feet 8 inches.
| | 04:42 | Now we have something special going on
here at this intersection and where this
| | 04:45 | wall is going to be at.
| | 04:46 | This instead set of being a siding wall,
| | 04:49 | it's going to wall with brick.
| | 04:50 | So in order to do that, I'm going to
hit the Escape key on my keyboard just
| | 04:53 | once, it still keeps me in the Wall
command, but it allows me to change to an
| | 04:58 | Exterior Brick style of wall.
| | 05:00 | And it's still built with 2x4s, but it
now has brick on the outside instead of
| | 05:04 | siding, and of course brick is much
thicker than siding, so when we start to
| | 05:08 | draw this wall in, we'll see that this
wall is going to look thicker than the
| | 05:11 | wall that we were just drawing.
| | 05:13 | Now I want to pick this spot in
particular because this is on the actual
| | 05:17 | structural face of this siding wall,
and we want that to line up with the same
| | 05:22 | materials that are inside of the brick wall.
| | 05:24 | Now I'm going to zoom out and this
should come down 2 feet 4 inches.
| | 05:31 | Now if I've done everything right, I
should be able to type in 20 feet here and
| | 05:35 | have it automatically clean
up here at the intersection.
| | 05:38 | And if I hit the Escape key a couple
of times to get out of the Command,
| | 05:41 | you'll see in fact it has cleaned
itself up appropriately here at the
| | 05:45 | intersection of these walls.
| | 05:48 | If we take a look at this in a 3D view
now, we can see all the walls have been
| | 05:53 | drawn in here on the outside.
| | 05:55 | You'll also see this line is going on
here, and what's actually happening is that
| | 05:59 | this wall is thicker than
this part of the wall down here.
| | 06:02 | This is that extension that we put in
toward the start of the exercise. This is
| | 06:06 | that -1 foot 8 inches base extension,
where the siding is coming down to this
| | 06:11 | point right here, so that you can
overlap the floor materials as well as a
| | 06:16 | little bit of the foundation wall down below.
| | 06:19 | By using these steps, you'll be a
success in placing the exterior walls in any
| | 06:22 | of your Revit projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating foundation walls| 00:00 | Now we're ready to start placing
the foundation walls under our house.
| | 00:04 | And before we start doing that, let's
take a look at what we have currently.
| | 00:07 | If I spin this model around, so we
can see it, you can see that we have
| | 00:12 | the outside walls here.
| | 00:13 | What we're looking at here
is this siding coming down.
| | 00:17 | Even if I spin it around here, we can
see the brick coming down here and we're
| | 00:20 | going to need something that's going
to be able to support the brick here as
| | 00:23 | well as the underside here to support
the actual structural members of our
| | 00:29 | walls up above. So in order to be able to
accomplish that, we need to go to our First Floor view.
| | 00:34 | Now in our First Floor view, we can
see all those different layers and
| | 00:38 | materials pretty easily.
| | 00:39 | The only problem is I have some
nice big dark thick lines here.
| | 00:44 | In order to be able to see each individual
layer of material, you need to make sure
| | 00:48 | you come up to your View tab
and select on the Thin Lines tool.
| | 00:52 | By doing that, you can see the
individual pieces that make up this wall.
| | 00:56 | Now the important thing for whenever
we're going to be doing this foundation
| | 01:00 | is making sure that we draw the
foundation to the outside edge of our
| | 01:04 | structural members.
| | 01:05 | Now what's holding up this wall isn't
actually the siding, it's the 2x4s that
| | 01:09 | are inside in the interior of this wall,
and that goes along this line and down
| | 01:14 | and along this line and down.
| | 01:16 | So the foundation wall needs to be
totally underneath this area in order to be
| | 01:21 | able to hold the floor above
it up without falling down.
| | 01:25 | One thing though and it is very tempting,
because in the first floor one of the
| | 01:29 | things that we've done was that we drew
everything here in the First Floor View.
| | 01:33 | So it's very tempting to come into the
basement view and just start drawing.
| | 01:37 | Now the first thing you notice is you
can't see the walls, because they're up above.
| | 01:41 | Experienced Revit users might try to
come in and change the underlay in order to
| | 01:45 | show the first floor and
then start drawing around.
| | 01:48 | The problem with that is, is if we
zoom in here, you can tell that it's very
| | 01:53 | difficult to tell where the
structural members are going to be, because it
| | 01:56 | doesn't show it whenever you have an
underlay. And it's vital that we know where
| | 01:59 | the structural members are, so that
when we're drawing these walls around that
| | 02:04 | those walls are going to be at the
right locations and not a few inches off and
| | 02:07 | having the whole house collapse,
which is never a good thing obviously.
| | 02:11 | I don't like to start off by drawing
my basements particularly when we're
| | 02:14 | dealing with houses down in the basement level.
| | 02:17 | Oftentimes I'll do it in the
level up above, the level that we're
| | 02:20 | actually supporting.
| | 02:21 | Now where we have the underlay here to
turn this on, I'm going to turn that back
| | 02:25 | off because I don't really need it anymore.
| | 02:29 | Move this up change this to say None.
| | 02:31 | You can see how it goes away, and now I'm
going to go back to my First Floor View.
| | 02:35 | One setting that I need to make an
adjustment to though, in order to be able to
| | 02:39 | see those walls down underneath, is
called the View Range setting and by clicking
| | 02:43 | on the Edit button right here, we can
adjust that View Range to see the level
| | 02:48 | below, which goes to the Top of
Foundation. I'll click on OK to that.
| | 02:53 | Next I'm going to just start drawing
in my basic foundation walls that go
| | 02:57 | around the perimeter of this building.
| | 02:59 | I am going to come up here to the Home tab
and I'm going to select the Wall command.
| | 03:03 | Now I have to be very careful, because
if I'm going to be drawing on the first
| | 03:06 | floor, it's going to try to pull all
this walls in, well, on the first floor.
| | 03:10 | So I need to tell these walls that
they need to actually go further down.
| | 03:15 | Now where I want to put these walls to,
it's going to be where it has Base
| | 03:18 | Constraint and it has first floor. I
want to click there and I'm going to
| | 03:21 | bring it down to the farthest point
down, it's going to be the Top of Footing
| | 03:26 | for the Walk Out.
| | 03:28 | We will need to adjust these on some of
these walls a little bit later on, but
| | 03:31 | right now I'm just going to draw the
walls all the way around the perimeter and
| | 03:35 | we can always make adjustments after the fact.
| | 03:38 | Next there is a Base Offset here, but
we don't need a Base Offset, because we
| | 03:42 | don't need the bottom of the wall to be
anyplace other than right on top of the
| | 03:46 | Top of Footing for the Walk Out,
so we're going to change this to be zero,
| | 03:49 | so there is no Base Offset.
| | 03:50 | The Top Constraint, whenever we're
going to be doing a foundation wall, which
| | 03:55 | would usually go up to the top of the foundation
wall, so we're going to go up to the level,
| | 03:59 | Top of Foundation.
| | 04:01 | This information looks pretty good,
so I'm going to start by coming in
| | 04:05 | and drawing the wall.
| | 04:06 | One thing we need to do though is make
sure that we change this wall type to
| | 04:10 | be an appropriate foundation wall wall type,
and we have three different ones available to us.
| | 04:15 | One is the Foundation 8 inch.
| | 04:17 | The Foundation 8 inch is a typical 8
inch thick foundation wall poured concrete.
| | 04:23 | You have the Foundation 8 inch Finish.
| | 04:26 | This is going to be a foundation wall that
has a finish material on the inside of it.
| | 04:30 | So if your walls have gyp board and some
studs there in order to be able to hang
| | 04:35 | your pictures on the wall and that sort
of thing, this is the wall you want to use.
| | 04:40 | There's also the Foundation 12 inch Finish.
| | 04:42 | This one you only need to use down here
and the reason why you need this 12 inch
| | 04:46 | foundation wall down here is to be
able to support the brick that's been
| | 04:49 | designed up above, and we can see
that from the outside of our building.
| | 04:53 | For the walls that we're going to be
doing right now, I'm going to choose on
| | 04:55 | this Foundation 8 inch Finish and it
can be adjusted later in places where it
| | 05:01 | needs to be a slightly different wall type.
| | 05:03 | Now I'm going to come over here.
| | 05:05 | After I change these properties, I
am just going to verify that these
| | 05:07 | properties are right.
| | 05:08 | Usually they are, they still are, and I'm
going to click this intersection right here.
| | 05:13 | But first I need to come up here
where it has the Location Line and it says
| | 05:16 | Finish Face of the Exterior.
| | 05:19 | In reality, I really needed to
say Core Face of the Exterior. Why?
| | 05:23 | Because by doing the Core Face, it's
going to allow us to line up the structural
| | 05:28 | members of the walls down below
as well as the walls up above.
| | 05:32 | This is a structural core here, so I'm
going click at that intersection point
| | 05:36 | right there and I'm going to
move over in this direction.
| | 05:39 | I'm going to click again over here.
| | 05:42 | You can see the foundation
wall started to get drawn in.
| | 05:44 | I'm going to move down.
| | 05:47 | I'm going to take this intersection right here.
| | 05:51 | I'm going to move over, pick that
intersection and now it's just a game of
| | 06:01 | connected dots essentially, just moving
all the way around our building picking
| | 06:05 | those individual intersection points.
| | 06:09 | By doing this, we'll now have a foundation
wall that's completely underneath the
| | 06:14 | structural members of our house up above.
| | 06:17 | Now once you went all the way around,
you can hit Escape a couple of times to get
| | 06:20 | out of the command and you
can take a look at it in 3D.
| | 06:22 | If you spin your building around,
you'll able to see those foundation walls on
| | 06:28 | the underneath side going
down to the appropriate depth.
| | 06:32 | Now we need to be able to move on and
make adjustments to these walls in order
| | 06:36 | to make sure that they completely
support the brick up above and have the right
| | 06:40 | structural capabilities to be able
to hold our house up without the house
| | 06:45 | falling down on itself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying foundation walls| 00:00 | Now that we have the foundation walls
underneath our structure up above, we can
| | 00:04 | see that there are actually a few
issues that we need to take care of first.
| | 00:08 | First off, if I move this building
around we can take a look at this and we can
| | 00:12 | see that there is brick
currently floating in midair.
| | 00:14 | Now that's not usually a good thing
whenever you are talking about the structure
| | 00:17 | underneath the house.
| | 00:18 | There needs to be something that's
going to support this brick, so we're
| | 00:21 | going to need to make some
adjustments to our foundation walls there to be
| | 00:24 | able to support the brick.
| | 00:26 | Also, we currently have the same
type of foundation wall going around
| | 00:29 | the perimeter here.
| | 00:31 | Now that's not necessarily a bad thing
depending on where we want to look at this.
| | 00:35 | The only thing though is that part of
this wall ends up having 2x4 studs right
| | 00:40 | here along with gyp board in
order to frame the wall out.
| | 00:44 | Now back here which is going to be our
storage or utility room area, we don't
| | 00:50 | want to have any sort of wall framing there,
which is going to be an unfinished space.
| | 00:54 | So we are going to need to use a
different wall type in that location as well in
| | 00:57 | order to communicate that properly.
| | 01:00 | So in order to do that, we need to go
back into our Basement Floor Plan view and
| | 01:04 | start to make a few modifications.
| | 01:05 | Now I am going to start off by
zooming in on this corner of the building.
| | 01:11 | This part of the building has grid going up
much higher on it than this end of the building.
| | 01:18 | So the ground is much lower
over here than it is over here.
| | 01:21 | As a result of that, we need to have
foundation walls that go down deeper in the
| | 01:26 | earth over here as opposed to over here.
| | 01:30 | The reason is, whenever the ground
starts to freeze, the building might start to
| | 01:34 | contract, expand, move up, move down,
and if you foundation walls aren't deep
| | 01:39 | enough they won't will be
able to resist those forces.
| | 01:42 | We need to make those adjustments, so
that it has the right depth of foundation
| | 01:45 | wall in both locations.
| | 01:48 | To begin with, I am going to just come
down to this corner of the building and I
| | 01:51 | am going to come up to my Annotate tool.
| | 01:53 | Now there isn't a real nice and easy
tool in order to break this wall up into
| | 01:57 | different depths, so we are going to
need to use some tools that sort of give
| | 02:01 | us some guidelines, if you will, in order to
be able to create the conditions that we need.
| | 02:05 | Now I selected on Detail Lines off of
the ribbon up above, and I am going to
| | 02:10 | click on the little intersection
right here and just draw a little line
| | 02:13 | coming off the side here.
| | 02:15 | Next, I know that depth needs to be 20
feet coming up, so I am going to select
| | 02:20 | on this line that I just drew off of
the edge, and I am going to select the Copy
| | 02:23 | command, pick a point, and then type in 20 feet.
| | 02:28 | And that's just going to be my
baseline as to where I am going to be able to
| | 02:32 | split this wall out, I am going
to split the wall right there.
| | 02:35 | I also know that I need to make another
line that's just 2-foot 6 up from this one.
| | 02:41 | Now the reason why I need to do that
is that there's going to be no
| | 02:45 | finished material on this little
wall section right here, but this wall
| | 02:49 | segment is going to have that 2x4
stud with some gyp board on the outside of
| | 02:54 | it like it currently has.
| | 02:58 | Now, I am going to move to the right
hand side, I am going to draw in some
| | 03:01 | more of these lines.
| | 03:02 | I am going to draw a line right here,
straight out, and I am going to copy this
| | 03:10 | one up and I am going to
copy it up 2 feet 4 inches.
| | 03:17 | From here, I am going to make another
copy of this line and I am going to copy
| | 03:23 | it up 7 feet 8 inches.
| | 03:30 | Now we are going to use the Split
tool in order to split this wall up into
| | 03:33 | individual segments and this wall up
into individual segments, so we can change
| | 03:37 | the properties of the walls in those locations.
| | 03:39 | So I am going to select on the wall
and come up to here to the Split Element
| | 03:43 | tool, oftentimes just called the
Split tool. And then I am going to move my
| | 03:48 | little symbol right here, it kind of
looks like an X-Acto knife blade, and I am
| | 03:52 | going to move until it's inline with this line
right here, and you see that gray line show up.
| | 03:56 | Whenever you see it, click, and
do it again in both locations.
| | 04:01 | If you do it right, you can see that
you can sort of highlight over one, over
| | 04:05 | another segment, and over another
segment, we now have officially three
| | 04:09 | different segments along that wall.
| | 04:10 | I am going to do the same thing over here next.
| | 04:14 | Select on that, come up to the Split
Element tool, click once, zoom in a little
| | 04:20 | bit just to make sure that I get it
accurate, click again, and now I have this
| | 04:25 | wall segment and this wall segment.
| | 04:27 | Now I need to make some adjustments.
| | 04:30 | The first adjustment I want to make is
going to be to this wall right here as
| | 04:34 | well as this wall here on the side.
| | 04:37 | This Foundation 8 inch Finish is
mostly good, except it's not going to be
| | 04:42 | supporting the brick up above it very well.
| | 04:44 | So in order to support that brick up
above, we need to change this to be a
| | 04:47 | Foundation 12 inch Finished wall,
and you can see how it added in that
| | 04:52 | extra little bit of material, which is
actually four more inches of brick on the outside.
| | 04:57 | One other change I want to make to these
walls, and I am just going to highlight
| | 05:02 | on both of these again, is I am going to
change the top extension of these walls
| | 05:07 | to be negative 7 1/4 inches.
| | 05:10 | I could do negative 7.25 if I
wanted and I can get the same results.
| | 05:15 | Just make sure to put in the little inch sign
or else it'll do feet instead of inches.
| | 05:20 | Now what is it going to do is it's
going to change this brick ledge, which is
| | 05:24 | the part that got added when changed the
wall type, so that it's down far enough
| | 05:28 | that it can the support the brick up
above it and have the right appearance that
| | 05:32 | we want on the outside of the building.
| | 05:33 | I am also going to select on these
walls and look at one more setting here.
| | 05:38 | We are going to take a look at what the
base of it's set at, and right now it's
| | 05:42 | set to go out to the Walk Out.
| | 05:43 | We don't really want that.
| | 05:44 | We just want it to go to the Top of
Footing here, so we'll select on the
| | 05:47 | TOF, the Top of Footing, and that
will make these walls just a little bit
| | 05:51 | shorter which is what they need to be, because
they don't need to go as far under the ground.
| | 05:54 | Now we are going to do the
same thing with these walls.
| | 05:57 | I am going to select on these walls
and I am going to change their Base
| | 06:00 | Constraint to also be the Top of
Footing, because it doesn't need to go as
| | 06:04 | deep into the ground.
| | 06:05 | Also, these walls don't need to have
that finished material associated with it.
| | 06:09 | So I am going to select here in the
type selector list and pick on Foundation
| | 06:14 | 8 inch, and you can see how I removed that
finish material on the inside of the walls.
| | 06:20 | So we no longer have the 2x4s and the
gyp material on the inside of those walls.
| | 06:25 | Now in this location, the depth
happens to be correct, but the wall type just
| | 06:31 | isn't, so I am going to come in here
and I am going to change this to be just
| | 06:34 | the Foundation 8 inch, so it matches up with
this material right here, this wall right there.
| | 06:39 | Now you can see that that's been
changed and these walls are already set with
| | 06:47 | the right material and the right depth.
| | 06:50 | The next thing we can do is we can
remove these lines, because we no longer need
| | 06:53 | these reference lines.
| | 06:54 | They don't really affect anything,
they'll only show up in this view, but when
| | 06:59 | we are working with our Floor Plan view
they'd kind of be getting in our way, so
| | 07:03 | we just don't need them.
| | 07:03 | And now if we look at this in a 3D view,
we'll have a better feeling for what's
| | 07:07 | actually going on with the building.
| | 07:10 | Now one of the things I can see right
now that we are going to need to change is
| | 07:13 | this one. This wall doesn't need to
go this deep, so we'll change its Base
| | 07:16 | Constraint, and you can do this in 3D
views as well, to this Top of Footing.
| | 07:22 | And you could see how it raises
that up and now the brick up above is
| | 07:26 | supported appropriately.
| | 07:28 | By using these steps, you'll be a
success in placing the exterior foundation
| | 07:32 | walls in any of our Revit projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating the interior walls for the main level| 00:00 | Our next step is to draw in our interior
walls in this project, and what we're
| | 00:04 | looking at here are exterior
walls up here on the first floor.
| | 00:08 | We're going to start off by drawing
in a wall that's going to come up here,
| | 00:11 | there's going to be a little bit of a gap,
and that gap is going to be a doorway
| | 00:15 | that's going to be leading into the kitchen.
| | 00:17 | And then there's going to be sort
of an L shape that comes in here.
| | 00:19 | This is going to define the
kitchen from the dining room.
| | 00:22 | Also some other walls we're going to be
drawing in are going to be a putting in
| | 00:27 | the pantry right here.
| | 00:28 | We'll have a closet for our bedroom
which is going to be down here, and then
| | 00:33 | also there will be a master bathroom
right in this location, and you'll also see
| | 00:37 | this little L-shaped looking
thing that'll show up here.
| | 00:40 | And that's just an open area, it's
going to be for our plumbing, our mechanical
| | 00:44 | systems, that sort of thing to be able
to come up from the basement and then go
| | 00:48 | out to the different parts of our house
for the heating and cooling and plumbing
| | 00:51 | throughout the structure.
| | 00:52 | Let's begin by drawing our walls.
| | 00:55 | I am going to up here to the Wall tool
which is on the Ribbon, and we need to
| | 00:59 | pick the appropriate wall.
| | 01:01 | In this case, the Interior Wall 4 1/2
inch is by far the most common wall.
| | 01:06 | So that's going to be the
wall that I am going to use.
| | 01:09 | Next I am going to zoom in here, and I
am going to make sure that all of our
| | 01:14 | base settings are correct before
I even start drawing the wall in.
| | 01:19 | This wall has the first floor as being
the Base Constraint, that's the bottom of
| | 01:22 | the wall and that's fine.
| | 01:25 | The only thing is though it
shouldn't have an offset associated with it.
| | 01:27 | We don't want the wall
floating eight feet in the air.
| | 01:29 | So I am going to set that to be 0
feet 0 inches, so that's going to be on
| | 01:33 | the first floor level.
| | 01:34 | We also need to take a
look at the Top Constraint.
| | 01:37 | How high do we want the wall to go up to?
| | 01:39 | In this case, I don't really
want to have an unconnected height.
| | 01:43 | I want to come up to the Top of Plate
which is just listed as being TOP here.
| | 01:48 | So we're just going to select on TOP,
don't need an offset height for that;
| | 01:52 | that's just going to go up to that
level, and we're going to start by drawing
| | 01:55 | our wall from the
intersection of these two walls.
| | 01:58 | One thing to take a look at first is make
sure that your Location Line is this Finish Face.
| | 02:03 | In this case, I am going to do exterior.
| | 02:06 | Usually when I am doing these drawings,
I usually try to do things like the
| | 02:09 | Core Face Exterior, but I find that
sometimes, and in this case in particular,
| | 02:14 | it doesn't always like to snap to
the intersection of where two walls are
| | 02:17 | coming together at.
| | 02:18 | So in order to be able to make this work,
we need to use the Finish Face of the
| | 02:22 | Exterior in order to bring this wall
straight on up, because you can see how it
| | 02:27 | does in fact connect at this intersection.
| | 02:29 | So I am going to click on the
intersection, start to come up, and this wall
| | 02:33 | needs to go up 15 feet 9 inches.
| | 02:38 | Next we need to be able to have
a gap in here for that doorway.
| | 02:42 | Now if I continue this wall on up, we
might be able to delete it or the way
| | 02:47 | Revit works is if you have two walls
that are very similar or exactly the same,
| | 02:51 | sitting right next to it, sometimes
it'll just make it all one piece of wall.
| | 02:54 | So that isn't going to work very well for us.
| | 02:57 | The other thing that Revit is known
for doing is sometimes you can just start
| | 03:02 | drawing and you can see as I move up,
how there are these things called
| | 03:05 | temporary dimensions which are showing up here.
| | 03:09 | The problem is that I don't exactly know
where that temporary dimension is going
| | 03:12 | to and it doesn't always show up if
I am not in the exact right location.
| | 03:17 | So by just clicking again to draw my
next wall, it's not very efficient.
| | 03:21 | So one of the things that I like to
use are these things called Detail Lines,
| | 03:25 | which I'll sometimes call as reference lines.
| | 03:29 | And by just drawing from here
to here, I could then copy it up.
| | 03:32 | So I am going to select on the line
and then use the Copy command and I am
| | 03:37 | going to copy this up 5-foot, and now this
is going to be where I start my next wall at.
| | 03:43 | Of course, I don't exactly know where
it's going to be lining up with this
| | 03:46 | wall, so we need to be able to draw that in
as well so we know where it's going to line up.
| | 03:50 | I am going to zoom in here and I am
going to pick this point on the wall.
| | 03:54 | This is the core face of this wall.
| | 03:57 | I am going to zoom out and then
I am going to come straight up.
| | 04:02 | I am going to select at this point and I
know where this line and this line intersect.
| | 04:08 | That's where the next wall needs to start at.
| | 04:10 | I'll come back to the Home tab, select on Wall.
| | 04:15 | I no longer need the Finish Face of Exterior;
| | 04:18 | I only used that because it was
the only one that worked down here.
| | 04:21 | I am going to use the Core
Face of the Exterior in this case.
| | 04:25 | I am going to zoom in, I am
going to pick that intersection.
| | 04:29 | Now this wall is flipped from the other
wall, so I am going to hit the spacebar
| | 04:33 | in order to flip it over to the correct side.
| | 04:36 | Now I am going to go straight up
and type in 2-foot 9 1/2 inches.
| | 04:41 | You can either put the inch sign or not;
| | 04:42 | it'll still draw it just the same.
| | 04:43 | I'll move over to the
left now, 12 feet 7 inches.
| | 04:51 | We now have our wall that's going to
be on the back side of the kitchen.
| | 04:54 | This is going to wrap around
some cabinetry here in the kitchen.
| | 04:57 | And we're going to have more appliances
going along this wall, so we're halfway
| | 05:01 | to actually having our kitchen drawn up.
| | 05:04 | Next I need to figure our where that
kitchen wall is going to be located at.
| | 05:09 | So what I am going to do is I am going
to draw yet another annotation line or a
| | 05:13 | Detail Line as it's called, and I am
going to draw it from here and I am going
| | 05:18 | to draw it straight down.
| | 05:20 | It's going to be 10-foot 6 inches down.
| | 05:25 | You could see in this case I move my
mouse a little bit and it went to the side.
| | 05:29 | It's not what I want to do.
| | 05:31 | So I am going to come back up here to
Annotate > Detail Line, and make sure that
| | 05:35 | you're always drawing straight down.
| | 05:37 | It's one of the most common errors
people make is that they'll look down and not
| | 05:42 | notice that their mouse did that.
| | 05:43 | So I am going to make this go
10-foot 6 inches straight down.
| | 05:50 | Next I am going to move this line over
like this, select on that line and just
| | 05:54 | sort of pull this line over
so it goes straight across.
| | 05:58 | This is going to be the
inside face of our kitchen wall.
| | 06:03 | Now from here, I am going to draw in
our kitchen wall from here on over.
| | 06:08 | So I am going to come up here to the
Home tab, select on Wall, and I am going to
| | 06:13 | pick either one of these interior walls.
| | 06:17 | In this case, this Interior Wall 4 1/
2 will work just fine for what I am
| | 06:19 | trying to accomplish.
| | 06:20 | I am going to start at this side, I am
going to click, I am going to move over
| | 06:26 | in this direction, zoom out a
little bit, it's the proper length.
| | 06:30 | I am just going to move it over here and click.
| | 06:34 | Now we have a wall here and this is
going to be the backside of our kitchen.
| | 06:39 | Now I need to start to draw in some of
the walls that are going to be making up
| | 06:41 | our pantry as well as a
closet and our bathroom area.
| | 06:47 | I'll come up to the Annotate tab, I am
going to select on Detail Line again, and
| | 06:51 | I am going to draw a line
from right here on down.
| | 06:58 | And this is going to need to be
1 foot 1-1/2 inches in length.
| | 07:03 | The reason why I am drawing this line
is that ultimately the wall that the
| | 07:07 | bathtub is going to be against is going
to be flushed with this line right here.
| | 07:14 | Now that I've done this, I am going to
select on this line and I know that the
| | 07:18 | next wall, it's going to be need
to be 5-foot down from this point.
| | 07:22 | So after I've selected on that, I am
going to select on the Copy command, come
| | 07:27 | straight down, type in 5 feet, and there
I have that line for where my next wall
| | 07:35 | is going to be located at.
| | 07:38 | Now that I know that, I
can select on my Wall tool.
| | 07:41 | This Interior Wall 4 1/2 is
still fine for this particular wall.
| | 07:44 | So I'll select on that intersection
right there and move straight on over.
| | 07:53 | Now this is the area where our bedroom is
going to be at and it's fully framed in.
| | 07:57 | Now I am going to concentrate a
little bit more in that pantry area.
| | 08:02 | Pantry area needs to be 4-
feet 4 inches from left to right.
| | 08:07 | So I am going to select on Detail Line
here, so from here on over it's going
| | 08:14 | to be 4-foot 4 inches.
| | 08:16 | Yet I know that my pantry wall is
going to be somewhere along here, but this
| | 08:21 | pantry wall, it's going to die into the
back of the closet so I need to find out
| | 08:24 | where that closet wall is going to be at.
| | 08:26 | To do that, I am going to draw a line
from here on up and I know that my closet
| | 08:30 | usually needs to be about 2 feet deep.
| | 08:32 | So I am going to make this be 2 feet 1 inches.
| | 08:36 | This 1 inch compensates for the fact
that there's thickness to this material
| | 08:41 | here, the gyp board material that
makes up the outside of our walls on
| | 08:45 | either side of the closet.
| | 08:46 | I am going to draw this line over and
this gives us a nice reference line for
| | 08:53 | where that closet wall should be at
and I'll come up, select on Wall again.
| | 08:59 | That still works fine for me, the 4 1/2 inches.
| | 09:02 | We'll move over, I'll hit the
Spacebar to flip it to the other side, and
| | 09:07 | I'll come straight over.
| | 09:12 | Once it's lined up with this line up here,
that's where I need it to be at, so that's good.
| | 09:18 | I'll also draw in another wall
that comes from here straight on down.
| | 09:23 | The only thing is though is that this
wall is going to be a little bit different.
| | 09:26 | This doesn't need to be the 4 1/2 inches wall;
| | 09:28 | this just needs to be
the Interior Wall 4 inches.
| | 09:31 | The difference between that and the 4 1/2
inch wall is the 4 1/2-inch wall has
| | 09:36 | two layers of material;
| | 09:37 | one layer of material here,
another layer material here.
| | 09:40 | It's the gyp board on the
outside of the stud wall.
| | 09:44 | This 4-inch wall only has it on one
side and that's the side that's going to be
| | 09:49 | facing into our living area.
| | 09:51 | This section on the other side of this
wall is going to be in space and no one
| | 09:55 | is ever going to be able to see, and
frankly, you don't need to have that
| | 09:57 | material there if you're
never going to be able to see it.
| | 10:01 | Now that I've done that, I know that
this closet is actually 5-foot 10 going all
| | 10:06 | the way across, not the 4-foot 4.
| | 10:09 | So I need to do this annotate line
again, the Detail Line, take it here, come
| | 10:14 | across, and I need to type in 5-
foot 10 as being my next dimension.
| | 10:19 | I'll come straight up.
| | 10:23 | Now I know that I need to draw a wall
from here to here, as well as from here on
| | 10:28 | down in order to be able
to finish off our closet.
| | 10:31 | So in order to be able to do that, I
am going to come up here to the Home tab
| | 10:34 | and I am going to once again pick on
the Wall tool, and this time I am going
| | 10:39 | to once again use this Interior Wall 4 inch for
this short little span going from here to here.
| | 10:45 | Remember you can always hit the
spacebar in order to flip the wall.
| | 10:48 | Next I am going to hit the Escape key
once and I am going to change this to be
| | 10:53 | the Interior Wall 4 1/2.
| | 10:54 | I am going to pick the intersection here,
go straight down, I'll hit the little
| | 10:58 | spacebar to flip it to other side.
| | 11:02 | You could see how this automatically cleans up.
| | 11:04 | But the nice thing is I now have my
closet for my bedroom area down here below.
| | 11:09 | I also have my pantry already complete up here.
| | 11:13 | Now we're getting pretty close but
we need to make a few more changes.
| | 11:16 | Next thing I need to do is finish off
my bathroom area over here, in particular
| | 11:22 | the area where the bathtub is going to be at.
| | 11:24 | So in order to be able to do
that I need to pick another wall.
| | 11:30 | This is going to be Interior Wall 4 inch.
| | 11:32 | I am going to click right here.
| | 11:35 | I can see that that's not quite the
right space, and if I end up hitting the
| | 11:38 | spacebar, it's not going to
flip it to the other side.
| | 11:41 | It's fairly an easy mistake to make.
| | 11:43 | So I am just going to hit the Escape key
right there, and I'll start that part over.
| | 11:47 | Next I am going to be drawing this wall
straight on up, so I am just going to zoom in here.
| | 11:51 | I am going to click right
here at the intersection.
| | 11:54 | You can see that I can't
hit this point right here.
| | 11:58 | So I need to change this to be
the Finish Face of the Exterior.
| | 12:01 | I'll come straight up, I'll hit the
spacebar to flip that over to the other
| | 12:06 | side, and I am going to
come straight up to this point.
| | 12:11 | Next I know that I need to come over,
I am not sure exactly how far over as of
| | 12:15 | just yet, I am just going to draw a
little wall that comes over and I'll finish
| | 12:18 | that up in a second.
| | 12:20 | Now I know that there is going to be
another wall that's going to be 8-foot 4
| | 12:24 | inches from here on over.
| | 12:26 | So I am going to once again use
those Annotate and the Detail Line.
| | 12:30 | I am going to select a point right
there, I am going to draw a wall or a line
| | 12:36 | that's going to be 8-foot 4 inches over,
come straight down, I am going to click
| | 12:43 | on this wall, I am going to drag it over,
and next I am going to draw in another
| | 12:47 | wall to sort of finish this off.
| | 12:49 | 4-inch is just fine with me.
| | 12:53 | I am going to click on
this point, come straight up.
| | 12:56 | Now the only thing that I dislike about
this is that this wall should really be
| | 13:01 | right here and there's really nothing I
could have done about it at that point.
| | 13:04 | So I am going to use the Move command
in order to finish that off and move that
| | 13:08 | over to the right location.
| | 13:09 | In fact, I need to move over just a little
bit farther, so I'll go ahead and do that.
| | 13:16 | There we go!
| | 13:19 | Now that's all lined up.
| | 13:21 | We now have that L shape that I was describing.
| | 13:22 | There is your bathroom area in here.
| | 13:26 | We have the appropriate finished materials.
| | 13:29 | Now there's one last thing that we need
to accomplish after deleting these lines
| | 13:33 | that we no longer need, and that is to
be able to get each of these walls to be
| | 13:40 | the right thickness, because as of
right now, really only one of them is
| | 13:44 | appropriately constructed really.
| | 13:46 | The reason is that this wall is
appropriate because there's no plumbing going
| | 13:50 | through it and it has a material on each side.
| | 13:53 | But this one needs to be
built just like these walls.
| | 13:55 | So in order to be able to accomplish
that, I need to select on that wall and
| | 13:58 | use the Split tool.
| | 13:59 | Theoretically, it's called Split Element.
| | 14:01 | And if I click here and I click here,
I now have a wall that's here, a wall
| | 14:08 | that's here, and a wall that's here.
| | 14:09 | If I select on this wall, I can now
change it to be Interior Wall 4-inch
| | 14:14 | just like these were.
| | 14:15 | And if I select on this wall right here,
this wall is ultimately going to be a
| | 14:19 | plumbing wall, we're going to have a
sink sitting right here and it needs to
| | 14:23 | have the pipe going through it, so it
needs to be a thicker wall in order for
| | 14:27 | the pipe to fit inside of it.
| | 14:28 | So this is going to be an Interior
Wall 6 1/2-inch right here in order to be
| | 14:33 | able to put the pipe through and
have it actually fit and work out.
| | 14:39 | Now we need to be able to move on
and create our interior walls down in
| | 14:42 | our basement.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating the interior walls for the basement level| 00:00 | Now we need to draw our
interior walls down on our basement.
| | 00:03 | Now just because they're interior
walls, it doesn't mean that they're not
| | 00:05 | necessarily important or structural walls.
| | 00:09 | In certain cases, the can be.
| | 00:10 | And in case of the first that we're
going to be drawing, which is considered a
| | 00:14 | bearing wall, that bearing wall is
going to move from this wall straight across
| | 00:19 | over to here, and it'll be
holding up the first floor up above.
| | 00:23 | Now in order to be able to draw that in,
we need to know the location of it.
| | 00:27 | So in order to be able to figure that
out, I am going to come up here to my
| | 00:30 | Annotate tab and I am
going to pick on Detail Line.
| | 00:33 | Now I know from doing a little bit of
math earlier what the span distance is.
| | 00:37 | And when we say span distance, it's
whenever you have structural members holding up
| | 00:41 | flooring weight up above, different
thicknesses and materials, different kinds
| | 00:47 | of materials, such as 2x4s, 2x8s, 2x10s,
2x12s, can only span so far before they
| | 00:54 | start to fall in or they can no
longer hold the weight anymore.
| | 00:57 | In this case, I know that I need to
have this wall be no more than 19-foot 10
| | 01:04 | inches down in order to be able to
still accommodate for that span distance
| | 01:08 | without the first floor
just falling into the basement.
| | 01:11 | So I am drawing a line straight down
from the face of this foundation wall down
| | 01:16 | that 19-foot 10 inches.
| | 01:18 | Now I am going to draw a line going
across and a line right over here and this
| | 01:24 | is where that bearing wall
is going to be located at.
| | 01:26 | So I am going to come over to the Home
tab, select on Wall, I am going to draw
| | 01:31 | in a wall from here all the way on over.
| | 01:34 | I need to build a little bit thicker wall,
because it's going to be holding up a
| | 01:37 | tremendous amount of weight.
| | 01:38 | So it's going to be the Interior Wall 6 1/2.
| | 01:41 | I am going to zoom in.
| | 01:44 | We want to make sure that isn't
the Finish Face of the Exterior,
| | 01:48 | we want this to be the
Core Face of the Exterior.
| | 01:51 | So stud to stud, or the structural member,
the structural member, it's going to be
| | 01:55 | that 19-foot 10-inch dimension.
| | 01:59 | Also, we want to make sure that the
information over here underneath properties
| | 02:03 | of this wall is appropriate.
| | 02:05 | In this case, having to go up to the
top of footing for the porch isn't right.
| | 02:09 | You need to go up to our Top of
Foundation level in order for this to support
| | 02:14 | and just work out the way
that we need it to work out.
| | 02:18 | Next, make sure this says basement.
| | 02:20 | If it doesn't say basement, make sure to
place it there, because we need this as
| | 02:23 | be sitting on our basement floor
when it's all drawn out and done.
| | 02:28 | Make your first click where this line
touches this wall and then move over
| | 02:32 | directly to the right, all the way on
over, and die it into this wall over here.
| | 02:40 | Now we have a wall that's going
straight across here and it's going to be
| | 02:43 | supporting the upper level.
| | 02:45 | Now that we have that wall in place, we
need to start thinking about where some
| | 02:48 | of our other walls are going to be located.
| | 02:50 | I know that we want a
utility room area down here.
| | 02:53 | We're going to have a
storage area right in here.
| | 02:56 | There's going to be a bathroom
actually right where my mouse is
| | 02:59 | currently sitting at.
| | 03:01 | Right up here, there's going to be a bedroom.
| | 03:04 | For now, I want to put in that bedroom.
| | 03:07 | We also need to figure out what's
the width of that bedroom going to be.
| | 03:10 | So I am going to come up here at the Annotate
tab and I am going to select on Detail Line.
| | 03:16 | Zoom in just a little bit and I am
going to click here and I am going to
| | 03:19 | move over to the right.
| | 03:21 | And in this case, I am going to have
my bedroom be 10-foot 8 1/2 inches.
| | 03:26 | Now the reason why I chose this and it
does seem like a rather odd dimension
| | 03:30 | when you first look at it, while it is
a decent sized bedroom, it's not a huge
| | 03:35 | bedroom and you can see I am
drawing a wall or a line straight up.
| | 03:39 | That's where our wall is going to be at.
| | 03:40 | But I found out that wherever we're
going to be placing our stairs later on in
| | 03:45 | the project, that this bedroom needs to
be as narrow as it possibly can be and
| | 03:50 | still be nice and functional in order for the
stairs to be drawn in at the right location.
| | 03:56 | Now whenever you're drawing in stairs,
and your staircase is going to be here
| | 03:59 | going across the top wall, you need to
have enough room for a landing at the
| | 04:03 | bottom of the staircase.
| | 04:04 | You need to be able to take that last
step off, step on the basement floor, and
| | 04:08 | have enough room to be able to move
around, maybe drop a piece of furniture down
| | 04:12 | there, whatever the case maybe, and
also for code reasons, you need to have
| | 04:16 | enough room at the bottom of your staircase.
| | 04:18 | In order to maximize all that as
well as have room up at the top of our
| | 04:22 | staircase from landing as well, our
bedroom can't be any wider than 10-foot 8
| | 04:26 | 1/2 in this particular design.
| | 04:30 | So I've drawn this line in right here.
| | 04:32 | Next I am going to come over to the
Home tab and draw in yet another wall.
| | 04:36 | Now this wall doesn't need to be
structural, so it doesn't have to support
| | 04:39 | anything other than just the
components that make up the wall itself.
| | 04:43 | So this is going to be an Interior
Wall 4 1/2-inch, just like a lot of the
| | 04:46 | walls that we have up in the upper level.
| | 04:48 | I am going to start this
up at the line right here.
| | 04:52 | I am going to come straight down.
| | 04:55 | Now I can afford to hit the spacebar
here because that's where this 10-foot 8
| | 04:59 | 1/2 dimension was going to, to the
inside core of this wall, and I am just going
| | 05:05 | to move this wall straight down
until it intersects this wall right here.
| | 05:10 | Now we have our bedroom area
for down here in the lower level.
| | 05:14 | The next thing we need
to do is draw a closet in.
| | 05:18 | You actually can't legally have a
bedroom down here without having a closet,
| | 05:24 | otherwise you have to
advertise as just being another room.
| | 05:27 | So in order to be able to do things
such as add resale value to your house,
| | 05:30 | et cetera, it's always nice to actually
build in a closet into these spaces, be
| | 05:34 | able to call it a bedroom, and then if
it comes time to resell these houses,
| | 05:38 | then you can claim that hey, there's
another bedroom that usually adds X number
| | 05:43 | of dollars to your resale value of your
house when it comes time to resell it.
| | 05:47 | So I am going to, once again, use the
Annotate tab, use Detail Line, and I am
| | 05:54 | going to draw a line from right here
straight down and it's going to be 2-foot 1
| | 05:59 | inch, and this is going to
represent the depth of our closet space.
| | 06:03 | I am going to select another wall, it's
going to be this 4-1/2-inch wall, pick
| | 06:09 | it here, and move directly over to the right.
| | 06:13 | I know how far over that I need this to
be roughly, but I don't really know it
| | 06:17 | from where I had to insert this wall in from.
| | 06:19 | I do know that from the face of this
wall out in this direction, I need my
| | 06:24 | closet to be 8-foot 5-1/2 inches long.
| | 06:28 | So that's what I am going to do.
| | 06:29 | So I am going to come in here and use
the Annotate > Detail Line again and this is
| | 06:34 | going to be 8-foot 5-1/2 in this direction.
| | 06:38 | I'll come straight down, I am going
to select on this wall, I am just going
| | 06:44 | to verify the properties of the wall
and make sure that it's all going to
| | 06:47 | where it's supposed to.
| | 06:48 | Yup, it's top of the
foundation, down to the basement.
| | 06:52 | All your walls should be that down here.
| | 06:54 | Now I am going to select on this little
dot and I am going to pull it over, so
| | 06:57 | this wall is in the location that it
should be and now we're going to do a wall
| | 07:01 | from right here and bring it on up.
| | 07:03 | So I am going to select
another wall, once again 4-1/2-inch;
| | 07:08 | that works just fine with me, and you
can see how these walls start to clean up
| | 07:14 | on themselves just automatically
which is a real nice function of Revit.
| | 07:18 | For the most part, it will try to clean
up the walls as much as it can as long
| | 07:21 | as the material of the same thickness
and the same property is associated with
| | 07:24 | them, or similar thicknesses.
| | 07:27 | In this case, we have a 3-1/2 and a 5
-1/2-inch structure there, but since
| | 07:31 | they're the same material, they clean
up just nice and fine with one another.
| | 07:36 | Now we have one more room that we really
need to draw in, well technically two.
| | 07:40 | The one is going to be the utility room and
there's going to be a bathroom right here.
| | 07:44 | And by default, once we've drawn those
two things in, there will be a storage
| | 07:47 | area that just automatically gets
developed down here in the corner.
| | 07:51 | Now in order to do this, I know that
our next wall needs to be 6-foot 8 inches
| | 07:55 | off of the edge of this wall.
| | 07:57 | So I can select on this line which is
already there and just copy it over,
| | 08:01 | 6-foot 8 inches in this direction,
and we'll have a wall that gets drawn
| | 08:08 | down directly from here.
| | 08:11 | I know that wall intersects here, so I
am going to have these two, this line and
| | 08:14 | this wall, intersect one another.
| | 08:16 | Next, I am going to select on the wall,
I am going to make sure that this is
| | 08:20 | still going to the right locations, and it is.
| | 08:23 | Core Face Exterior, that's just fine.
| | 08:25 | I'll click, I'll move straight down,
hit the spacebar so that wall is going on
| | 08:30 | the other side, come down like this,
and you can see how these walls end up
| | 08:36 | cleaning up on one another, and that's okay
for what we're trying to accomplish today.
| | 08:39 | I am going to select on these lines,
get rid of these extra lines because we
| | 08:45 | don't really need them right now
and I don't want to forget about them.
| | 08:48 | Now there's one more space that we
really need to develop and that's going to
| | 08:51 | be a bathroom in here.
| | 08:53 | It's the only bathroom that we
have here on the lower level.
| | 08:55 | Now in order to do that, I need to
select on Annotate, I am going to come in
| | 09:00 | here and select once again on a Detail
Line, and I know that this next one needs
| | 09:04 | to come out 9 feet 7 inches in
this direction off of this wall.
| | 09:11 | So, and in this case, it actually is 9-
foot 7 off of this point right here, so
| | 09:15 | on this exterior face of the wall.
| | 09:18 | So I am going to move over 9-foot 7,
I am going to come straight down.
| | 09:31 | There will be a wall that eventually
comes in right there, and I know that that
| | 09:35 | wall needs to be 5-foot long.
| | 09:39 | So what I am going to do is I am
going to come over, pick another wall.
| | 09:45 | You can kind of see how this dashed
line ends up showing up that tells me
| | 09:48 | they're still lined up appropriately.
| | 09:50 | I am going to click here, I am going
to move straight down, I am going to
| | 09:54 | flip this over to the other side, and the
dimension for this is going to need to be 5-foot.
| | 09:59 | So I am just going to type in 5-foot and
you can see how that moved itself down.
| | 10:05 | I know that from here I need to go over
2-foot 6 inches. And I am not drawing in
| | 10:12 | these detail lines here, because this
just happens to be right along the path
| | 10:15 | that I need to draw.
| | 10:17 | And I know that these
walls are just going to work.
| | 10:19 | It's almost an experience thing.
| | 10:20 | I know exactly where it needs to go.
| | 10:23 | This next one is going to come down 11
inches, and then I am going to come over
| | 10:29 | and just tie into this
wall immediately over here.
| | 10:34 | Now how this is going to work, when
it's all said and done, you can see I am
| | 10:37 | starting to get rid of some of these
lines right here, is that this space right
| | 10:43 | here is going to have a bathtub in it,
it'll have a sink right here, and it'll
| | 10:48 | have a toilet right here, and this is
going to end up being our storage area,
| | 10:53 | this would be our utility room, this
is going to be the guest closet, this is
| | 10:58 | going to be the guest room or the
bedroom number two, and this is ultimately
| | 11:02 | going to be our living room
space down here in the lower level.
| | 11:08 | In conclusion, it takes some time to
actually lay in all these different
| | 11:11 | interior walls and you need to use different
tools in order to be able to accomplish it.
| | 11:17 | Some people will just do it
by doing nothing but walls.
| | 11:20 | Other people would do it the way that I
did, using the Annotate tools and using
| | 11:24 | Detail Lines to figure out their locations.
| | 11:27 | Personally, I believe that using the
Annotate tool and the Detail Lines,
| | 11:31 | while technically it takes slightly longer to
do it this way, it's actually more accurate.
| | 11:36 | The reason is if a wall has just
moved just slightly in one direction or
| | 11:40 | another, then it can mess up all
the other walls that it's attached to.
| | 11:44 | For an example, if I would select
on this wall and then just move it a
| | 11:48 | certain distance, let's say 6 inches
in this case, you can see how this wall
| | 11:53 | adjusts along with it.
| | 11:55 | If I was trying to just randomly draw
walls in and drag them up or drag them
| | 11:59 | down and put them in place without using
the Annotate lines instead, then all my
| | 12:04 | walls would have been just slightly off
and I'd be constantly readjusting each
| | 12:08 | and every wall so that I had the
appropriate dimensions associated with them.
| | 12:14 | Now since I don't want this wall being
at the location I just moved it to, I
| | 12:17 | am going to come up here to this
little Back arrow here which is called Undo,
| | 12:20 | and undo the last command and you can
see that all my walls are now back in
| | 12:24 | their proper locations.
| | 12:26 | So using your Annotate tools in order
to be able to generate the linework that
| | 12:30 | these walls should follow would
greatly simplify drawing your interior walls
| | 12:34 | and spaces.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating footings| 00:00 | Now we need to add footings below all
those foundation walls we created in
| | 00:04 | the earlier exercises.
| | 00:05 | In order to be able to do that, I
need to first come in here and I am going
| | 00:10 | to flip this to a 3D view, so we can take a
look at our building from the underneath side.
| | 00:14 | Now we can draw those footings in
underneath our foundation walls, pretty
| | 00:18 | easily inside of a Floor Plan view if we wished.
| | 00:21 | But I always like to do it
inside of this kind of 3D view.
| | 00:24 | So I can actually see the footings
get created as I am clicking to actually
| | 00:27 | place them in the project.
| | 00:30 | Now underneath the Structure tab
right here, we'll find that there are some
| | 00:34 | foundation options for us, and part of
those foundation options is this thing
| | 00:39 | called Wall Foundation.
| | 00:40 | This really is a footing that goes on the
underneath side of our foundation walls.
| | 00:44 | So I am going to click on Wall here,
and it's important that I pick the
| | 00:48 | right size footing.
| | 00:50 | In this case, I am going to use the
30x12 around the perimeter and that 36x12
| | 00:56 | in another location.
| | 00:57 | Now that other location is going to be
underneath this bearing wall right here.
| | 01:01 | Just by typical construction practices
we usually have that nice big footing
| | 01:06 | underneath the bearing wall that's
holding all that weight up there in the
| | 01:08 | middle, and then little bit smaller
footings, atleast shape wise, underneath
| | 01:13 | our foundation walls.
| | 01:14 | I am going to go with this 30x12 and
just start clicking on the underneath side
| | 01:18 | of each of these walls.
| | 01:20 | You can see, every time than I click on the
wall, it places a new footing in its place.
| | 01:24 | So I need to make sure that it
pick up each and every one of these.
| | 01:30 | I am going to spin it around us a
little bit more to make sure I got them all.
| | 01:32 | It looks likes these are the little wall
right here that still needs to get picked up.
| | 01:36 | So I can click on that and you can see
how these footings on the underneath side
| | 01:40 | of these walls are starting to get cleaned up.
| | 01:42 | Now I also need to add that other
footing, that 36x12, on the underneath side
| | 01:47 | of this bearing wall.
| | 01:48 | So I am just going to click
right here and you can see how that
| | 01:50 | automatically gets added in.
| | 01:53 | Now if I select on this word that says
Bottom here in my View Cube, I can view
| | 01:58 | this from the underneath side.
| | 02:00 | The only thing that happened here is
that you can see that this is just a little
| | 02:04 | bit off, and how this the corner right
here and this, just aren't lining up with
| | 02:09 | one another quite the way
that you'd like to see it.
| | 02:11 | You'd like to see these all be the
straight line going straight on back, and
| | 02:15 | this relates back to the actual
thicknesses of the walls and how Revit tries to
| | 02:19 | center this on the wall based on
the thickness of the wall up above it.
| | 02:25 | So this can be adjusted fairly easily.
| | 02:27 | If I just select on one or multiple
of these walls, I can then come into
| | 02:32 | this category here, the
Eccentricity category, and change this to be a
| | 02:37 | different dimension.
| | 02:38 | In this case I am going to try
2 inches and see what it does.
| | 02:42 | You can see when we used 2 inches,
it just slides everything over.
| | 02:46 | But the wall is still bearing all
its weight on top of that footing.
| | 02:49 | I am going to do the same
thing here with this wall.
| | 02:52 | I am going to come up, change it to be 2
inches as well, and now you can see how
| | 02:58 | that footing is all lined up on the
right-hand side as well as on the left-hand
| | 03:02 | side, and each of our structural walls
now has a nice strong supporting footing
| | 03:07 | underneath it to be able to bear
the weight of the building up above.
| | 03:11 | Whenever you're designing a house, you
always have to remember to be able to
| | 03:14 | model these footings, and it's very
tempting to just draw these walls around the
| | 03:19 | perimeter and not put the footings in.
| | 03:22 | But it's not really an accurate
representation of how the house needs to be
| | 03:25 | built and when you consider, this only
took us a couple minutes to place these in.
| | 03:30 | It's not really worth the effort of
not placing them in when you can have an
| | 03:34 | actual, accurate model by using your
Foundation and Wall tools to create the
| | 03:40 | footings around the perimeter
and interior of your buildings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Doors and WindowsAdding doors to the project| 00:00 | Now that we have our exterior and
interior walls drawn, we can go about the
| | 00:04 | process of placing in our
doorways into our Revit project.
| | 00:09 | In order to do that I'm going to start
by zooming in on our first floor plan and
| | 00:13 | this is the area where our front door is
going to be located, and traditionally
| | 00:18 | whenever you're going to be placing
doors inside of a house, you'd like it have
| | 00:21 | them being numbered in sequence
consecutively from the front door.
| | 00:25 | So I am going to come up here to our Door
command, choose off the pulldown list, Front Door.
| | 00:33 | After selecting onto the door, you
will see this little circle with kind of a
| | 00:36 | line going through it.
| | 00:37 | What that indicates is that there's nothing
to place the door up against as of this moment.
| | 00:42 | I sometimes joke and call it my no smoking
sign, because that's kind of what it looks like.
| | 00:47 | But the reality of it is that it'll go
away the second that you touch a wall.
| | 00:51 | Doors require walls in order for them to
be constructed and built, which kind of makes
| | 00:56 | sense because you can't install a door
without a wall or something to attach it
| | 01:00 | to in real life either.
| | 01:02 | In this case, I am going to place my
front door here at the front of the house
| | 01:06 | and I'd like it to be roughly 2 foot
6 off the corner of the house here.
| | 01:11 | I am going to hit spacebar to flip it
to the other side and then I am going to
| | 01:15 | click in order to place the front door.
| | 01:18 | Now you might remember that one of the
things that I said is that this should
| | 01:21 | always start with number 1 and we
kind of number our doors consecutively
| | 01:24 | from that point on.
| | 01:25 | Unfortunately, right now this is
listing out as being door number 14.
| | 01:29 | We don't want this to be door number 14.
| | 01:31 | So in order to be able to fix that, I
am going to hit Escape a couple times to
| | 01:35 | get out of the Door command, and then I
am going to try to move my mouse over
| | 01:38 | here where the number 14 is at.
| | 01:40 | If I kept moving my mouse around eventually
I'd get the number 14 to highlight.
| | 01:44 | You just saw it highlight there for
just a moment, and then I could click on
| | 01:48 | this, click on the number 14 and just
type in any number that I wanted to.
| | 01:52 | In this case, it'd be the number 1.
| | 01:53 | One of the things that I actually find
easier is to select on the door first,
| | 01:58 | then underneath Properties, change this
from being mark number 14 to be number 1.
| | 02:04 | Then if you move your mouse outside
the Properties box here, you will see it
| | 02:08 | automatically changes that number so
that this door is now door number 1.
| | 02:13 | The advantage of that, other than the
fact that, well, this should be door number
| | 02:17 | 1, is that every door that we place
from here on out is going to continue on
| | 02:21 | with that numbering sequence.
| | 02:22 | So the next door that we place, in this
case, is going to be a door leading into
| | 02:27 | our bedroom, a Single-Flush 36x80
will now be door number 2.
| | 02:33 | When I am placing this door in, I
always like to have these doors be at least 1
| | 02:37 | foot 10 inch off of the nearest wall.
| | 02:40 | I will go ahead and click, now that I
have this 1 foot 10 inch to mention in place.
| | 02:45 | You can see this is door number 2,
let's keep it in a sequence, and this is 4
| | 02:49 | inches off of the wall.
| | 02:51 | Now the real reason why I'd like to
have it 4 inches off the wall is because
| | 02:55 | that's how big of a distance you need in
order to be able to easily have a piece
| | 02:58 | of trim going around the exterior of
your door, to have doorframe be able to
| | 03:03 | actually fit into the wall and be
able to be securely attached to the wall
| | 03:07 | without smashing into the wall
that's sitting right next to.
| | 03:12 | So it's just a nice clean construction
technique to keep it at least 4 inches
| | 03:17 | off of the wall that's it's swinging toward.
| | 03:20 | Next we have this bathroom area.
| | 03:22 | I am going to keep with that rule of
1 foot 10 off of the wall and click
| | 03:27 | when you achieve that.
| | 03:28 | Here you can see that this is door
number 3, 2, 1, and all the other doors
| | 03:32 | we will be placing.
| | 03:33 | Regardless of the type we will
continue this numbering sequence around
| | 03:37 | through our project.
| | 03:38 | Next I am going to place the door right here.
| | 03:40 | So I am going to activate the Door
command, and this door isn't going to be the
| | 03:45 | same type of door we've been using.
| | 03:46 | This one is going to a closet door.
| | 03:48 | So I am going to use this 60x84 door
and I am going to place it here in the wall,
| | 03:53 | and I am just going to
center it right in that space.
| | 03:55 | In this case, you can see it's 2
foot 10 and a half on each side.
| | 03:58 | I'll click and now we have door number 4 and
it's a closet door leading to the closet space.
| | 04:05 | The next area that we want to do is the pantry.
| | 04:07 | It's right up here.
| | 04:08 | It's going to be a Single-Flush door,
36x80, and I am going to have this
| | 04:15 | swing out into the room.
| | 04:17 | If you ever want to flip the door swing,
remember you can just hit the spacebar
| | 04:20 | here and it will flip it from being a
right-hand swing to being a left-hand
| | 04:24 | swing, and I'll click to place it.
| | 04:27 | Now there is one more door we need to
place up on this level, and that's going
| | 04:32 | to be doors that are going to be leading
out to our back porch which is going to
| | 04:35 | be out here in the back of our building.
| | 04:36 | I am going to select on the doors
again and this time I am going to choose
| | 04:41 | this Double-Glass 1.
| | 04:43 | It's sort of like your typical French
doors and it can swing either in or out.
| | 04:47 | In this case, I want this door just
to be able to swing into our space.
| | 04:51 | It's kind of more traditional.
| | 04:52 | It's a better way for the doors to
swing in whenever you're dealing with doors
| | 04:57 | that are leading either in or out of a building.
| | 05:00 | If it's a residential, they usually swing in.
| | 05:02 | Oftentimes, if it's commercial,
they will oftentimes swing out.
| | 05:07 | So since this is a residential unit,
the doors are going to swing in. And
| | 05:11 | this needs to be at least 6 foot off
of the edge of our house, and the reason
| | 05:16 | why I am choosing this dimension is
it's going to help us get it centered
| | 05:19 | nice and neat on the deck that we are going
to have coming off of the back of the building.
| | 05:25 | So once I get that 6 foot dimension, I
am going to click and now we have door
| | 05:28 | number 6 swinging in and
leading out to our soon-to-be deck.
| | 05:35 | Now we need to go down into our lower level.
| | 05:37 | So I am going to double-click on Basement,
open that one up, and we need to start
| | 05:41 | by placing a door that's going to
be leading into our utility room area.
| | 05:44 | So I am going to come up to Door,
select on Door, I am going to pick the
| | 05:49 | Single-Flush 36x80 again, and I am just
going to center it in this opening right here.
| | 05:55 | It's not really a big space.
| | 05:56 | It just barely fits in here, but it does fit.
| | 05:58 | Now I am going to hit the spacebar to flip
it from being a right-hand swing to the left.
| | 06:05 | You can see that's door number 7 there.
| | 06:07 | The next door that we are going to
place is going to be door number 8.
| | 06:09 | We will keep it at 1 foot 10, hit the
spacebar to flip it to the other side and click.
| | 06:14 | You will notice as long as I don't hit
Escape too many times, it will keep me
| | 06:18 | inside of Door command.
| | 06:20 | So I can keep placing these doors again
and again and again, fairly quickly, and
| | 06:26 | just remembering to hit the spacebar
to flip it so it's on the correct side.
| | 06:31 | Now there is one more door that we
need to place or actually two more doors
| | 06:33 | that we need to place.
| | 06:35 | The next is going to be right here.
| | 06:37 | It's going to be our closet door.
| | 06:38 | So I am just going to select where it
has Single-Flush and I am going to do yet
| | 06:43 | another closet door.
| | 06:45 | This time we are going to try the 72x80.
| | 06:47 | It's a rather large door, but it
will fit in the space. I'll click here.
| | 06:52 | You can see that that door is now in
there and finally we need to do one more
| | 06:56 | door so we can actually get into the
bedroom to access that closet, and that's
| | 07:00 | going to be once again the Single-
Flush door, 1 foot 10 off the wall, swinging
| | 07:07 | into the space and this is our door number 11.
| | 07:11 | Ultimately, we are going to have a
twelfth door; that will be a door that comes
| | 07:14 | here and swings out, but that's going
to be part of our Curtain-Wall assembly
| | 07:18 | when we have a nice big window
coming along the back here and we will be
| | 07:22 | designing that in future videos.
| | 07:25 | In short though, whenever you are going
to be doing doors, just remember if you
| | 07:29 | want to place the door, you should
always start with your front door and that
| | 07:32 | should be door number 1.
| | 07:34 | As you place it around, it should
be in sequence so it's easy to find
| | 07:37 | those doors if you are ever going to look
up the sizes of the doors on a door schedule.
| | 07:41 | If you want to have the door swing in
or out, it all comes based on wherever
| | 07:46 | your cursor is, whether it's on the
outside of the wall or on the inside of the wall.
| | 07:49 | That will swing the door in that
direction where your cursor is at.
| | 07:52 | And finally, if you ever hit the
spacebar, that will flip the door swing from
| | 07:56 | being a left-hand swing door to
being a right-hand swing door.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding windows to the project| 00:00 | Now we need to place windows
down on our lower level here.
| | 00:03 | In particular, we need to place a window in our
bedroom area which is right in this spot here.
| | 00:08 | So I'm going to zoom in, I'm going to come
up to our Window tool and select on Window.
| | 00:14 | Now you'll notice that there is
really only one size window that we have
| | 00:16 | available to us, it's a rather large 36x72
window, and it happens to be the
| | 00:22 | perfect size to allow for what's called
egress out of our bedroom area down here.
| | 00:27 | Now what egress is, is it's the ability
to be able to get out of your window in
| | 00:30 | case there is a fire or some sort of
emergency, and you need to have enough space
| | 00:35 | to be able to crawl through your window
in order to be able to get out of your
| | 00:39 | building and it's actually code
in most locations.
| | 00:41 | Now I'm going to place this window
against this wall roughly right about here,
| | 00:45 | but we still probably going to need to
make a little bit of an adjustment to it,
| | 00:49 | because I'd like it to be 6 feet
off the edge of this wall right here.
| | 00:53 | So I'm going to select on this, click
on this little dot, bring it over, and
| | 00:59 | I'm just going to type
in 6 foot and bring it back.
| | 01:03 | So now that 6 foot off the edge of the
building and also this is going to be
| | 01:08 | pretty much centered underneath the
deck that we're going to have built off the
| | 01:11 | back end of the structure.
| | 01:14 | Next I'm going to zoom out, take a
little bit better look at our building and
| | 01:17 | now I'm going to come up to the
first floor and add some windows.
| | 01:21 | Now we're going to have a window that
going to be right here, it's going to be
| | 01:24 | in the kitchen area, and it's going
to be pretty close to centered to this
| | 01:27 | walkway we are going to have in the kitchen.
| | 01:29 | Also there is going to be three
windows down here inside of our master bedroom
| | 01:33 | or our bedroom 1 area. There will be three
windows here looking into our great room space.
| | 01:39 | There will also be three windows here
lighting up the backside of our great room
| | 01:43 | space, our dining room area here, as
well the staircase that's ultimately going
| | 01:48 | to be drawn in, in this location.
| | 01:50 | So I'm going to start by dropping in a
window and I'm going to zoom in this area
| | 01:56 | right here, and I'm going to try to
place the window so it's kind of where it
| | 02:01 | needs to be, but I won't really know
until I can click where it's going to go.
| | 02:06 | I know that this needs to be 17 feet 4
off of the structural edge here to the
| | 02:12 | center of where this window is going to be at.
| | 02:14 | So what I'm going to need to do is I'm
going to need to select on the window.
| | 02:18 | Next I'm going to click on this
little dot here and I have two choices;
| | 02:21 | I can either pull it to the end like
this or I can just click on that little dot
| | 02:26 | and it'll go to all the different
spots it can grab onto that wall.
| | 02:33 | You can see the same thing works
when I get to the center of the window.
| | 02:37 | So I'm going to select on the 17
foot 8 dimension, and I'm going to change
| | 02:41 | this to be 17 foot 4.
| | 02:44 | That puts it in the space roughly
where I like to be at and it should look
| | 02:48 | good when we walk in.
| | 02:50 | Next I'm going to have three windows down here.
| | 02:57 | Once again, the temporary dimensions are on
the exact location that I need them to be in.
| | 03:00 | There's really no way for me
to adjust that, but that's okay.
| | 03:03 | We'll just place the window in and
adjust after the fact, and this needs to
| | 03:07 | 4 foot 7 off the
structural edge of this wall here.
| | 03:13 | So once again, I'm just going to
select on the window, I'm going to click on
| | 03:16 | the little dots here, you can see
how the dimension automatically places
| | 03:20 | itself in the right location after clicking on
those dots and I can type in 4 foot 7 inches.
| | 03:28 | Next I'm going to copy
this window over two times.
| | 03:32 | What this is going to allow us to do
is it'll be able to have each of these
| | 03:35 | windows 3 foot 5 inches apart from one another.
| | 03:39 | By the way, make sure the checkmark is
here in the Multiple box as it'll allow
| | 03:43 | us to use the Copy command more than one time.
| | 03:45 | Now the thing about this 3 foot 5 inch
dimension is that it makes it so it's a
| | 03:50 | structurally sound A, wall and B,
condition between each of the windows.
| | 03:56 | There is enough room to be able to put
your 2x4 construction in here and be able
| | 04:01 | to brace those windows and
support the wall up above.
| | 04:06 | Now that we have three windows, each of
them 3 foot 5 inches apart, we're going
| | 04:10 | to have the exact same condition right
over here at the front of our building.
| | 04:14 | So I'm going to zoom in here.
| | 04:18 | I'm going to execute the Window command
again and I'm just going to place this
| | 04:23 | in the rough location where I'd
want it to be at, somewhere in here.
| | 04:28 | Now that I've done that, I'm going
to select back on the window and this
| | 04:31 | time I'm going to want it to be 4 foot 5
inches off of the structural part of this wall.
| | 04:36 | By clicking on the little dot, you can
see that I was able to get it to that
| | 04:40 | location and I'm going to
change this to be 4 foot 5.
| | 04:47 | Now I can select on the window again,
use the Copy command and copy it over
| | 04:52 | twice 3 foot 5 inches.
| | 05:02 | I am going to do the same process one
more time, up here in this corner, and these
| | 05:06 | windows are going to help light this
space and it's going to be flooded with
| | 05:10 | light because ultimately we're going
to have some atrium windows here in the
| | 05:13 | back with a nice lookout of
whatever we have here in the backyard area.
| | 05:18 | We'll start off by selecting on Window,
moving this down, and this window is
| | 05:26 | going to be 5 foot 4 off the corner, so
it really needs to be down about where
| | 05:29 | I'm showing it right here.
| | 05:30 | I'm going to select on this window.
| | 05:33 | Now I'm noticing that the glass is on
the inside of the space and I'd rather
| | 05:37 | this glass would be on this side.
| | 05:39 | So I'm just going to click on the little
double arrows here to flip it to the other side.
| | 05:43 | So now the exterior of the window
is on the outside of our building.
| | 05:47 | I'm going to click on this dot to get
it to the right location, and this time
| | 05:51 | this is going to be a 5 foot 4 inch dimension.
| | 05:56 | Select back on the Window again, use
the Copy command, 3 foot 5 and 3 foot 5.
| | 06:08 | Now even know this all has looked
two-dimensional up to this point.
| | 06:12 | Let's take a look at this in a 3D
View, so we have a better idea of what
| | 06:15 | we've drawn up till now.
| | 06:17 | So clicked on the little 3D house here,
and if we spin it around you can start to
| | 06:24 | see our doors, you can start to see why
it shows those dimensions, because now
| | 06:27 | we have the doors and windows lined
up over the top of each other here.
| | 06:31 | We can see through the windows and
we can see three-dimensionally how our
| | 06:36 | building is going to look up to this point.
| | 06:40 | By doing these steps, you realize it's
really easy to just place these windows
| | 06:43 | in and then move them
later to the right locations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding an atrium window using curtain walls| 00:00 | Now that we have the windows in this
project, the next thing we need to do is
| | 00:03 | add some atrium windows to
the back of the building.
| | 00:06 | An atrium window is going to be right
here, another atrium window right here,
| | 00:13 | letting in a lot of sunlight in your
space as well as projecting a dynamic view
| | 00:18 | outside of the back of our building.
| | 00:21 | To begin with, I am going to come into
our Floor Plan view here and I am going
| | 00:24 | to go to our Basement view.
| | 00:25 | We're going to add this
atrium window in this location.
| | 00:31 | The thing about an atrium window
though is it's not actually a window, it's
| | 00:35 | really a series of panels that makeup
what's called a Curtain Wall assembly.
| | 00:39 | Now, in order to be able to place
that, I mean because it's not a window
| | 00:43 | and it's a curtain wall assembly, it's going
to be located underneath our Wall commands.
| | 00:48 | One thing I want to do first though is
I want to make sure that when I place
| | 00:52 | this Curtain Wall that it's
going to be in the right location.
| | 00:56 | So, to do that, I am going to zoom in
on this of my building first and I am
| | 01:00 | going to mark where I want my start point of
this wall assembly to be located at in our wall.
| | 01:06 | To do that, I am going to come up
here to my Annotate tab and I am going to
| | 01:09 | pick on Detail Line.
| | 01:12 | Next, I am going to select on the
structural face of this wall and come
| | 01:16 | straight over 7 inches.
| | 01:18 | I am next going to move just straight up here.
| | 01:23 | Now I know that my walls are going
to start right here at this location.
| | 01:27 | It gives me a nice return on my
foundation, so I am still going to have and
| | 01:32 | nice, strong, sturdy foundation wall
right here, but at the same time, I am
| | 01:36 | going to have a break in my foundation
wall for where that Curtain Wall assembly
| | 01:41 | is going to be from here
over to this point right here.
| | 01:45 | So my next step is going to be
to actually draw that wall in.
| | 01:48 | So to do that, I am going to come up
here in my Home tab and I am going to
| | 01:52 | choose on Wall because it
is a Curtain Wall assembly.
| | 01:56 | Underneath my type selector list, I am
going to select on Residential Atrium.
| | 02:01 | You can call it a window
or a wall but it is a wall.
| | 02:04 | Underneath the Base Constraints, I do
want this atrium window to be able to but
| | 02:07 | sit on my basement floor area.
| | 02:10 | So the Base Constraint should be
Basement, but the Base Offsets shouldn't be
| | 02:15 | 8-foot, it should be 0,
| | 02:16 | so it's sitting directly on
top of that basement floor.
| | 02:20 | The Unconnected, that's for the
height of this particular window or wall
| | 02:23 | assembly, should be up to
the top of the foundation wall.
| | 02:29 | The Top Offset should be 0, so that's okay.
| | 02:33 | Next, in order for this wall assembly
to be able to cut itself out of this
| | 02:39 | wall, I had to make sure that I don't place
it right here, or I don't place it right here.
| | 02:44 | Usually, the closer to the middle of
this wall that you get, the more likely it
| | 02:48 | is that this wall assembly is going to
be able to cut its material out just like
| | 02:52 | a door or a window cut its
material out of the walls.
| | 02:55 | So whenever I see this dash line here,
I am going to come toward that dash line
| | 03:00 | and this that we do to some minute ago
are lined up with one another and I'll go
| | 03:05 | ahead and click right there.
| | 03:06 | Next, I am going to move over to my
left, and in this case, I can see that my
| | 03:11 | window is kind of a gray line and I'll
move up just a little bit, so you can see
| | 03:15 | how it's following my cursor.
| | 03:17 | It's currently on the
underneath side of this dash line.
| | 03:20 | I really wanted to be toward
the outside of my building.
| | 03:22 | So I am going to hit the spacebar
in order to flip it to the other side.
| | 03:27 | I want this to be 22 feet 6 inches long.
| | 03:30 | So I am going to type in 22 feet 6,
and hit the Enter key in order to draw
| | 03:36 | this wall assembly in.
| | 03:39 | Now I have my wall
drawn in the proper location.
| | 03:42 | I no longer need these reference lines that
I'd drawn, technically they're detail lines.
| | 03:46 | So I can go ahead and get rid of those.
| | 03:52 | The only thing that I dislike about
this in the way it currently is, is that
| | 03:55 | this wall needs be up flush with the
face of this wall right here, and we can
| | 04:00 | do that fairly simply.
| | 04:01 | So what I am going to do is I am going to
come in here and select on where this wall is at.
| | 04:06 | Next, I am going to use the Move command.
| | 04:08 | I am going to click the intersection
here and come up to the intersection
| | 04:13 | of this right here, and you can see how the
Curtain Wall assembly has now moved itself up,
| | 04:18 | so it's now lined up into the proper location.
| | 04:20 | I am going to zoom-out a little bit,
so we can see it a bit better, and let's
| | 04:26 | take a look at it in a 3D view
from the outside of the building.
| | 04:31 | If I spin this building around, you can
see that we now have a nice big window
| | 04:35 | down here that's letting in a
lot of light into our space.
| | 04:39 | The only, what I'll call problem that's
related to this, is if I select on this word
| | 04:44 | right here that says BACK and then zoom-
in, you can see how part of this siding
| | 04:51 | here is actually covering up our
Curtain Wall assembly, and if I just move my
| | 04:55 | mouse so it's on the outside edge of
this Curtain Wall, you can see how high
| | 04:59 | up my Curtain Wall assembly goes.
| | 05:01 | So in order to be able to make that
adjustment, so that I don't have that
| | 05:04 | siding covering it, plus this siding is
covering a little bit of this window as
| | 05:09 | well, we'll just move this
particular thin material up.
| | 05:14 | In order to do that, if you select on
the window or the wall up above, zoom-in,
| | 05:21 | you'll then see this down arrow right here.
| | 05:23 | If you click and hold your mouse
button down on it, you can drag that up
| | 05:27 | until that kind of locks in place
right above where that Curtain Wall
| | 05:30 | assembly is going to be at.
| | 05:31 | Now I am going to let go.
| | 05:34 | If we zoom back, we can see it's still
covering our foundation wall but it's now
| | 05:39 | up high enough that it's finally over
the top of our Curtain Wall assembly and
| | 05:43 | it's in the right location for the
look that we want to have on our house.
| | 05:47 | Now I want to add another
Curtain Wall on the level up above.
| | 05:50 | So I am going to come up here to the first
floor and take a look at what we have so far.
| | 05:56 | What I am going to need to do now is I
am going to need to draw a curtain wall
| | 06:01 | that's going to go from essentially
the same spot from here over to here.
| | 06:05 | But there is another option and
let me go ahead and show that to you.
| | 06:08 | I am going to close the First Floor
plan and we can see that we have this
| | 06:13 | Curtain Wall assembly that shows
up here down on our lower level.
| | 06:17 | Well, if I highlight on that Curtain
Wall assembly, so the entire thing is
| | 06:21 | highlighted like this, I can use
something called the Copy command.
| | 06:25 | In this case, it's Copy to Clipboard.
| | 06:27 | I am just going to select
on that off of our ribbon.
| | 06:32 | Next, there's an option
here that's called Paste.
| | 06:35 | Now, this is different from the old
Window's function of Ctrl+V for Paste.
| | 06:39 | If you select on the word Paste, you'll
see that there's an option here called
| | 06:42 | Align to Selected Levels and
that's going to be what I choose.
| | 06:47 | What level do I want to bring this
Curtain Wall assembly up to is what the
| | 06:51 | question is being asked.
| | 06:53 | In this case, I am going to bring it up
to our first floor and I am just going
| | 06:56 | to click on OK to that.
| | 06:57 | It might need some adjustments after the
fact but we'll go ahead and do that and
| | 07:00 | we'll see what happens.
| | 07:01 | So you have the entire Curtain Wall has
now been copied from the basement level
| | 07:06 | up to level up above and
that's what we want to have happen.
| | 07:10 | We can also see that this happens to be
hosted on the first floor, which is what we want.
| | 07:15 | It's going up to the Top of Plate, which is
top in this case, which is also what we want.
| | 07:21 | The only thing that I'd like to change
just a little bit is I don't really like
| | 07:24 | this -1 foot 3 3/4 dimension here.
| | 07:27 | This should really be something that's a
little bit more of an even number in this case.
| | 07:31 | So I am going to make this
just be -1 foot and click on Apply.
| | 07:36 | It gives this little section of window
a little bit more height and just makes
| | 07:40 | the atrium window look a little bit better.
| | 07:43 | But it's still low enough that our
atrium window isn't going to be cutting
| | 07:47 | through our ceiling and that sort of
area a little bit later on in our project.
| | 07:52 | Now let's take a look at this in
our Plan view, so we know that it's in
| | 07:55 | the right location.
| | 07:56 | So I double-clicked on the
First Floor view right here.
| | 08:00 | We'll take a look at this,
| | 08:03 | see where our atrium window
assembly is actually located at.
| | 08:06 | Now what it appears to be is that this
atrium window is coming right after this
| | 08:10 | point right here, and to be able to
better see that, we can come down to our
| | 08:13 | visual style and change this to be Shaded.
| | 08:17 | It's going to give us some color, and
because of that, we can see that our
| | 08:20 | Curtain Wall assembly, which is mostly
white here, this is our glass panel, is
| | 08:24 | it's coming now all the way out
to the edge where the siding is at.
| | 08:29 | So it can be debated that maybe it
should stay right there but I'd like to
| | 08:33 | bring this out to the edge
of our building if we can.
| | 08:36 | So what I am going to do is I am just
going to select on this, and I am going to
| | 08:42 | once again use that Move command in
order to be able to bring this out, so it's
| | 08:46 | out toward the outer edge of our building.
| | 08:48 | And then if we take a look this in the
3D view, we can see that we have our nice
| | 08:54 | atrium window assemblies.
| | 08:56 | And if we spin the building around a
little bit, you can see how we can see
| | 09:00 | through that because that is a glass material
and has very similar properties to our windows.
| | 09:06 | So by doing these steps, you can
place an atrium window in and create these
| | 09:11 | very large windows that are a much
more user-friendly than a lot of these
| | 09:17 | typical windows that you might get from Revit.
| | 09:19 | But there is one more thing
that we need to do in this.
| | 09:23 | We need to add some doors that are
going to be leading out from this location
| | 09:27 | out to our outside part of our building.
| | 09:30 | In order to do that, I am going to come
down here and I am going to click on the
| | 09:34 | Tab key when I get to the
outside edge of this window right here.
| | 09:37 | I am going to click and you get this
little, I call it a pinhead, and if you
| | 09:43 | click on the little pinhead,
we now get an option up here.
| | 09:47 | By selecting on that, we'll find
that there is actually a Door option
| | 09:51 | available to us here.
| | 09:53 | If we just simply had selected on
Doors underneath here, it wouldn't have
| | 09:57 | allowed us to place it in here because
technically this is not the kind of wall
| | 10:01 | that a door would go into.
| | 10:03 | So what we had to do is select on this
click, click on the pin in order to get
| | 10:07 | to the different types of door types
that we can insert into our project into
| | 10:12 | this big atrium window that we have.
| | 10:14 | So I am going to select of the Store
Front Double Door and you can see how it
| | 10:18 | automatically inserted
that door into this panel.
| | 10:22 | And the final thing that we need to do
is to zoom-in down here at the bottom,
| | 10:26 | click on this little piece right here,
because we don't need this mullion at the
| | 10:30 | bottom, I am going to click on the
little pinhead and then I am just going to
| | 10:34 | hit the Delete key on the keyboard.
| | 10:36 | That'll get rid of that little mullion
at the bottom and drop our doors down to
| | 10:39 | the appropriate elevation, and as a
result of that, we now have a nice walkout
| | 10:45 | basement with nice big atrium
windows in the back of our house.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Floors, Decks, and PorchesAdding structural floors to the project| 00:00 | The next thing we need to do is add
the structural floors to our house and in
| | 00:04 | order to do that, I'm going to
zoom in here on our basement level.
| | 00:07 | Next, I'm going to come up here
and execute the Floor command.
| | 00:11 | Now whenever we're going to be talking
about the structural floor, what we're
| | 00:15 | going to be drawing in is actually two
separate floors: one floor on top of the other floor.
| | 00:20 | Now the reason behind this is is
that whenever you're building a building
| | 00:24 | real life, you have a structural
floor that goes around the inside of your
| | 00:30 | exterior walls and then at some later
point they come in with the secondary
| | 00:35 | flooring materials, such as carpet,
vinyl tile, wood, whatever the case may be, to
| | 00:41 | go over the top of that.
| | 00:43 | I like doing that same process inside
of Revit: one, because well that's where
| | 00:46 | they actually build in the field, but
two, and probably more importantly, is that
| | 00:51 | it's easier to edit a
floor constructed that way.
| | 00:55 | If let's say we know that there might be
a change in the carpeting material from
| | 00:59 | one spot to the wood material maybe
in that same spot at some point in the
| | 01:04 | future, maybe because of cost
considerations, maybe because it'll look better.
| | 01:07 | So, as a result of that, I like to have
two separate floors, because it's easier
| | 01:12 | to modify initially as
opposed to after the fact.
| | 01:15 | So, I'm going to select here where we
our floor option and I'm going to choose,
| | 01:19 | in this case, the 4-inch concrete floor.
| | 01:23 | Next, I need to change this to basement level.
| | 01:26 | I'm going to change this height offset
to be 0'0" or just type in 0, and that's
| | 01:32 | going to put our basement floor
slab down at the appropriate level.
| | 01:37 | One other thing that I'm going to change
is I'm going to clear this box out that
| | 01:40 | says Extend into wall core.
| | 01:42 | I don't want this particular floor that
we're drawing to change our walls in any
| | 01:47 | way, and if we had Extend into wall core
checked, it would make a modification to
| | 01:51 | our walls, and I don't want that to occur.
| | 01:54 | Now the next step is to zoom in here.
And I will point out that the current
| | 02:00 | command, whenever you execute the
floor command for the first time, is
| | 02:04 | almost always Pick Walls.
| | 02:06 | Now if I try to pick walls here, it's
always going to try to do it to the outside
| | 02:10 | of these walls, and I don't really want that.
I want to just do it from this point on around.
| | 02:16 | Now technically I could click on Extend
into wall core and it would allow me
| | 02:20 | to pick here really nice and neat,
but it still doesn't really pick where I
| | 02:24 | need it to go quite right with
this particular kind of floor.
| | 02:28 | So I like to use this Line tool here
and just manually draw from one corner to
| | 02:34 | another, to another. I'm just going to
play Connect the Dots all the way around
| | 02:37 | the exterior of our foundation walls.
| | 02:40 | In this case I'm going to pick the
first spot that I can get and grab a good
| | 02:43 | intersection of, which is right here.
| | 02:45 | I'm going to draw over
to the left and from here,
| | 02:49 | I'm going to zoom out and zoom in,
just picking intersection points of these
| | 02:56 | foundation walls all the way
around the perimeter of our building.
| | 03:02 | Come down into this corner here.
We'll move straight up to here, move over to here.
| | 03:12 | In this case, I'm going to come over
to here, so that we have a nice smooth
| | 03:16 | transition to this door and
where the walkout's going to be.
| | 03:22 | If I come over here, click again, and
finish it up by clicking from down to here.
| | 03:29 | Now if you done it right when you
click the big green check mark, it should
| | 03:33 | place your floor in.
| | 03:34 | In this case, we have our
structural 4-inch concrete floor.
| | 03:38 | Now zoom out so you can see how the
entire basement level now has a nice solid
| | 03:42 | foundation associated with it.
| | 03:44 | Now the next thing we're going to do
is I'm going to go up to the first floor
| | 03:48 | and do the same thing,
| | 03:49 | except of course it's not going to
be a concrete floor up there for our
| | 03:52 | structure; it's going to be some wood joist floor.
| | 03:55 | I'm going to use the Floor command again.
| | 03:58 | In this case, I'm going to pick Wood
Joist 12". And once again I need to draw
| | 04:04 | around the perimeter of our building,
but we're going to pick inside of
| | 04:07 | different location this time.
| | 04:08 | So, I'm going to make sure that Extend
into wall core check marked, because in
| | 04:12 | this case we will actually want it to
make a modification to the walls. And it's
| | 04:16 | also going to allow us to pick on the
actual core face of these walls, which is
| | 04:20 | on--in this case in this case is
going to be actually on the outside edge of
| | 04:23 | this wall, and we'll be using the Pick Wall tool.
| | 04:26 | So, I'm going to click right here.
You can see where it puts that pink, purple,
| | 04:30 | magenta, whatever color you want to call
that line, and we're going to just
| | 04:35 | click the outside edge of that,
going all the way around on these walls.
| | 04:40 | I'm going do this wall as well, pick
up near where the siding is there.
| | 04:54 | Now the change that's going to be made to
these walls is that because this Extend
| | 04:58 | in the wall core is checked and we're
going to saying yes to a question that's
| | 05:01 | going to be popping up here in just a
moment is this is going to actually cut some
| | 05:04 | of the material out of the walls so
that the walls themselves are going to be
| | 05:07 | sitting on the structural floor. Doing the
type of a framing that we're doing with
| | 05:12 | this building, that's appropriate; the
outside walls should be sitting on top of
| | 05:15 | our floor structure, and then that floor
structure is going to be sitting on the
| | 05:19 | foundation walls down below.
| | 05:21 | So, once you have that continuous line
going all the way around, click on the
| | 05:25 | big green check mark. It's going to ask
and this is the question: Do you want to
| | 05:30 | cut that material out of the
walls? And we'll say Yes to that.
| | 05:34 | Now if we've done this right--and
we'll know it if we go into a 3D view,
| | 05:38 | so just go ahead and come up here to
the little 3D house--we should be able to
| | 05:43 | see the floor here, should be able to
see our structural floor down here in the
| | 05:46 | basement area, and if we spin everything
around, we shouldn't be able to see any
| | 05:50 | of our floor just extruding out on the
outside of our building, and in this case it's not.
| | 05:56 | So, we have our completed floors here,
and we'll going to use a similar process
| | 06:00 | in order to put in the actual finish
floor materials here in upcoming exercise.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding finish floors to each room| 00:00 | Now we have our structural floors in, and
we need to come in and start to draw in
| | 00:04 | our finish flooring material.
| | 00:06 | Now, our finish flooring material is
going to be such information as the
| | 00:09 | carpeting, the wood floors, any kind of tile,
anything you might think of as a floor finish.
| | 00:16 | In the case of our project, what
we're going to have is we're going to have
| | 00:18 | carpeting in this area right here, as
well as some carpeting in our bedroom.
| | 00:23 | Also, there's going to be some tile
that's going to be in our bathroom area, and
| | 00:28 | our kitchen area, the dining room area, and
it'll also carry over into the pantry area.
| | 00:33 | I'll also mention that down in our basement
| | 00:34 | we're going to have an interesting
condition because we're going to have tile
| | 00:38 | down in this area, we're going to have
tile in our bathroom, and we're even going
| | 00:41 | to have some tile actually in our
bedroom area, where I guess we're just going to
| | 00:45 | throw down a big oriental rug or
something to cover that up, so you don't have
| | 00:49 | cold feet in the morning.
| | 00:51 | Though we are going to
have a tile down there as well.
| | 00:53 | Let's go back up to the first
floor and start to draw it in.
| | 00:57 | To begin with, I am going to come up here
to our floor and select on the Floor tool.
| | 01:02 | Now, the kind of floor that you
want to do, you can pick that off of the
| | 01:05 | type selector list here, and for this very
first one it's going to be a carpeted floor.
| | 01:10 | So I am going to choose
on Carpet as our option.
| | 01:13 | Now, we need to make sure that this is at
the right elevation inside of the Revit model.
| | 01:19 | It is going to be on the first floor,
so that's doing real good, but the height
| | 01:23 | at offset shouldn't be -4
inches like it's showing here.
| | 01:26 | In reality, this should be
just a plus 1/4 of an inch.
| | 01:31 | Now, this should be whatever the
thickness of your flooring material should be.
| | 01:35 | In reality, I guess this is a really
cheap carpet because at a quarter of an
| | 01:39 | inch, there's barely enough for room for
the pad and the carpet to be laid down.
| | 01:43 | But that's what I am putting in
here, just a real cheap carpet.
| | 01:45 | We'll have the same flooring material
thickness as well, when it comes time to do
| | 01:50 | the tile in the other parts of our building.
| | 01:53 | So, once that's set to a 1/4 of an inch, you
can either click on Apply or just move
| | 01:58 | your mouse over here.
| | 01:59 | You notice after your mouse has moved
over into the main part of the screen that
| | 02:02 | the Apply button automatically grays
itself out, because it will automatically
| | 02:06 | apply itself whenever you move your
mouse over into your drawing area.
| | 02:10 | One last thing that I am going to
change first is I am going to come up here to
| | 02:13 | where it says Extend into wall core.
| | 02:15 | Now, while I could keep that,
| | 02:16 | I don't really want it for this exercise.
| | 02:18 | I don't want any changes done to our walls.
| | 02:20 | So, I am just going to clear that
one out and get going from there.
| | 02:24 | Now I am going to come up here to the
Line tool and just start to draw out the
| | 02:27 | exact spots where I want our
carpeting to be installed at.
| | 02:30 | So, I am going to zoom up here.
| | 02:33 | I am going to pick the intersection
of these two walls. And it becomes that
| | 02:40 | big game of Connect the Dots again,
going from point to point, to point, all the
| | 02:47 | way around your rooms.
| | 02:49 | Now, when I come up here I actually
have a decision that I need to make.
| | 02:53 | Is this going to be carpet in here and
is this going to be carpet in here, and at
| | 02:57 | any time during this process, might that change?
| | 03:00 | In other words, maybe the carpet in
this room is going to be too expensive as
| | 03:04 | compared to the carpet in this room.
| | 03:06 | So, as a result of that, I might have
one carpet in here that's a different
| | 03:09 | style of carpet, maybe a different
color, maybe just a completely
| | 03:12 | different type of carpeting.
| | 03:14 | If that's the case, do I have a
separate carpet floor placed in here as
| | 03:20 | opposed to in here?
| | 03:21 | For my own decision, I know that I am
just going to leave it the same kind of
| | 03:24 | carpeting throughout the house,
| | 03:26 | so I am just going to make this
all be part of one flooring system.
| | 03:30 | So, I am going to go ahead and take out
around the corner and continue to play
| | 03:34 | Connect the Dots all the
way around the inside here.
| | 03:41 | I'll also mention, if you've used Revit
very much, you'll know that there's a
| | 03:44 | Pick Lines tool here.
| | 03:45 | Now, the reason why I am not using
the Pick Lines tool is sometimes that
| | 03:49 | extends up and goes beyond a little
bit too far, and I find that just drawing
| | 03:54 | the lines in individually, one by one,
is a much more accurate way and much
| | 03:59 | easier way in the long run to just
draw this in without having to make any
| | 04:02 | changes after the fact.
| | 04:06 | So, I am running the
carpeting into the closet area.
| | 04:08 | I am going to draw it over to here.
And now I have a decision to make, and that
| | 04:15 | decision is is I know that this
is going to be a bathroom area.
| | 04:19 | If this is my bathroom area, do I
take carpet into it? Probably not.
| | 04:23 | I probably want to have this be
still some more of my tile flooring.
| | 04:28 | That being said, what happens here?
| | 04:31 | How is this transition made
between here and this spot right here?
| | 04:35 | In this case, I am going to choose to
bring my carpeting into the space, come
| | 04:40 | directly over, and come back down.
| | 04:43 | Now, in reality, what happens is
there's a actually a transition piece usually
| | 04:47 | installed here, or maybe they actually
are going to bring the carpeting into
| | 04:51 | right here and that transition piece
would show up right between this spot and
| | 04:56 | this spot right here.
| | 04:57 | Usually this is a little metal strip
that's going to keep you from tripping over
| | 05:01 | the tile when you step off of the
carpeting and go into the tile floor.
| | 05:05 | We can actually see that here at our
front door, where our front door actually
| | 05:09 | has that already built into itself,
where there's this transition piece between
| | 05:14 | here and going outside of the building.
| | 05:18 | In this case, we ended up drawing the
carpet just directly underneath there
| | 05:22 | because the extra tiny little bit
of material that's going to be drawn
| | 05:27 | underneath here, you're not going
to see inside of floor plan views.
| | 05:30 | You're not going to see in elevation views.
| | 05:32 | You are not going to see it anywhere.
| | 05:33 | So, as a result of that, the only place
you're ever going to see this actually
| | 05:38 | occurring--other than this view I am
going to draw in the carpet, of course--is
| | 05:42 | in your total square footage numbers
for the amount of material that's going to
| | 05:45 | be inside of your space.
| | 05:47 | Now personally, I don't care about
that extra little bit of material that's
| | 05:51 | going to be right here.
| | 05:53 | Frankly, whenever you're installing
your carpet, there's always going to be a
| | 05:55 | little bit of waste anyway.
| | 05:57 | So, as a result of that, I am just
going to go straight across there.
| | 06:02 | That being said, I am going to go
straight up from here. And we will run into
| | 06:06 | that kind of condition at couple of other
spots, and I'll address that when we hit it.
| | 06:09 | I am going to come up here, directly
up to this back wall, and then back to
| | 06:14 | this far wall over here, making sure
for a fact that I have hit it and it's one
| | 06:19 | continuous line if we followed it all the
way around the perimeter of our building.
| | 06:23 | Once you get that far, you can click
on the big green checkmark here and you
| | 06:27 | should see carpet now has been put in place
throughout that entire area that we just drew into.
| | 06:32 | So, now let's come in and
start to add some tile in here.
| | 06:37 | First, I am going to add tile into the
bathroom area. And in order to be able to
| | 06:41 | do that, I am going to come up here, I
am going to pick on the Floor tab here,
| | 06:45 | and I want to again clear out this
Extend into wall core. And I am going to use
| | 06:50 | my Linework tool to just draw
completely around the perimeter of this bathroom.
| | 06:55 | Now, this also leads to
another one of those decisions:
| | 06:59 | Do I take this material straight down
here, because more than likely, I am not
| | 07:03 | going to tile underneath my bathtub
area or do I take it back to this wall--
| | 07:10 | which is what I am doing--and have it just go
all the way around the perimeter of the room?
| | 07:15 | Well, it's kind of a personal decision,
since, for me, since I haven't actually
| | 07:19 | put in the bathtub just yet and I don't
know if it's going to come out right to
| | 07:23 | the edge of the wall or whether or not
it's going to stop right here, and I am
| | 07:27 | never going to see this flooring
material ever again once that bathtub unit is
| | 07:31 | placed right in there,
| | 07:33 | I am just going to go ahead and just go
all the way around the perimeter, so in
| | 07:35 | order to make any more
adjustments to my floor after the fact.
| | 07:39 | I am not going to be using this for
material takeoffs or anything along
| | 07:42 | those lines, so I don't need to know
the exact square footage of my floor
| | 07:45 | material inside of my space.
| | 07:47 | But if you're concerned about that,
if you want it to be just every bit
| | 07:50 | more accurate, instead of taking it back to
this back wall, just draw it straight down.
| | 07:55 | You can always modify the floors later
and make those adjustments, so you can
| | 07:59 | get those proper quantities off of it.
| | 08:02 | In this case, since it's not going to
affect my end result, I am just going to
| | 08:05 | come up here to the big green
check mark and finish this for.
| | 08:08 | Now, I realize that there's going to
be a problem when I do it, because this
| | 08:11 | needs to be tile, and I never chose
Tile off the Properties over here on the
| | 08:16 | left-hand side. But because my floor
is highlighted, I can click on the Floor
| | 08:20 | here and I can just change this to be
VCT, and it just changes this piece of
| | 08:26 | floor automatically. And this is a lot
easier than if I came in and drawn each of
| | 08:31 | these floors and attached to the
actual structural members that are going to
| | 08:35 | supporting in, which is the reason why I
originally had an individual structural
| | 08:39 | floor on the underneath side here
while I have a finished floor material up
| | 08:46 | above it, because it's just easy to
change and modify now and after the fact.
| | 08:50 | Now, let's go ahead and finish this up by
putting in our floor tile through this area up here.
| | 08:57 | So, I am going to come up here, execute
the Floor tool one more time, make sure
| | 09:03 | that this is changed to the Tile.
| | 09:05 | Make sure this First Floor
and 1/4 is set as your defaults,
| | 09:10 | clear out the Extend in the wall core
if it came back up again, and once again
| | 09:14 | use the Linework tool in
order to be able to draw this in.
| | 09:16 | We're going to draw all the
away around the perimeter.
| | 09:21 | We're going to draw this
flooring material into our pantry area.
| | 09:29 | I am always zooming in and out to
make sure I get the right intersection.
| | 09:36 | It's really easy to pick the wrong point,
particularly for novice Revit users
| | 09:40 | who aren't used to zooming in and out.
| | 09:43 | They'll continue to try to just
stay way out here. Always zoom in.
| | 09:47 | It's not going to hurt you.
| | 09:49 | This is another spot where I have to
make one of those decisions because there's
| | 09:53 | going to be cabinetry
right here, as well as up here.
| | 09:57 | Do I want to put this tile floor
underneath it, because really when you're
| | 10:01 | constructing it, you wouldn't?
| | 10:02 | I am going to make the same decision
that I made down here, because I am
| | 10:06 | not going to see it.
| | 10:07 | I am not going to be taking
material quantity takeoffs off of it.
| | 10:11 | I am going to place it underneath my
cabinetry, because it's easier for me
| | 10:17 | to draw this floor in.
| | 10:19 | Now, since I don't know where that
information is going to be at, just right
| | 10:25 | to the perimeter, and it's not going to affect
anything else I am going to be doing later on.
| | 10:30 | But if you think that you will need to
take those quantities at some point, then
| | 10:34 | you can always come back in and adjust
where this floor location is at, after the
| | 10:39 | fact, after you've placed in your cabinets.
| | 10:41 | We're going to take this
back around to the start.
| | 10:45 | Make sure you click on the big green
checkmark here, and you'll see that you now
| | 10:50 | have your flooring material
up here on the floor up above.
| | 10:53 | Now, I am going to leave this blank
because there doesn't need to be any
| | 10:57 | flooring material in here.
| | 10:59 | This is going to be where you're going
to have your pipes, your ductwork coming
| | 11:02 | up from out of the basement.
| | 11:03 | Let's go down in the basement area and
putting our flooring material down here.
| | 11:09 | Like I mentioned, this is all going
to be tiled down here and down below.
| | 11:12 | So, I am going to select on Floor.
| | 11:14 | I am going to change this to be VCT.
| | 11:17 | You notice how this didn't automatically change.
| | 11:19 | It's just taken on the defaults
from the last floor that we did.
| | 11:22 | So, we might need to change this to be
a basement floor and once again, we're
| | 11:27 | going to keep that same thickness
because it's going to be the same materials
| | 11:30 | that we used up on the upper level.
And I am going to clear Extend in the wall
| | 11:34 | core, just like we did before.
| | 11:36 | Now, I need to pick a place to start,
and this is as good a place as any. And I
| | 11:42 | am going to start to draw this
around the perimeter of my floor and the
| | 11:48 | perimeter of my walls.
| | 11:49 | I am going to come straight
down and follow this around,
| | 11:56 | take it into our closet areas, making
this all one kind of flooring type. Come
| | 12:09 | straight up, come over.
| | 12:13 | Now, I could kind of bring this over,
but I like to keep it at least somewhat
| | 12:17 | structurally sound and right,
| | 12:19 | so I just keep on following
this wall all the way around.
| | 12:23 | I am going to move this up
so it's at the right location.
| | 12:27 | I am going to drop down here.
| | 12:31 | I am going to follow around the
corner, wrapping this material around.
| | 12:41 | Actually, in this condition, this
place right here, this is going to be an
| | 12:46 | unfinished floor area.
| | 12:47 | So, if you've drawn a line in
that you didn't want to have, there's
| | 12:50 | something that you can do.
| | 12:52 | If you just hit the Escape key once on
your keyboard, then hit it a second time,
| | 12:56 | select on that line, and just hit the
Delete key, and it'll automatically get rid
| | 13:00 | of those lines that we've been
drawing around the perimeter.
| | 13:02 | Now, if we select on this line up here,
we can then continue our way on around.
| | 13:08 | We're going to drop it into here
because this is our doorway to the bathroom.
| | 13:14 | It's going to have the same flooring
material associated with it. And I am going
| | 13:18 | to make the same design decision that
I was making before and just take this
| | 13:21 | floor material on up and through and
into that space. And where the bathtub is
| | 13:27 | going to be sitting, we're going to just take
the material right into there. Almost done!
| | 13:33 | I am going to finish this by moving
this all the way on around, coming up here.
| | 13:37 | And when I drew this, I did see
one other thing that needs to be fixed.
| | 13:42 | So, I am going to hit the
Escape key one more time.
| | 13:44 | I'll hit it again. And I
am going to move over here.
| | 13:48 | I can see that I missed
this little corner right here.
| | 13:51 | So, let me show you a trick.
| | 13:52 | I am going to come up here to this
line right here and I am going to start to
| | 13:56 | draw my line around from here,
around my doorway, and back down.
| | 14:01 | Now, I still have this extra little
piece of material left, and I could drag this
| | 14:06 | end point to here and just draw
another line, but another tool you have is
| | 14:10 | called the Split Element tool, and if
you click on Split Element, you can check
| | 14:14 | this box that says Delete Inner Segment.
| | 14:17 | Now, if I pick this point where they
intersect at and you can see a little gray
| | 14:21 | line that just comes up when I get to
that point, and I pick another inner
| | 14:24 | section right there,
| | 14:25 | you can see how it ends up cleaning
these lines up. And you could have done this
| | 14:30 | on any of these different intersections
where these things come together at, if
| | 14:34 | that would end up helping
to clean up that floor area.
| | 14:37 | So, as a result of that, I
am going to zoom back out.
| | 14:40 | We can see where our floor material
is going to be placed at. And I am just
| | 14:44 | going to click on the big green
check mark right here. And we can see where our
| | 14:49 | vinyl tile is getting
placed down in our lower level.
| | 14:52 | So just remember, it's always best to
just sort of draw out the perimeter and
| | 14:56 | then use your editing tools, such as
Split, or be able at just use your Linework
| | 15:01 | tools to draw around the perimeter
wherever you'd like to have your flooring
| | 15:04 | material actually be
inserted into your building.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Designing an exterior deck| 00:00 | Now that we have our exterior walls
and windows and all at in place, let's go
| | 00:03 | ahead and add a deck to
the back of our building.
| | 00:07 | Now that deck is going to go directly
underneath these doors that lead out to it.
| | 00:11 | Also, it's going to go
above this window right here.
| | 00:14 | Let's get started by moving
up to our First Floor plan.
| | 00:19 | So that it's going to be centered on
these doors as well as the window down
| | 00:22 | below, or at least pretty close to centered,
| | 00:24 | I want this deck to start just 1 foot
off the structural edge of our house.
| | 00:29 | So what I'm going to do I'm going to
actually click on the Floor tool right here.
| | 00:33 | I'm going to use a line in a way
that I haven't used a line before.
| | 00:37 | I'm going to use the Line tool right
here and instead of using a detail line,
| | 00:42 | I'm going to use the actual lines
that you would usually make up a deck, in
| | 00:45 | order to give me that
distance of 1 foot off at the end.
| | 00:49 | Here I can see that on 1 foot off at the end.
I am just going to move up a little bit here.
| | 00:54 | I know that that's going to be
where my deck is going to need to start.
| | 00:57 | Also, I know that my deck is going
to be 8 feet deep by 10 feet wide.
| | 01:02 | So I'm going to select right here.
| | 01:05 | I'm going to move straight up, and
I'm going to tell this to be 8 feet.
| | 01:11 | The warning message I am getting
is that this line and that little line
| | 01:15 | that I drew down here are overlapping.
| | 01:17 | That's okay. I'm going to delete
that little line here in just a minute.
| | 01:20 | Next I'm going to move straight over to
the right, and I'm going to go 10 feet.
| | 01:24 | I'm going to come straight down
and then all the way back over again.
| | 01:32 | Now that I've done that, I'm going to
click on this line and delete it. I'm then
| | 01:36 | click on this line and delete it,
because I don't need them anymore.
| | 01:39 | They were just to give me the proper
dimension off the end of the building.
| | 01:45 | Now before I click on the big green check mark,
we have a few properties that we need to change.
| | 01:49 | The first property is that yes, this is
going to be off the first floor, but also
| | 01:54 | you need to verify that this height is correct.
| | 01:57 | In this case, it happens to be correct,
and it's going to be a -4 inch drop from
| | 02:02 | where the first floor is at
and step down onto the deck.
| | 02:06 | If yours doesn't say -4 inches, go ahead and
type in here at the Height Offset, -4 inches.
| | 02:13 | Also verify that this does say Floor
Deck. If it says any other kind of floor,
| | 02:17 | it's not going to be the appropriate
floor for you to be able to create this
| | 02:21 | design, so just leave it at Floor Deck.
| | 02:24 | Now come up here to the big
green check mark and click on it,
| | 02:28 | and you'll now have your deck that's going
around that 8 foot 10 parameter that we just drew.
| | 02:33 | Just so you can see what it looks like
up to this point, let's take a look at in
| | 02:37 | a 3D View, so click on
little house up here at the top.
| | 02:40 | Now this by itself is probably okay.
| | 02:43 | The only thing is is it looks
kind of small and flimsy up there.
| | 02:46 | It's not really the cleanest-looking
thing and if we were to render it, it
| | 02:50 | really wouldn't look extremely nice.
| | 02:52 | So in order for it to have a nice
aesthetic appeal, we need to add some things to it.
| | 02:57 | And those items that we are going
to be adding to it are going to be
| | 02:59 | some structural members.
| | 03:01 | So back in the First Floor plan--I'm
just going to double-click on First Floor--
| | 03:06 | I'm going to go up to Structure and
| | 03:07 | I'm going to add some Beams.
| | 03:09 | Now these are really
structural beams. What these are--
| | 03:13 | and if come to the type selector list--
it's going to be some dimensional
| | 03:16 | number, some 2x12s.
| | 03:17 | I'm going to click on them.
| | 03:20 | Next, I'm going to move over to here and
I'm going to draw these 2x12s from this
| | 03:24 | point on up to right here.
| | 03:30 | Next, I'm going to repeat that same
process, except I'm going to do it from this
| | 03:33 | intersection, back down.
| | 03:36 | Now, I'm going to do the
same thing from right here.
| | 03:39 | I'm going to take it on over.
| | 03:43 | Now as along as you did it in that
sequence, you should have your boards
| | 03:46 | coming up here, dying out at the end
of the deck, and then this board stops
| | 03:51 | just a little bit short of this board, and
you have the same condition on the other end.
| | 03:55 | To clean that up, you can select
on this board and pull this over.
| | 04:00 | And they can either be touching or just
right off the end; in this case I'm just
| | 04:03 | going to have them line up with one another.
| | 04:05 | I'm going to do the same thing down here.
| | 04:10 | Now this deck is made out of smaller
boards than the 2x12s. In fact, if I
| | 04:16 | select on the deck, click on Edit Type,
and go to Edit Structure here, we will
| | 04:21 | see that this is made out of 2x8s, a
2x8, once it goes through the milling process,
| | 04:25 | is about 71/4 inches thick, so
this is structurally correct.
| | 04:30 | If I click on OK and click on OK on out,
what this means is that these boards
| | 04:34 | that we just added are going to be
bigger and thicker, and are going to give
| | 04:37 | the illusion that this deck is created
out of much heavier, stronger material,
| | 04:43 | if you will. And it's going to look a
lot more cleaner and refined when the
| | 04:47 | building is finally built.
| | 04:49 | And it will just be prettier
when it's all set and done.
| | 04:51 | There is one more thing that we
need to be able to adjust though.
| | 04:55 | If I zoom in here, you will see that the
deck actually comes to the middle of where
| | 04:59 | these are at, and that's
not where I want them to be.
| | 05:02 | So I'm going to use my arrow keys on
my keyboard, in this case the up arrow
| | 05:05 | key, to nudge these boards over.
| | 05:09 | I will select on the next board, use my
left arrow key to nudge that over, come
| | 05:17 | over here, select on this board, use the
Nudge command again to nudge that over.
| | 05:23 | Now let's take a look at this in 3D
to get a better feel for what it is we
| | 05:26 | have actually drawn.
| | 05:28 | Now up to this point,
everything we've done has been okay.
| | 05:31 | There hasn't even really been the
ability to drop these down, but this is a
| | 05:34 | problem, because we want the top of these
boards to be lined up with the top of our deck.
| | 05:39 | But at this point, it's pretty easy.
| | 05:42 | Simply select on each of these boards by
clicking on them and holding down your Ctrl key.
| | 05:47 | Next, over here, you have your
Start Level Offset Distance.
| | 05:51 | Let's make this be -4 inches and -4
inches. Click on Apply and you see these
| | 06:00 | boards just drop themselves right down.
| | 06:04 | And by doing this, we now have a--actually
a thicker-looking structural member up there.
| | 06:10 | It's going to be a nicer
material, too, when it's rendered.
| | 06:13 | Also it's going to hide the fact that
you're going to have your columns coming
| | 06:17 | up here and tying into here and how
any square structural connections
| | 06:22 | might be taking place.
| | 06:23 | These boards from a distance are going
to hide those structural connections, so
| | 06:27 | you are not going to see metal
pieces or whatever might be holding those
| | 06:31 | together--brackets, whatever the case may be.
| | 06:34 | So in general, when you look at these
from afar, you are going to have a nice,
| | 06:38 | clean-looking piece of construction.
| | 06:41 | So if you are going to be building a
deck, always make sure to use your floors
| | 06:46 | and your flooring materials.
| | 06:48 | Feel free to use things like beams,
which when we think of a beam you might be
| | 06:51 | thinking of something it would
usually hold something up like this
| | 06:54 | illustration might illustrate.
| | 06:56 | That being said, in this case, it can
also be used as a decorative piece to make
| | 07:00 | your deck cleaner and more refined-looking.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Designing a front porch and building the porch structure| 00:01 | Now it's time to start
developing our front porch.
| | 00:03 | And whenever you're going to be
developing a porch structure, you always need to
| | 00:07 | think of three main things.
| | 00:09 | One is where is that porch going to be
located at and its shape and just the
| | 00:14 | way it's going to look.
| | 00:16 | Number two, you need to think about
what's going to be supporting that porch.
| | 00:19 | In this case, we're going to have
some exterior walls that are going to be
| | 00:22 | supporting our front porch area.
| | 00:25 | Three, what's going to be holding up
those entities that are going to be
| | 00:29 | supporting that porch.
| | 00:31 | In this case, we're going to have some
footings on the underneath side of these
| | 00:35 | foundation walls, and of course, those
foundation walls hold up the structure of the porch.
| | 00:41 | So let's go ahead and start drawing
in the actual structure of the porch.
| | 00:44 | It's going to be almost a classic wraparound
porch because it's going to come in this direction.
| | 00:49 | We'll wrap around the building and
wrap back in this direction again.
| | 00:53 | Then we'll end up having foundation
walls to take a very similar path right
| | 00:58 | around the perimeter of
that porch that we've created.
| | 01:02 | And then finally, we'll slap really
fast some footings on the bottom of it in
| | 01:06 | order to hold this whole structure up.
| | 01:09 | So let's begin by drawing the porch.
| | 01:10 | In order to do this, there aren't any
porch tools, so we need to use a floor,
| | 01:16 | and when you think about it, a porch
really is no more than a floor that's on
| | 01:19 | the outside of your building, and in
order to be able to draw that information in.
| | 01:23 | So let's come up here, select on Floor.
| | 01:26 | In this case, using the Floor
Deck is going to be just fine.
| | 01:29 | We're just going to create the same
kind of deck that we had on the back of our
| | 01:33 | building, except we're going to
be using it for our front porch;
| | 01:35 | in this case, out here in the front.
| | 01:37 | So I am going to select on
that; make sure you have Deck.
| | 01:43 | The Level is going to be First Floor
and the Height Offset of -4 inch just like
| | 01:48 | we did with the deck on the back.
| | 01:50 | This is going to be just fine.
| | 01:51 | It'll be a step down from this
location down onto our front porch.
| | 01:58 | Now I am going to zoom in
to this part of our building.
| | 02:01 | I am going to clear out this check mark here
that says Extend into wall (to core), because
| | 02:07 | we don't really want it
to go into the wall at all.
| | 02:09 | It's just going to follow
the outside edge of this wall.
| | 02:12 | I am going to select on the Line tool
now, and start to draw in the outside
| | 02:17 | dimensions of our porch.
| | 02:20 | This is going to come straight down,
and it's going to come down 6 feet.
| | 02:26 | Next, move over 22 feet 2 inches.
| | 02:32 | Now we're going to come straight up,
and I don't really know what this exact
| | 02:37 | dimension is going to be.
| | 02:38 | So I am just going to come up about 8 feet,
and we'll kind of fix this in just a moment.
| | 02:44 | Once you've drawn this is in, go ahead
and hit the Escape key a couple times to
| | 02:48 | get out of that portion of the command.
| | 02:50 | Now I know that the next section of the porch
needs to come over 14 feet in this direction.
| | 02:56 | So we're going to have 14 feet from
here, a line that comes off of here and
| | 03:00 | comes straight down, and the dimension
of that line is going to be 6 feet just
| | 03:05 | like it was over here.
| | 03:06 | So in order to be able to do this, I am
going to actually select on this model
| | 03:11 | line, and I am going to
copy it--here over 14 feet.
| | 03:17 | Consider this our guideline for
where this line is going to need to go.
| | 03:21 | I also have this line that's
8 feet now sitting over here.
| | 03:24 | Let's just go ahead and make this 6 feet.
| | 03:28 | Since we have a 6-foot line suddenly
available; it's in essentially the right
| | 03:32 | location. All we have to do is
move it up so it's touching the brick.
| | 03:36 | So now I am going to select on the
Move command. Click on the little endpoint
| | 03:40 | right here, and just drag it straight up.
| | 03:45 | Next, select the Line tool and come over.
| | 03:48 | I am going to get out of that command
by hitting Escape a couple of times, and
| | 03:54 | now I am going to use the Trim/Extend
tool in order to bring these two lines
| | 03:57 | together to a point just like that.
| | 04:01 | Now this needs to be one continuous line
if you follow this line all the way around.
| | 04:06 | So we need to draw a line over here,
back down, and back to the endpoint again.
| | 04:11 | It's always nice to zoom in when in doubt.
| | 04:17 | Zoom out and zoom back in, and finish that up.
| | 04:24 | Now that we've done that, we can click
on the big green check mark, and we'll have
| | 04:28 | the floor of our front porch completed.
| | 04:32 | Now it's currently just floating in
midair, so we need to put some foundation
| | 04:35 | walls underneath it.
| | 04:37 | So I am going to go to a different
view that's going to allow us to do that a
| | 04:40 | little bit more easily.
| | 04:41 | In this case, I am going to go to the
Top of Footing Porch level right here and
| | 04:44 | just double-click on that.
| | 04:46 | Now this floor plan has an interesting
color configuration going on with it.
| | 04:52 | In order to change that so it looks
proper, I am just going to come down here to
| | 04:56 | the Detail Level and change it
to be a Fine level of detail.
| | 05:00 | Now if we start to zoom in here, we
can start to see the individual layers
| | 05:04 | of material; something that we
wouldn't have been able to see at the
| | 05:06 | previous detail level.
| | 05:09 | Now this first foundation wall that I
want to draw in; it's just going to be a
| | 05:13 | little 3 inches off the end of this wall.
| | 05:15 | What I am going to do is I am going to
use my Annotate tools like I've done in
| | 05:21 | some of the previous parts of the building.
| | 05:23 | I am going to choose on Detail Line.
| | 05:25 | I am going to select on this line
right here and I am going to draw this 3
| | 05:29 | inches in this direction, and I am
just going to draw a little line that goes
| | 05:33 | straight down from there.
| | 05:35 | Now this is just going to
be a reference line for me.
| | 05:38 | I'll delete that little extra
line because I don't need it anymore.
| | 05:41 | Now I am going to come up here to the Home
tab, and I am going to select on my Wall tools.
| | 05:47 | The wall that's going to be our
foundation wall going around the perimeter of
| | 05:50 | our porch is just going to be this foundation.
| | 05:53 | I am going to select on the endpoint here.
| | 05:56 | Something you'll notice is if you just
start to draw it, you might not see anything.
| | 06:01 | But what's going on here is this.
| | 06:03 | If I hit the Escape key to get out of
just that drawing function, you'll notice
| | 06:07 | that there's a Base Offset currently here.
| | 06:10 | Well, this Base Offset isn't
right, it shouldn't be 8 feet.
| | 06:13 | This would be like 8 foot above where
we really wanted to be at, or maybe it's
| | 06:16 | more like 7 feet above
where we really wanted to be at.
| | 06:20 | So as a result of that, we need to drop
this Base Offset way, way down and the
| | 06:25 | base offset in this case is going to be 1 foot.
| | 06:28 | Next, there's a Top Constraint involved
here and that Top Constraint is going to
| | 06:33 | need to be--consider the Top of
Foundation--very much like the other foundation
| | 06:38 | walls that we've created.
| | 06:40 | One difference to that though is that the Top
Offset to this is going to be 4 inches down.
| | 06:46 | Why 4 inches you might ask.
| | 06:48 | Well, that's the same offset distance
that our porch has, 4 inches down from the
| | 06:54 | top of that floor down.
| | 06:56 | So we're just sort of mirroring that
same offset that our porch up above has.
| | 07:00 | That being said, we should be in good
shape now, and we'd start drawing this in.
| | 07:03 | So if I select on this line now, here
we can see the representation of that
| | 07:08 | foundation wall, and I am just going to
bring this up here toward the edge of the brick.
| | 07:12 | I could actually tie it
into my foundation if I wish.
| | 07:16 | In fact, now that I am looking at it, I
think I will actually just tie it right
| | 07:20 | up next to where the--
it's not actually brick here;
| | 07:23 | it's going to be siding.
| | 07:25 | So we'll put it right up to the face of that.
| | 07:29 | Next, I am going to select on this, and
I am just going to kind of drag it down,
| | 07:33 | and you can see how that
just extends this wall on down.
| | 07:37 | Now I know that this wall actually
just needs to be 5 foot 6 down from
| | 07:41 | that point that it's at.
| | 07:42 | So I am going to draw once again
just another line that I can use as a
| | 07:46 | reference, so a Detail Line here, and
I am going to draw that one 5 foot 6
| | 07:50 | down from that point.
| | 07:52 | I don't need that line anymore, and I
am just going to bring this one straight
| | 07:59 | down, and now I know that
that went to the right location.
| | 08:01 | I'll get rid of that last little
reference line that I drew in there, and now
| | 08:06 | we're going to draw in some more walls.
| | 08:09 | Once again, make sure that this
information is the same as it was before.
| | 08:13 | Usually, it'll be safe but every
once in a while it'll reset itself.
| | 08:17 | Now I am going to select on the
endpoint of this and come in this direction.
| | 08:20 | I am going to hit the spacebar to flip
that wall to the other side, and now I am
| | 08:24 | going to draw this wall 21
feet 2 inches in this direction.
| | 08:32 | And this is going to achieve the sort
of design aesthetic that I want for the
| | 08:36 | front of our building.
| | 08:37 | I could've brought this over another
foot to sort of match this one over
| | 08:40 | here, but I think it just sort of
gives it a better look with the dimension
| | 08:44 | that we currently have.
| | 08:46 | The next line or next wall that we need
to draw up, it needs to come up 9 feet 8
| | 08:52 | inches straight up, so 9 feet 8 inches.
| | 08:57 | Next, I am going to come straight over, and
this is going to need to be 14 feet 4 inches.
| | 09:03 | And then finally, I am going to come up
to here and match the same quality that
| | 09:09 | I had over here, except I am just
going to bring this just directly up to the
| | 09:13 | face of the brick and stop it right there.
| | 09:17 | So that we're on the same page as to
what it is that's been accomplished up
| | 09:20 | to this point, let's take a look at this
in a 3D view so we get a better look at it.
| | 09:24 | So far, so good.
| | 09:28 | Now a couple little things that we still
need to address--one thing that I don't like.
| | 09:32 | One is that now we've brought
this right up to the face of siding, and
| | 09:36 | really I'd like that siding to be just
raised up just a little bit, and this -1
| | 09:41 | foot 8 extension isn't going to
really work very well for that.
| | 09:45 | So what I am going to do is I am going
to change this Base Extension to be -4
| | 09:50 | inches instead, and it's raised the
siding on the outside of this wall back up so
| | 09:55 | that it's clearing a lot of the
structural members and other things that could
| | 09:58 | be getting in the way of it, and you just
wouldn't have the siding usually framed
| | 10:02 | right to that point on the porch.
| | 10:03 | So I am just going to raise that up so that
it's constructed a little bit better.
| | 10:08 | I am going to do the same thing here
and make this be just -4 inches. Bring it
| | 10:13 | up so it's essentially
level with the face of the porch.
| | 10:16 | It's also going to make it a
little bit easier to tie it into the
| | 10:18 | structure behind it, since we're
not going to be going to the siding to
| | 10:22 | get that accomplished.
| | 10:24 | Next thing I am going to do is I need
to put the footings on the underside of
| | 10:28 | these walls, or else they're just going
to sink in and the porch is eventually
| | 10:32 | going to collapse, which is
obviously never a good thing.
| | 10:35 | So I am going to rotate this around in
a 3D view, select on the structure, and
| | 10:41 | then I am going to come to
the Wall Foundation tab here.
| | 10:45 | Make sure that this is a 30x12, so
it's the same kind of footings we have
| | 10:50 | going around the perimeter of the
building, and just click each and every one
| | 10:56 | of these locations.
| | 10:58 | Now if we look at this back from a
more top view, this has given us the porch
| | 11:04 | that we might expect or the kind of
design for the porch that we might expect.
| | 11:08 | It's down far enough that if we
started having ice and different things,
| | 11:13 | it's still going to be able to not collapse.
| | 11:16 | It's not going to move up and down.
| | 11:17 | It's still going to be a nice
strong structural porch here.
| | 11:20 | And once we get a little bit further
developed lawn, start adding columns,
| | 11:25 | start adding a roof, we'll have a good
functioning front porch to deal with.
| | 11:29 | I do want to say about this porch that
once we've got to this stage, we have the
| | 11:36 | footings in, we have the foundation wall
in, and we have the actual porch itself
| | 11:42 | in, and it's looking really nice and
good--from an aesthetic point of view as
| | 11:46 | well as a functional point of view.
| | 11:47 | We have a nice strong front porch
that's going to be the centerpiece of the
| | 11:51 | front elevation of our building.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Column PlacementPlacing the columns for the front porch| 00:00 | Now that we have our porch completed,
the next thing we need to do is start to
| | 00:04 | add some columns to the front of this porch.
| | 00:07 | Now the columns are going to add some
architectural character to our house but
| | 00:11 | they're also going to
serve a structural purpose.
| | 00:13 | Above these columns there's going to
be a roof coming down and bearing all of
| | 00:17 | its weight down in those areas.
| | 00:20 | So we need to have a nice, thick, sturdy column.
| | 00:23 | It's both going to look good;
| | 00:24 | it can also structurally
support the load of the roof of above.
| | 00:29 | In order to achieve this we're going to
be in the First Floor plan, and I'm just
| | 00:32 | going to zoom down here so
that we can see our existing deck.
| | 00:36 | Next, I need to draw in where each
of these columns are going to be at.
| | 00:41 | Now I could just sort of click to
place them, and try to get them about right,
| | 00:46 | and then nudge them around
until I get them in the right spot.
| | 00:48 | But one of the things that I think
that I'm going to do is using the same
| | 00:51 | techniques that I have up to this
point, which I just choose in my little
| | 00:54 | Annotation lines and select on Detail
Lines here, and draw in where I want those
| | 01:00 | based points to be at for each of those columns.
| | 01:03 | Now I know that the first one is going
to need to be 5 foot and 3/8 off of this
| | 01:09 | structural point right here.
| | 01:11 | So I'm just going to take somewhere
along the structural point of this wall and
| | 01:16 | draw a line straight down 5
foot 0 and 3/8 of an inch.
| | 01:27 | And I know it's going to be somewhere in
that area where that needs to be at.
| | 01:30 | Next, I'm going to do something similar,
except I am going to a draw line off of
| | 01:35 | this edge over into this direction, and that's
going to need to be 1 foot 5/8 of an inch over.
| | 01:43 | So I'm really able to do that.
| | 01:44 | I'm going to select on Detail Line.
| | 01:46 | I'm going to pick a point, and come over
1 foot 0 space 5/8, and I'm going to draw this
| | 01:57 | line straight up from there.
| | 02:00 | I no longer need this line because it's
already giving me the information that I
| | 02:03 | need, and where that first comes I need
to go in that as where those two lines
| | 02:08 | that we just drew a minute
ago are crossing each other.
| | 02:10 | I'm also going to delete this line right
here just because we don't need it anymore.
| | 02:16 | Next, I am going to come up here to the Home
tab, and we're going to look for our columns.
| | 02:20 | And you can see between Component and
Roof here, we have the Column command.
| | 02:24 | So if we select on the Column command,
you'll see that we have a variety of
| | 02:29 | columns here, actually in this
case we just have one kind of column.
| | 02:32 | This one happens to be which is
considered a Structural Column, but it's not
| | 02:36 | really the kind of column that we need.
| | 02:38 | We need more of an architectural
column, one that has more architectural
| | 02:41 | character to it and just this round column.
| | 02:44 | So I'm going to hit the Escape key in
order to get out of the Command, and
| | 02:48 | I'm going to click on this word Column
with a little down arrow right there,
| | 02:52 | and instead of the Structural Column
I am going to choose an Architectural
| | 02:55 | Column off of the list.
| | 02:58 | We have some Rectangular Columns but we
also have this fairly nice looking Doric
| | 03:02 | Column, and that's where I'd
like to incorporate into our design.
| | 03:05 | So I'm going to select this 10x10
column, and move over in this direction.
| | 03:11 | Now I'm going to try to place it right here.
| | 03:14 | Now it doesn't really snap so you just
have to get kind of close in there, and
| | 03:18 | as soon as you can see there's nothing
left with these little lines that are
| | 03:23 | showing up on either side of this
little diamond or circular shape here.
| | 03:27 | You know that you've got it right on.
| | 03:28 | So you can just click once you
get to that point. You zoom out.
| | 03:33 | You'll see that you now have that
column in its correct location.
| | 03:37 | Now I no longer need this line here at
the center of it, so I'm just going to go
| | 03:40 | ahead and delete that one out.
| | 03:41 | In fact, I could even delete this
line right here if I wanted to, but for
| | 03:45 | right now I'm just going to leave it around as
a reference line, and I'll come back to it later.
| | 03:49 | Next, I know that there's going to be
another one of these directly over here,
| | 03:54 | and in order to do that I'm just going
to select on this column right here, which
| | 03:57 | we've already placed, so we know it has
the right distance off of the edge here,
| | 04:00 | and off of the edge here.
| | 04:02 | And I'm going to use a
tool called the Mirror tool.
| | 04:05 | And there's really two of them, and
they're side-by-side. One is Mirror - Pick
| | 04:08 | Axis and the other is Mirror - Draw Axis.
| | 04:11 | And we're going to use the
Mirror - Draw Axis for this one.
| | 04:16 | I'm going to move my cursor down until
we see that little triangle right there,
| | 04:19 | on the outside edge of the deck.
| | 04:21 | So I'm going to select right here,
move straight up, and I'm just going to
| | 04:27 | click somewhere out here, making sure
I don't really touch on any particular
| | 04:31 | object when I do it.
| | 04:33 | By doing that it automatically mirrored
that column from that location directly
| | 04:38 | to the other side, and it's also given
us the same spacing off of the ends.
| | 04:43 | Next, I'm going to select on this column,
I'm going to use the Copy command, and
| | 04:49 | I'm going to copy this column over just 6 feet.
| | 04:55 | So now we have three of our
columns moving along here.
| | 04:57 | Now the good news is because we have
this column right here we know what this
| | 05:02 | distance is from here to here.
| | 05:04 | We can now just copy this one up to
this location and over to this location.
| | 05:10 | So I'm going to select on this column,
then use the Copy Command, and make sure
| | 05:15 | to check multiple, so we can do this
multiple times. Click the intersection of--
| | 05:20 | it's going to be the edge of the deck,
then move straight up. Select this corner
| | 05:26 | of the deck. Move straight over.
Select this intersection of the deck.
| | 05:33 | Now let me select on one of these
columns just to verify its properties.
| | 05:40 | I'm looking at it and I'm seeing there's
no real Base Offset to it and also that
| | 05:45 | there's currently now a Top Offset, and
that's going to be the same conditions
| | 05:49 | as we just copied it around in
each and every one of these columns.
| | 05:53 | Anything in Revit you can adjust after the fact.
| | 05:56 | And the first thing I'm going to do is
I'm going to delete this line because we
| | 05:58 | no longer need it--that
reference line that we had.
| | 06:01 | And now I'm going to hold down the Ctrl
key and select on each and every one of
| | 06:05 | those columns that we've just placed.
| | 06:07 | Now I know from the experience that
the Base Offset is going to need to be
| | 06:11 | offset off of the First Floor and in
this case it seems to work best with this
| | 06:16 | column to be just -5 inches down from
the First Floor, and it's just based on how
| | 06:22 | the structure of the column is
and the dimensions of the column.
| | 06:25 | Next, as far as the Top Offset goes, I'm
going to change this to be -1 foot 4 inches.
| | 06:33 | Now what this is going to do is that the
Base Offset is just going to drop where
| | 06:38 | the column is located at down 5 inches.
| | 06:41 | This Top Offset on the other hand
actually affects where the top of the
| | 06:45 | column is going to be.
| | 06:47 | And by dropping it down -1 feet 4
inches this is going to allow us to better
| | 06:53 | support the roof and support the
location where the trusses are going to be up
| | 06:58 | there or the structural members are
going to be up there, supporting that big
| | 07:03 | roof structure up above.
| | 07:05 | So once you've done those, you can
always either click or apply or move
| | 07:10 | over in this direction.
| | 07:11 | As soon as you see this grayed out, you
know that those properties have taken effect.
| | 07:15 | Now if we take a look at this in a 3D
View, spin it around, so we can see that in
| | 07:20 | the Front Elevation.
| | 07:21 | We can now see that we have our
architectural columns in place.
| | 07:27 | One other thing that I'll point out
is if we look at this from the Front
| | 07:31 | Elevation View, something critical
has taken place for us, something often
| | 07:36 | overlooked whenever you're first going
through the design process. Back when we
| | 07:40 | placed the doors and the windows, I had
to just do very specific, they almost
| | 07:45 | seem like odd dimensions off of the
corner of the different walls here.
| | 07:48 | Well, the reason why I did that is so
these windows, so that this door, so these
| | 07:53 | windows would be
centered on our column spacings.
| | 07:56 | So that when it came time to look at
this building from the front. One, we've
| | 08:00 | had uninterrupted views out of our
windows, and two, when we're standing in the
| | 08:04 | front of the building everything will
look nice and centered and clean, and it
| | 08:09 | would just look like a
finished well-thought-out design.
| | 08:11 | So whenever you're going to be placing
in your columns, it's not just a matter
| | 08:15 | of where it's structurally the most sound,
or where it's going to make the most
| | 08:19 | sense economically.
| | 08:21 | You also need to take into consideration
the place where these columns are going
| | 08:25 | to make the most sense architecturally
so that the aesthetics of the building
| | 08:30 | are nice and your design is a very clean one.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing interior structural columns and footings| 00:01 | Now it's time for us to draw
our columns down in the basement.
| | 00:03 | Now it's always important when we are
drawing our columns down in the basement
| | 00:06 | to understand where the spacing should
be so that we know their exact locations
| | 00:11 | as well as what their structural
properties might be, and we will talk more about
| | 00:15 | that here in just a moment.
| | 00:16 | So to begin with I am going to come up
here to the Annotate tab, and I am going
| | 00:19 | to select on Detail Line.
| | 00:21 | Now I am going to draw a line from right
here, and I am going to draw this down 6 feet.
| | 00:27 | What this drawing a line down is going
to indicate for us is how far off of this
| | 00:33 | wall that we want our first column to be at.
| | 00:36 | Now that I've gotten this line drawn
from this point, I am going to move over to
| | 00:40 | the right and just draw
another line right there.
| | 00:44 | So somewhere along this line is where
that column's location is going to be.
| | 00:47 | I am now going to select another Detail
Line, but this time I am going to draw
| | 00:52 | from this structural phase of the wall,
and I am going to come over 10 feet.
| | 00:56 | Now I am choosing 10 feet because
that's a nice length for a typical piece of
| | 01:01 | steel, and the distance, it might need
to span from the foundation wall over to
| | 01:07 | its next supporting object, which in
this case happens to be this column we are
| | 01:11 | getting ready to draw.
| | 01:13 | Now where these two lines cross each other,
that's where our column needs to be at.
| | 01:17 | And the column that we are going to pick
is going to be underneath the Home tab,
| | 01:21 | the word Column, and make sure it's an
Architectural Column because we get a
| | 01:25 | larger list of columns
available to us when we select on that.
| | 01:29 | And this kind of column is going
to be an 8x8 rectangular column.
| | 01:34 | Now the actual column, the thing that
holds all this weight up is much smaller.
| | 01:38 | It's probably like 3 inches in diameter.
| | 01:41 | The thing to know about that though is
that we are picking an 8x8 column because
| | 01:45 | this also includes the
framing going around the column.
| | 01:49 | That's the same kind of framing we have along
our foundation walls right here, and how
| | 01:53 | we end up having a gypsum wallboard on
that framing--is the exact same thing that's
| | 01:58 | going to be going on with these columns.
| | 02:00 | There is going to be wood boards on
the inside of this, with some gyp boards
| | 02:04 | surrounding it, so that we don't
actually see that round pole is what it looks
| | 02:09 | like, a round metal pole going
straight up and down inside of your nice
| | 02:14 | finished basement area.
| | 02:17 | So I'm going to come over here, and
it's not going to snap right to it but you
| | 02:21 | will see these lines around
this sort of diamond shape.
| | 02:24 | As long as I get that dead on like
that. It's going to be in the right
| | 02:28 | locations. So I am just going to go
ahead and click that, and we now have a
| | 02:32 | column sitting in that location.
| | 02:35 | Next I am going to make sure that the
heights and properties of this column are correct.
| | 02:39 | In order to do that we need to
select on the column, and look over here
| | 02:43 | underneath its properties.
| | 02:44 | As far this base offset, it needs to
go down just a little bit in order to be
| | 02:48 | able to get pass that structural floor
and be able to tie in to the footings
| | 02:53 | that I am going to have underneath there.
| | 02:55 | So in order to do that we are going to
type in a negative 4 inch dimension,
| | 02:58 | which by the way happens to be
the same thickness as that floor.
| | 03:02 | Next, we have this top level, and it's
right now--it's saying it's going to the porch.
| | 03:08 | That's not right.
| | 03:09 | It's going to need to go up to that top
of foundation, just like the foundation
| | 03:13 | walls, which our also
supporting members had to do.
| | 03:16 | But there's a little bit extra that it
has to go down, so in order to be able
| | 03:22 | to accommodate that, we are going to need
to put a dimension here for the top offset.
| | 03:26 | Actually I tell you what, let's change
this from being the top of foundation to
| | 03:31 | be the top of First Floor.
| | 03:33 | I know what that dimension is and it's
just going to be easier to do the math on it.
| | 03:38 | And the math says that we need to
do negative 1 foot 8 and 1/4.
| | 03:44 | Now this math that I am talking about
what it's really doing, it's allowing for
| | 03:49 | such things as the
thicknesses of the floor up above.
| | 03:53 | It's going to be allowing for the
steel beam that's going to be going from
| | 03:58 | column to column to column and
whatever its thickness happens to be.
| | 04:02 | Once you start adding up each and every
layer of materials, it ends up being 1 foot
| | 04:08 | 8 inch and 1/4 down and that's
where our column needs to stop so it can
| | 04:14 | support all that weight up above.
| | 04:17 | So now that that's in place, the
next thing we need to do is shut off the
| | 04:21 | visibility of our floors.
| | 04:23 | And the reason why we're going to do
that is that we're going to be placing a
| | 04:26 | footing on the underneath side of this column.
| | 04:29 | And sometimes the floors can kind of
get in the way of that and even make that
| | 04:33 | footing be in slightly a wrong location.
| | 04:36 | So by turning off the visibility of the
floors, we should be able place it under
| | 04:39 | there and get it to work just fine.
| | 04:42 | To turn off the visibility of your
floors, just come over here to the
| | 04:46 | Visibility/Graphics, and click
on the big Edit button over here.
| | 04:50 | Once you have clicked on that big Edit
button, we need to find floors and clear
| | 04:55 | the check mark for it, and just click on OK.
| | 04:57 | You will notice that all the
floors have just shut themselves off.
| | 05:00 | We also noticed that if I come in here
and I select on this line, we can go ahead
| | 05:04 | and delete these out because they are
really not needed anymore; now that we
| | 05:08 | have our first column in the right location.
| | 05:11 | Next, we need to put footings on
the underneath side of this column.
| | 05:15 | In order to accomplish that I am going
to come up here to the Structure tab and
| | 05:19 | pick this Isolated over Foundation.
| | 05:23 | This 30x30x12 pile cap is the right size.
| | 05:27 | So we are going to move it over here,
and wait till you see this blue X that
| | 05:31 | shows up, and just go
ahead and click right there.
| | 05:35 | It's going to tell us that we
can't see it, but it is there anyway.
| | 05:38 | So that's okay, just hit Escape a
couple of times to get out of the command.
| | 05:42 | Next we are going to be able to see it.
| | 05:44 | So underneath the properties here for the
view, go to View Range, and then the View Depth.
| | 05:50 | Change that to be Level Below Top of Footing.
| | 05:54 | Click on OK, and here we can see the
column as well as the footing on the
| | 05:59 | underneath side of it.
| | 06:01 | From here we can select on each of them,
we can use the copy command, and we can
| | 06:07 | copy them over 10 feet each.
| | 06:10 | So 10 foot and 10 foot.
| | 06:17 | Now we need to have another one just
like it down here in order to support a
| | 06:23 | couple of the beams that we are going
to have going from here, on over to here.
| | 06:27 | In order to accomplish that I'm going
to select on our Annotate tab again.
| | 06:31 | Select on Detail Lines, and start to draw
in a couple lines, which are going to be
| | 06:36 | our indicators it has to where
| | 06:38 | this needs to be drawn in at.
| | 06:40 | So I am just going to go flush from the
face of this on over, and then from the
| | 06:45 | middle of this wall on up and where
these lines cross that's going to be our
| | 06:50 | indicator as to where these should go.
| | 06:53 | Now I am going to select on
the footings. Select here.
| | 06:56 | I am going to use the Copy command.
| | 06:58 | I am going to pick the midpoint up
here, which is along the top of this line.
| | 07:02 | We are going to come down and the
reason why I was so specific is if we hit
| | 07:08 | this intersection right now, we can
now see that the front face of this lines
| | 07:13 | up with the front phase of our foundation
walls, and it's also centered here in the space.
| | 07:20 | Finally, in order to complete this
process, we need to do a couple more things,
| | 07:24 | one is underneath here.
| | 07:27 | We are going to select on View Range again.
| | 07:30 | We no longer need to see that deep so
we are just going to change this back up
| | 07:33 | to the Associated level basement;
| | 07:36 | also we no longer need to not see the floors.
| | 07:40 | So we'll go to the Visibility/Graphics
again, which is farther up on the list.
| | 07:46 | Click the Edit button, and
then turn our floors back on.
| | 07:51 | Now we can see our columns,
and we can see our floors.
| | 07:55 | It's always important to remember to
have an architect or engineer actually tell
| | 08:00 | you where these columns need to be at.
| | 08:02 | It's their job to be able to
size these tighter their spacing.
| | 08:06 | But whenever you are getting ready to
place these though, you always have to
| | 08:10 | remember that having clear spans
like this is very difficult to do.
| | 08:14 | You need to have shorter distances so
that your structural members, your 2x12s, your
| | 08:20 | still beams don't start to bend and
bow, and perhaps even collapse causing
| | 08:24 | structural failure inside of your home.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding beams| 00:00 | Now that we have the interior columns
in place, it's time to put those beams
| | 00:04 | that we were talking about on top of them.
| | 00:06 | Now, to do this, we need to be inside
of a different plan altogether, and it's
| | 00:10 | going to be the Basement Ceiling plan.
| | 00:12 | So I am going to go ahead and zoom in here.
| | 00:14 | And I am choosing Basement Ceiling plan,
because it's the level that we have
| | 00:19 | that's absolutely closest to where
these beams need to be located at.
| | 00:22 | It also gives us a good look at where
these column locations are going to be.
| | 00:27 | I am going to come up here, and
I am going to pick on Structure.
| | 00:31 | From there you're going to
see we have a Beam command.
| | 00:33 | If you select on the Beam, you'll see
that we have a few things available, but
| | 00:38 | the thing we want here is going to be a
steel beam, in this case is a W8x13.
| | 00:44 | Steel beams come in a
variety of different sizes.
| | 00:47 | In this case, a W happens to indicate
the type of shape that the beam is and
| | 00:51 | 8x13 happens to indicate sort of the
size and dimensions, and to a certain extent
| | 00:57 | the structural strength that
this beam is going to have.
| | 00:59 | I am going to go ahead and select on the
W8x13, and we're going to need to place
| | 01:04 | this, and sometimes this is the
hardest part of this process.
| | 01:09 | Just getting it into the right spot,
because it doesn't always just snap where
| | 01:13 | you might want it to, so just kind of
eyeball and get it really close right here
| | 01:17 | in the middle of our column.
| | 01:18 | You can even zoom in.
| | 01:19 | Nothing's going to hurt to do that, and
then just click that to be your first place.
| | 01:24 | Now move over, and this is
going to need to be a 10-foot span.
| | 01:28 | So go ahead and just type in 10 foot,
and there we have our beam, going across
| | 01:33 | from the center of our column
over to the center of the next one.
| | 01:36 | Now it gets to be easier, because it
just snaps, right to the end of that one.
| | 01:40 | Click here, come over,
make sure to type in 10 foot.
| | 01:43 | Now we have the right distance there.
| | 01:47 | Do that one more time, and this time
just bring it over to roughly the middle of
| | 01:52 | this foundation wall.
| | 01:54 | What actually occurs in this condition
is it goes to something that's called a
| | 01:58 | beam pocket, and I am going
to here where it says 5 foot.
| | 02:02 | And in reality what happens is that
the steel beams will sit in this pocket.
| | 02:06 | It kind of looks like a giant U-shape,
and it'll sort of just sit there inside
| | 02:11 | of that U-shape and gets
supported by the foundation wall there.
| | 02:14 | We don't need to model it.
| | 02:16 | In fact, if you're going to call that
out in a plan, you'd just draw in with
| | 02:20 | some line work saying that this is
where that beam pockets is going to be at.
| | 02:24 | Next, I am going to come over here and
draw in another beam from here over to here.
| | 02:28 | So I am going to select on Beam.
Once again, yeah, that endpoint is
| | 02:32 | going to make it real easy.
| | 02:34 | Come straight on over, and I
am going to just pick right about here.
| | 02:37 | It doesn't really matter because you're
not going see it, the beam is just going
| | 02:40 | to kind of stop right there anyway.
| | 02:41 | Now that we've done that, we can see
where each of these are going to go to, and
| | 02:47 | we also need to do the same thing down here.
| | 02:50 | So once again, come up here, select on
your beam, pick the midpoint here, and
| | 02:58 | just come straight on over.
| | 03:01 | Now I am going to click right here.
| | 03:02 | You can see how it draws from here on
over. The exact distance on that beam, not
| | 03:08 | too concerned about at the moment.
Regardless of how long you actually end
| | 03:12 | up making it, this isn't a long enough span to
weaken an 8x13 beam. It's pretty tough.
| | 03:17 | I am going to come over here. Click again.
| | 03:20 | Now it should always been noted that
if you're going to be designing your
| | 03:23 | house just like with the columns, you always
need to have someone size your beams for you.
| | 03:28 | This 8x13 is a pretty typical one as long
as it spans about no farther than 10 feet.
| | 03:34 | It usually holds up really nice and strong.
| | 03:36 | But you never know, depending on the
loads up above, you might need to have
| | 03:39 | something a little bit sturdier, a
little bit thicker, a little bit bigger.
| | 03:42 | Or you might even be able to have
something that's smaller in size, which will
| | 03:46 | ultimately end up saving you money.
| | 03:48 | So it's always good to get an
architect or engineer involved in sizing
| | 03:51 | these sorts of beams.
| | 03:53 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Railings and StairsPlacing the railings for the front porch| 00:00 | The next thing we need to do is
start to add railings to our house.
| | 00:03 | We're going to start adding
railings here along our front porch.
| | 00:07 | Now railings are always good because
they one, obviously keep people from
| | 00:11 | falling off of your deck or porch,
down quite a distance, and possibly
| | 00:15 | hurting themselves.
| | 00:16 | Yes, they are required by code.
| | 00:18 | On the more positive side, they can
really be nice decorative pieces and really
| | 00:22 | add something to the
elevation of your structure.
| | 00:25 | Let's go ahead and add those railings.
| | 00:27 | Here is Railing underneath
the Home tab above Circulation.
| | 00:31 | So select on Railing.
| | 00:33 | Make sure the railing is selected.
| | 00:35 | It's going to be this
Railing > Handrail - Rectangular.
| | 00:39 | The Base Level being First Floor is just fine,
as is the Base Offset being 0 feet 0 inches.
| | 00:47 | This is a custom-built handrail for this
house, and when we draw it in, it should
| | 00:51 | come in at the right
elevation based on this information.
| | 00:55 | So let's go ahead and get started.
| | 00:58 | I'm going to zoom down here;
| | 00:59 | I'm going to start this
roughly right about here.
| | 01:03 | Now this is going to sound a little bit
odd but the reason why I'm taking this
| | 01:07 | spot right here is it's between here
and here, and what we're looking at, we're
| | 01:12 | looking down at this column in a plain
view, but the actual body, I think this
| | 01:17 | really needs attach to, it's right about here.
| | 01:20 | We just can't see it through
this top cap piece right here.
| | 01:23 | So if you click here, I
promise you it's going to hit it.
| | 01:27 | Now if you move over in this direction,
just have it come right up to the house
| | 01:32 | and have it tie right into the siding.
| | 01:34 | We're probably going to need to tweak
its location by the time this is done, but
| | 01:39 | the length of it's just perfect.
| | 01:40 | So come over here to the big
green check mark and select it.
| | 01:44 | Now I'd like to have my railings be centered.
| | 01:47 | Technically, it doesn't necessarily
have to be, but I like to have it be
| | 01:50 | centered on my column.
| | 01:51 | So I just make sure the railing is
selected, and then use your arrow key, and
| | 01:55 | just sort of nudge it over until it's lined
up roughly with the center of your column.
| | 02:00 | Now let's go ahead and do that between here
and here, here and here, and here and here.
| | 02:09 | So once again, we're going to go out
use our Railing command. Hit Escape to get
| | 02:13 | out of this if you still have
it selected. Select on Railing.
| | 02:18 | Next, come in here. Click this midpoint.
| | 02:21 | You can even see there is a blue dash
line kind of telling you that hit your
| | 02:23 | right at the center there.
| | 02:25 | Move straight over and go to that same
location right about here and just click.
| | 02:32 | Click the big green check mark.
| | 02:34 | If you need to nudge it up and you
most certainly will, just click your arrow
| | 02:38 | keys two or three times and should
nudge that up to right to the midpoint of
| | 02:41 | that, and you're ready to go into the next one.
| | 02:43 | Make sure you hit Escape to get out of
the command. Come up here to the Home tab
| | 02:48 | and once again, let's do a Railing.
| | 02:51 | From about that spot there, straight up
to this spot right here, click the big
| | 02:58 | green check mark, and nudge
it over using your arrows.
| | 03:03 | One more time, hit Escape to get out
of the Command, select the Railing tool,
| | 03:09 | click right here, go over to your
right, and when you get to right about this
| | 03:14 | spot, go ahead and click, click the big
green check mark, and then use your arrow
| | 03:19 | to get that centered up.
| | 03:20 | Now if we look at this in a plain view,
we can see that we have our railings
| | 03:24 | coming around here, and if you click on
the little house up here now, and then
| | 03:29 | spin our building around, you can now
see that we have our nice custom railings
| | 03:34 | that tie in and tie in just perfectly
into our different front porch columns.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating deck stairs | 00:00 | Our next step will be to draw a
staircase off of our back deck.
| | 00:04 | So let's go ahead and get started on that.
| | 00:07 | I'm going to zoom in on the back deck.
| | 00:10 | Next, we're going to a draw staircase;
| | 00:11 | it comes off here, moves
over, and comes back down.
| | 00:15 | Now it's little bit hard to know exactly
where this location is going to need to be at.
| | 00:20 | I'm just going to start by drawing the
staircase here, and it might need to get
| | 00:24 | shifted over a little bit.
| | 00:25 | So that the staircase will actually
come off of the edge of the deck, and then
| | 00:28 | wrap itself back around.
| | 00:30 | So my first step will be to come up
here to where it had stairs, make sure that
| | 00:35 | this is 7 inch max, 11 inch tread, Exterior.
| | 00:40 | Choose that Base Level to not be the First
Floor; choose it to be this Top of Footing.
| | 00:45 | You have to remember that there's
a lot more grade back here at the back
| | 00:50 | and that's where this Top of Footing
dimension is originally from, and then it
| | 00:54 | slopes back in this direction, and I
know from experience that by choosing this,
| | 00:59 | this gets as close to where we
actually need the bottom of our footings to be.
| | 01:04 | So in this case I end up having this Base
Offset that's here, and set it negative 8 inches.
| | 01:11 | Also as far as the top goes, this
is going to need to be First Floor.
| | 01:18 | Make sure this negative 4
inches is set and it should be.
| | 01:21 | This indicates the step down, onto the deck.
| | 01:24 | It was negative 4 inches off of the First Floor.
| | 01:26 | In this case, our staircase should
start right where the deck starts.
| | 01:30 | So it needs to be at the
same elevation as the deck.
| | 01:34 | Now it's time to draw in that Staircase Run.
| | 01:37 | So make sure the Run is selected.
| | 01:39 | Maybe zoom in just a little bit more.
| | 01:41 | Pick a spot roughly in this area.
| | 01:43 | We will adjust it after the
fact and start to draw straight up.
| | 01:47 | Now one thing I'm noticing right away is
it that this looks really, really wide.
| | 01:51 | Just eyeball in and I'd say this is
probably a 5 foot wide staircase, which is
| | 01:55 | too wide for what we're trying to accomplish.
| | 01:58 | So let's go ahead and hit Escape,
but only hit the Escape key once.
| | 02:00 | And let's look at the Properties over
here, and now we can see that the Width of
| | 02:05 | the staircase is currently set at 5 feet.
| | 02:08 | Let's make it much more narrow.
| | 02:09 | Let's just make this a 3 foot wide staircase.
| | 02:12 | Now let's go ahead and try that again.
| | 02:15 | Click over here somewhere and come straight up.
| | 02:18 | You can see how much more narrow it is.
| | 02:20 | Also, down here below
you can see some gray text.
| | 02:24 | That's telling us how many risers are
being created, as well as how many risers
| | 02:28 | are remaining to be created.
| | 02:29 | Where I'd like this to
get up to is be at 8 and 9.
| | 02:33 | So 8 risers created and 9
remaining just like this.
| | 02:36 | So we'd about to 6 foot 5
mark, go ahead and click.
| | 02:40 | Now the next one is going to
need to be somewhere in here.
| | 02:43 | I don't exactly know where.
| | 02:45 | Just keep it a nice distance away
from here because if we get it too close
| | 02:49 | they'll overlap each other, and you
don't want that. It can be a kind of a nasty
| | 02:52 | situation trying to get that cleaned up.
| | 02:55 | So come over here, we can always
adjust them closer, later if need be.
| | 02:59 | So click once, and then just come straight down.
| | 03:02 | Once you get over to where the deck is
add, just go ahead and click and you should
| | 03:07 | have some like this that gets
automatically assembled for you.
| | 03:11 | Now I know from previous experience that
these should be somewhere in the 4 foot
| | 03:15 | range, probably apart from one another.
| | 03:17 | In the case of this design that I'd
done earlier, it was a 4 foot 2 apart.
| | 03:21 | So let's go ahead and make these 4 foot 2 apart.
| | 03:24 | In order to know that you have that
distance correct, come up here to your
| | 03:27 | Annotate tab, and add an Aligned
Dimension to these blue/purple lines.
| | 03:34 | So get and select on a line, we'll try
this line right here, and this line right
| | 03:39 | here, and come on over and just click
somewhere out here in space, making sure you
| | 03:44 | don't touch on anything.
| | 03:45 | Then hit the Escape key a couple of
times and get out of that command.
| | 03:48 | You can see this 4 foot 0 and 1/2 inches.
| | 03:51 | Next, go ahead and select on this line
right here and just change that and make
| | 03:57 | this dimension be 4 foot 2 inches.
| | 04:00 | You can see how the whole
staircase shifted itself over.
| | 04:03 | One of the things, I'd like these treads
to just kind of line up, just a little
| | 04:06 | bit better with one another.
| | 04:08 | So in order to do that I'm just going
to do a little window around here, and I'm
| | 04:13 | going to use our handy-dandy Move command.
| | 04:15 | I'm going to click here and come down
and whenever you see that blue-dashed line
| | 04:20 | you know that you have those all lined
up, and go ahead and click on the big
| | 04:25 | green check mark up here.
| | 04:26 | They act to do this automatically added a
railing and automatically created a 3D staircase.
| | 04:31 | One thing to know though is that this
is going down from here to here, and we
| | 04:36 | really want it go down
from here, and back around.
| | 04:39 | In order to do that
there's a down arrow right here.
| | 04:41 | Click on that tiny little down arrow.
| | 04:43 | You'll see that staircase actually just flipped.
| | 04:46 | You can tell that the arrow
just is now going the other way.
| | 04:49 | And finally we need to move this
staircase, so it's over here toward the edge.
| | 04:53 | In order to accomplish that don't
click on this part, which is the railing.
| | 04:58 | Click on the staircase as a whole.
| | 04:59 | The railings will follow it.
| | 05:01 | Click the Move command.
Click the intersection of here.
| | 05:06 | Move over here to the intersection of this.
| | 05:09 | Now before we go on to the next
exercise and start adding railings up here at
| | 05:13 | the decks, let's go ahead and take a
look at this in a 3D View and get a
| | 05:17 | better feel for it.
| | 05:19 | You can see now that we've a nice 3D
staircase along with a pretty attractive
| | 05:24 | railing to go along with it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating deck railings| 00:00 | Now that we have our deck and our
stairs back here in the back of the
| | 00:03 | building, let's go ahead and add a
railing that's going to go from the
| | 00:07 | staircase back to the house.
| | 00:10 | Zoom in here and select on
this little railing right here.
| | 00:15 | If you select on the stairs, it won't
allow you to modify the railing, but if
| | 00:19 | you select on the railing itself that will
give you the options to click on Edit Path.
| | 00:24 | From here, pick on this Line tool, and
click at the endpoint right here and draw
| | 00:31 | it straight back toward the house.
| | 00:35 | Click the big green check mark up here, and
let's take a look at what it is that we've done.
| | 00:41 | Come up here to the little house, and let's
click on it and take a look at this in a 3D View.
| | 00:46 | You can see that by adding that line,
we were able to extend this railing back
| | 00:52 | and attached to the house.
| | 00:53 | We're going to do the same thing now
with this railing, except instead of taking
| | 00:57 | it here and bring it straight back,
we're going to come up here, come back about
| | 01:02 | 3 or 4 inches, come over,
and then go straight back.
| | 01:06 | That brings them back 3 or 4 inches.
| | 01:08 | That is going to allow it
to make this transition.
| | 01:11 | You can see how this is coming up and
come straight back without much problem.
| | 01:15 | Sometimes if you try to make a curve,
it doesn't always like to clean up this
| | 01:20 | nice, and this pretty right after
it's come off of an angle like this.
| | 01:25 | So in order to be able to make that
transition, we're just going to bring that
| | 01:28 | line back and notice that this is a
nice, clean, smooth piece, and it's not
| | 01:34 | broken up in the segments.
| | 01:36 | Close this view down, and then come
over here and select on the Railing.
| | 01:41 | Select Edit Path, pick your Line tool,
pick that point,
| | 01:47 | and come back 4 inches.
| | 01:51 | Next, draw a line from here to here.
| | 01:55 | Now I'm not exactly sure how far off
of that that was, but if I click on this
| | 01:59 | point right here; I can then click
here, and then pull this to the end,
| | 02:03 | and I can see now that's 11 inches off,
and I want that to be 4 inches off the end.
| | 02:09 | Now I'm going to pick on this line here, and
come straight back, and attach to the house.
| | 02:18 | Now if we pick a big green check mark
now, we can come back to our 3D View and
| | 02:22 | take a look what it is that we have.
| | 02:24 | Now you can see other railing comes up.
| | 02:27 | I was able to make the transition smoothly.
| | 02:30 | It comes over and now ties back into our house.
| | 02:34 | One other thing that I want to point
out is right now these are kind of short,
| | 02:38 | maybe not quite the right style for this.
| | 02:39 | So I'm going to select on each of these
railings. and if you hold down the Ctrl
| | 02:43 | key when you're selecting and light
and do both of them the same time.
| | 02:46 | Then I'm going to come over here to the
Type selector list and in the pulldown
| | 02:50 | here, I'm going to select on Handrail - Deck.
| | 02:53 | Now you can see I have a much taller rail.
| | 02:56 | I can now also tell that this railing
has slightly different materials applied
| | 02:59 | to it, so it's going to match
the style of our house fairly well.
| | 03:04 | In general, placing railings is really easy.
| | 03:06 | It's just a matter specifying the path
that you want the rail in order to be
| | 03:11 | able to follow, and if you allow the
railing to clean itself up, most of the
| | 03:16 | time it'll give you a nice
presentation and a nice 3D model.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating deck supports| 00:00 | Now that we have this back deck as well
this staircase, let's go ahead and add
| | 00:04 | some columns in order to
keep it structurally sound.
| | 00:08 | So we are going to zoom in here to our
back deck and staircase and currently,
| | 00:12 | I'm in this TOF - Walk Out view.
| | 00:15 | This is the best view in
order be able to see what it is when
| | 00:18 | we are getting ready to draw.
| | 00:20 | Come up here to your Columns
and pick an Architectural Column.
| | 00:23 | Now we have a few options here, but
the one that I'm going to go with is--is
| | 00:27 | this 8x8 Rectangular Column.
| | 00:29 | Personally, I think this might be a
little bit of overkill, but it's never a bad
| | 00:33 | thing to oversize as opposed to
undersize your column, and it's also going to
| | 00:38 | achieve the look that I am
looking for in this design.
| | 00:40 | For me, it's a good choice.
| | 00:42 | Next, we can't really tell where
this is going to get placed at.
| | 00:44 | So just move up here and just
click somewhere in this area.
| | 00:48 | As soon as we click the first
time, we will be able to see it.
| | 00:51 | So I am going to click right here.
| | 00:54 | We can see that this has been put in the place.
| | 00:57 | Now I'm going to select under this column.
| | 01:00 | The Rectangular Column that's just fine.
| | 01:02 | Look at the Base Level for it, and
the Base Level for this should be TOF.
| | 01:06 | So I am just going to go ahead and
select on TOF here; check this Top of Level.
| | 01:10 | This information should say
TOF - Porch and that is correct.
| | 01:15 | But there needs to be an Offset
associated with that and that Offset is going to
| | 01:19 | need to be negative 9 and 1/4 inches.
| | 01:21 | So I am going to come in here negative 9 and 1/4
inches, and I am just going to apply that.
| | 01:27 | Now we have the three-dimensional column
that's sitting right here, but it's not
| | 01:31 | in quite the right location.
| | 01:33 | So we are going to use the Move command.
Pick on the intersection here and just
| | 01:37 | move it up to this spot.
| | 01:40 | Next, we need to have a footing
that's going to go underneath here, and this
| | 01:43 | footing also just
happens to be a column as well.
| | 01:46 | So we are going to come up here to
Column and underneath Structural Column.
| | 01:50 | We are going to see a Concrete-
Round-Column that's 15 inches round.
| | 01:56 | Go ahead and select on that.
| | 01:57 | You can notice that we are not
getting a lot of properties here.
| | 02:02 | We will need to adjust
this after the fact as well.
| | 02:05 | One thing that we do know though is
with the Height that this is going to go up
| | 02:08 | to, and we can adjust that so that it comes
up to the Top Level, which will be the TOF.
| | 02:15 | So instead of this TOF - Porch, we are going
to bring it up to the Top of Footing (TOF).
| | 02:21 | Once you have that, go ahead and just
move it here until you see this little,
| | 02:24 | I'll call it a big blue plus sign,
which is right in the center of the column.
| | 02:29 | Click right there, you can see
how it's nice and round there.
| | 02:32 | It still might not be the right depth
though because we never really had a good
| | 02:35 | opportunity to adjust that, so let's
just go ahead and select on that and verify
| | 02:40 | that this is going down to our Top of
Footing - Walk Out level, and it is, and we
| | 02:45 | can see that over here.
| | 02:46 | Now that we've done that, let's go
ahead and take a look at this in the 3D View
| | 02:50 | so we have an idea of where
we are at as of this moment.
| | 02:53 | You can see that we have a nice heavy
column over here as well as the footing on
| | 02:57 | the underneath side.
| | 02:59 | From here on out, we are going to
select on these and we are going to copy this
| | 03:02 | from location to location to location.
| | 03:04 | All this information will be the same
underneath the landing here, and then we
| | 03:08 | are going to have to extend this up to
be the support structure underneath the
| | 03:12 | deck in this location as
well as this location over here.
| | 03:17 | I'm going to come in here, zoom out
just a little bit so I can see a little bit
| | 03:21 | more, and I am going to
window around these two columns.
| | 03:25 | Next, I am going to pick on the Copy
command and pick the intersection right here
| | 03:30 | and just come directly over.
| | 03:31 | You can see how we have a
copy of this moved over to here.
| | 03:37 | Now I am going to come down here, and
I am just going to come down 2 foot 3
| | 03:41 | inches because that's
what's in my original design.
| | 03:44 | I will say you can make this
2 foot 4 or maybe 2 foot 2.
| | 03:47 | It kind of depends on exactly how you
went about designing your deck and where
| | 03:51 | these stairs are going to originally fall.
| | 03:54 | In this case 2 foot 3
straight down works really nice.
| | 03:57 | So that's what we put in.
| | 03:59 | Now I am going to do the same thing
over here, copy this one, straight down 2
| | 04:05 | foot 3 inches, so it's lined up with the one
above it as well as the one over to the side.
| | 04:13 | Now it gets to be pretty easy.
| | 04:14 | We are going to copy this one right
here down to this intersection, and then
| | 04:18 | copy that over to here.
| | 04:20 | So come up, use your Copy command,
click here, come down here, click where the
| | 04:27 | intersection is at, make sure this is
set at Multiple, and then you can just
| | 04:31 | come straight over.
| | 04:33 | It's a little hard to tell how far
over you need to come, so we might need to
| | 04:37 | move it after the fact.
| | 04:38 | You can always just pick on it again,
zoom in, use your move command, and have it
| | 04:43 | come straight up to that point.
| | 04:46 | And now it's in a good position that
we can have some sort of beam coming
| | 04:50 | across here and any kind of beams coming
across here in order to hold up this deck structure.
| | 04:55 | Now I am not going to take the
time to actually model in those beams.
| | 04:59 | There is really no need for us to do it.
| | 05:00 | When it comes time to call that out we
could always the line work in order to
| | 05:03 | show it, but those beams out there,
well they are going to need to exist, but
| | 05:08 | they don't necessarily need to exist
in our Revit model because they are not
| | 05:11 | going to structurally hit anything and
cause any sort of complications elsewhere
| | 05:16 | inside of our Revit structure.
| | 05:18 | That being said, let's take a look
at this in the 3D View right now.
| | 05:22 | One last thing we'll need to adjust is
the heights of each one of these, so they
| | 05:26 | actually come up and tie into the structure.
| | 05:29 | And the height on those parts that are
actually attached to the deck is going
| | 05:33 | to be first the Top of Level will need to be
adjusted, so that it is at the First Floor level.
| | 05:41 | Then the Top Offset is going to need
to be set at negative 1 foot 1 and
| | 05:47 | 3/4 of an inch.
| | 05:51 | You can see how it moves itself up, and
now it's in a nice position to be able to
| | 05:55 | properly support the deck up above.
| | 05:58 | In the end, just remember that
whenever you are going to be drawing decks and
| | 06:01 | staircases, particularly on the outside
of your building, you are always going to
| | 06:04 | need to have something to be able
hold those things up, and in this case
| | 06:08 | different types of columns, are perfect
elements in order to give the structural
| | 06:13 | support that your deck and staircases need.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating porch stairs and railings| 00:00 | Now it's time to add the
stairs to the front porch area.
| | 00:03 | In order to do that I'm going to zoom in
here to the front porch, and we're going
| | 00:07 | to have a staircase. It comes up, goes
on to the front porch here, and comes up
| | 00:11 | and goes on to the front porch here.
| | 00:13 | In order to accomplish this, I'm
going to come up to our Stair command.
| | 00:16 | I'm going to verify that we're
using the Exterior staircase.
| | 00:21 | And then we need to tell it
what level do we need it to go from.
| | 00:25 | So from grade, up to what level, which is
going to be up to the top of our Porch area.
| | 00:32 | In order to accomplish this, we need to
change the Base Level, which is going to
| | 00:36 | be the bottom of the staircase.
| | 00:38 | In this case, it's going to be a little
bit of a strange level, and I'm going to
| | 00:41 | choose this one; it's called Basement Ceiling.
| | 00:43 | Now the reason why I'm choosing that is
it's the one that's actually closest to
| | 00:46 | our grade level in the front elevation view.
| | 00:49 | So it's just going to work out nice for us.
| | 00:51 | Next I'm going to come over here to
the Top Level, and this is going to be the
| | 00:55 | same as what our porch was.
| | 00:57 | So this is going to be First Floor, and
then give it a negative 4 inch Offset value.
| | 01:04 | You want the top of the stairs to come
up to, be flush with the top of porch.
| | 01:09 | I'm going to come in here, and I don't
have an exact spot but roughly right in
| | 01:13 | the middle between this column and this
column here, when this line here, which
| | 01:17 | is the front of the deck, ends
up turning to be a blue line.
| | 01:20 | You know that you're in
the right, general location.
| | 01:23 | So come to right about there, click, and
move in this direction, and click again.
| | 01:29 | One thing that I'm looking at here is
this looks like it might be a little bit
| | 01:33 | too narrow but we can always
adjust this after the fact.
| | 01:36 | So just come up here to the big green
check mark, and click on the big green check mark.
| | 01:40 | You know I really would like to see
these railings come up and be just about
| | 01:44 | here, and just about here, so
almost in the center of these columns.
| | 01:48 | In order to do that, my stairs are
obviously going to need to get wider.
| | 01:51 | So I'm going to come over here, and
I'm going to change the width of my
| | 01:54 | staircase to be 6 feet, and click on Apply.
| | 02:00 | So by just changing that underneath
Properties, we're able to get the staircase
| | 02:04 | to adjust, even after the fact.
| | 02:07 | Also, if we look at this down arrow
right here, it's going toward the deck and
| | 02:10 | that's not what we want to have occur.
| | 02:12 | I'm going to click on this arrow, so
that it's now coming away from the deck
| | 02:17 | because that's where your stairs to go.
| | 02:19 | You want your stairs to be able to
walk down away from your deck, your porch,
| | 02:23 | not toward it, which will have you going
underneath the porch, which wouldn't be a good thing.
| | 02:29 | Now we need to adjust these
rails so they tie into the columns.
| | 02:32 | So select the other rail. Click on Edit
Path, and just like we were working with
| | 02:37 | our rails earlier and
tying them into our columns.
| | 02:40 | We're going to do the same thing here.
| | 02:41 | So select on your rail. Click on the
little blue dot, and just pull it to about
| | 02:45 | the midpoint between this
line and this line here.
| | 02:48 | It'll tie right into your column if you do that.
| | 02:50 | Click the big green check mark.
| | 02:52 | Do the same thing over here.
| | 02:54 | Edit the Path, pick the line, pick
the circle, drag it up to the midpoint
| | 02:59 | between those two lines, let go, big
green check mark, and then we can take a look
| | 03:04 | at this in the 3D View.
| | 03:05 | I'll go ahead and spin this around, and
there we have the stairs coming up and
| | 03:11 | the railings down in their proper
locations right underneath those columns.
| | 03:15 | Now let's go ahead and draw second
staircase coming off the end here, much
| | 03:19 | like this first one.
| | 03:21 | Going back into the First Floor plan, we're
going to zoom out and zoom over to this area here.
| | 03:27 | I'm going to come up to our stairs.
| | 03:30 | Make sure that you're doing a Run
Stair with this Line tool activated.
| | 03:35 | An oddity about this is that it
always tends to reset the stairs.
| | 03:38 | There are certain commands in Revit that it
always likes to reset, and for whatever
| | 03:41 | reason the Stair
command that does a lot for.
| | 03:44 | So we need to turn this back to its
original properties, which is going to be
| | 03:47 | Basement Ceiling, First Floor,
negative 4 inches, and negative 4 inches.
| | 03:55 | From here let's start the staircase
down here trying to keep it a little bit
| | 03:59 | away from the building.
| | 04:00 | Sometimes if you get it close to the
building, the railings don't always like to
| | 04:04 | get developed properly.
| | 04:05 | So we're going to try to keep it down,
just a little bit away from the building.
| | 04:09 | When you're lined up and it has that
blue line showing up there, go ahead and
| | 04:12 | click and move over in this direction.
| | 04:14 | Once you get to where it says 0
remaining, you can go ahead and click to that,
| | 04:19 | and then click the big green check mark up here.
| | 04:22 | While it's still highlighted blue, you
can see that there's this line here,
| | 04:26 | which is an arrow point toward the deck,
what I mentioned down here is it's not
| | 04:30 | a good thing because if I am having in
this conditioning, it means it's going to
| | 04:34 | try to have the stairs going underneath our
front porch area here, which is what we don't want.
| | 04:40 | So click on this little arrow in
order to flip it to the other side.
| | 04:42 | Now we're going to be able to walk off
here and walk right down our steps and
| | 04:46 | down onto the ground.
| | 04:48 | One final thing I'm going to able to
move this up just a touch, so it's up to
| | 04:54 | this area, right here.
| | 04:57 | So once you get it to right about
there, and we can see that this is going to
| | 05:00 | come in pretty close to
the center of this column.
| | 05:02 | You can click on that rail, click on
Edit Path, and then pull this up just like
| | 05:07 | we did the other rails, and click
on the big green check mark to that.
| | 05:12 | Now if we look at this in the 3D View,
we can then if we need to spin the
| | 05:16 | building around a little bit to see it,
we can but we can zoom in here, and
| | 05:20 | we can see that we have our nice,
decorative front porch steps leading up to
| | 05:25 | our front porch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Building an interior staircase and railings| 00:00 | Now we need to add a staircase that
goes from the Basement level, up to
| | 00:04 | our First Floor area.
| | 00:05 | In order to accomplish that, I am going to
zoom in here into our main living room area.
| | 00:10 | Now we're going to place a staircase.
| | 00:11 | It comes from roughly where my arrow is
at right now over to around this location.
| | 00:17 | A few things though that we need to consider
when we are placing the staircase end.
| | 00:22 | One is what's the size of the landing
going to be down here at the bottom of the
| | 00:26 | staircase, and another thing is--are
you going to have enough room up at the
| | 00:30 | top of the staircase to be able to
carry boxes or pieces of furniture down the
| | 00:35 | staircase, and then also be able to
make the turn down here at this end without
| | 00:40 | just running into a wall, bashing in the walls?
| | 00:43 | It can really create
some uncomfortable situations.
| | 00:46 | Also, you'll find that most codes also
specify that these landings have to be
| | 00:51 | at least as deep as the staircase is
wide, when you're designing that little
| | 00:57 | landing piece down there at the bottom.
| | 01:05 | so we're going to have to have our
landing be at least 3 feet deep, down at the
| | 01:10 | bottom of our stairs, as well as up at the top.
| | 01:13 | Now I've done a little bit of figuring
on this, and I know that we can go with
| | 01:17 | at least a 4-foot-4 landing
down there at the bottom.
| | 01:21 | Bigger is always better, particularly
when we're talking about landings at the
| | 01:25 | bottom of the staircases.
| | 01:26 | The more room that you have, the more
room you've to be able maneuver it, and it
| | 01:30 | also looks better as well.
| | 01:32 | We're going to need to start that staircase
somewhere in this area and come in this direction.
| | 01:37 | To know where that is, I am just going
to draw a little annotation line. In this
| | 01:41 | case, it's going to be a Detail Line,
and I am going to draw it from here, and I
| | 01:45 | am going to draw it out 4
feet 4 inches in this direction.
| | 01:50 | In this case, it just happens to be lined
up almost perfectly with the floor pattern.
| | 01:55 | In fact, if I'd taken this
directly to the actual stone material here,
| | 02:00 | it'd line up absolutely perfect with the
floor pattern in there, where it is right now.
| | 02:04 | That's just fine with me.
| | 02:05 | It's going to look nice and pretty when it's
done, and it's going to give us plenty of room.
| | 02:09 | So the next thing I am going to do is I
am going to come up here, and I am going
| | 02:12 | to execute the Stair command.
| | 02:14 | So underneath Home here, I am going to come
over here to Stairs, and here we have a Base level.
| | 02:21 | I am going to change this from
being First Floor, and I am going to make this be
| | 02:24 | the Basement floor.
| | 02:25 | Next is going to be the Top Level, and
this should be going up to the First Floor.
| | 02:30 | So we're going from the base, which is
the Basement, up to the top, which is the
| | 02:35 | First Floor, but the Offset on
this will be 0 inches as well.
| | 02:40 | So once we get that far, it's
time to start to place this in.
| | 02:44 | Make sure that you have the Run stair
indicated here, and pick roughly in the
| | 02:48 | middle of right here.
| | 02:49 | So I am kind of picking right here in
the Floor pattern and where this blue
| | 02:53 | line kind of highlights.
| | 02:54 | That's where I want to be at.
| | 02:56 | Click once. Move over in this direction.
| | 02:58 | You can see this looks a little bit too wide.
| | 03:00 | So I am just going to hit Escape once
before we even start to draw it in and
| | 03:05 | come down on our Properties list.
| | 03:08 | This has a lot of information,
including properties related to what the actual
| | 03:12 | tread dimensions are going
to be that sort of thing.
| | 03:15 | One of the most important things
here is going to be Width force.
| | 03:18 | So we'll adjust the Width to be 3 feet.
| | 03:22 | Next let's go ahead and try that again.
| | 03:24 | Just move over here until you
see that blue line highlight.
| | 03:27 | Be kind of right in the middle of this
Floor pattern here, and click and move
| | 03:30 | over in this direction.
| | 03:31 | That's really what we wanted to see.
| | 03:34 | Make sure this remaining gets down to 0 by just
dragging over until this box no longer shrinks.
| | 03:39 | It's just the size that it is and it says 0
remaining, and then just click out here in space.
| | 03:45 | You'll see the outline of the staircase.
| | 03:47 | That looks good to me and you can click
on the big green check mark right now.
| | 03:52 | That'll finish off the Staircase.
| | 03:54 | I will say that we don't need this line anymore.
| | 03:56 | So feel free to go ahead and delete
that little line that we've drawn earlier.
| | 04:00 | Now if we take a look at this in the
First Floor view, we can get a better look
| | 04:04 | at what's actually happened.
| | 04:07 | You can see that we have kind of
an odd situation going on here.
| | 04:10 | We can only see a few lines, and you
might be wondering, what are those lines.
| | 04:14 | What's happening there is that the
Staircase, and we'll flip to the 3D view now
| | 04:18 | to take a look at this, doesn't
actually automatically create a hole for you.
| | 04:23 | You'll need to use an object which is
called an Opening Object in order to be
| | 04:26 | able to create that opening in the
floors, and ultimately in ceilings up above in
| | 04:33 | order to bring this from the Basement
level all the way up the First Floor.
| | 04:38 | But just remember, whenever you're
going to be drawing in a basement staircase
| | 04:42 | or any staircase in the house, always
make sure that you've enough room at the
| | 04:46 | top of your staircase as well as at
the bottom of the staircase to be able to
| | 04:50 | have people, boxes, whatever to be
able to maneuver around down in this area,
| | 04:56 | without hitting walls and running into stuff.
| | 09:32 | One is that now we've brought
this right up to the face of siding, and
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Inserting a floor opening for the stairs| 00:00 | As we can see here in the 3D model
that our staircase currently is coming up
| | 00:04 | from the basement, up to the first
floor, but it's going to have some
| | 00:08 | difficulties trying to make this
transition because there is currently not an
| | 00:11 | opening in the floor up above.
| | 00:13 | Now in order to be able to achieve
that transition, we need to drop in
| | 00:17 | another kind of object that will
automatically puncture holes up through
| | 00:21 | ceilings, floors, roofs, any kind of
material that might be getting in the
| | 00:27 | way of the staircase.
| | 00:28 | And that kind of object is a 3D
entity called an Opening object.
| | 00:32 | In order to place it, we are going to
go into our Basement Floor Plan view.
| | 00:37 | Once here, I'm going to zoom in to the
general area where our staircase is located at.
| | 00:42 | Now the opening that I'd like to place
is going to be the same dimensions as a
| | 00:47 | staircase, at least very close to it, and
then have it come up from this basement
| | 00:52 | level, up through the first floor.
| | 00:55 | I'm going to come up and
underneath the Home tab;
| | 00:57 | you will see there's a
big tab here for Openings.
| | 01:01 | And above that there's an
option here for Shaft Openings.
| | 01:04 | And that's the kind of opening
that we want to be able to create.
| | 01:06 | So if you select on Shaft, we can
come down here, and let's verify the
| | 01:11 | Properties really quick.
| | 01:12 | We first want to make sure that our Base
Constraint and our Top Constraint are set properly.
| | 01:18 | The Base Constraint should
be down in the Basement level.
| | 01:21 | That's where the bottom of
the openings is going to be at.
| | 01:24 | Our Top Constraint should say up to
First Floor, in this case it does.
| | 01:28 | Those two are both okay.
| | 01:29 | But we're going to need to
adjust the Top Offset in both cases.
| | 01:33 | Now in both cases, it's going to
need to be a quarter of an inch.
| | 01:36 | The reason is that we actually
have two floors in place here.
| | 01:40 | One that's a structural floor and
one is a finished floor material.
| | 01:44 | Such as carpeting, tile, those sorts of floors.
| | 01:48 | In order to be able to puncture
through those extra materials, which are an
| | 01:52 | extra quarter of an inch thick, we need
to have a Base Offset and a Top Offset
| | 01:57 | that are going to be able to interact with
those particular flowing thicknesses of materials.
| | 02:03 | The Top Offset of a quarter of an
inch is going to take this up through the
| | 02:07 | carpeting, which is laid out
on the floor up above upstairs.
| | 02:11 | The Base Offset though of a quarter of
an inch, which are currently getting ready
| | 02:15 | to set, that one is going to make sure
that the tile underneath our staircase
| | 02:20 | doesn't get removed by this opening
object, because it's going to be floating a
| | 02:24 | quarter of an inch off the ground,
right above where that tile is located at.
| | 02:29 | Go ahead and just move your cursor
out after you have these both set at
| | 02:32 | a quarter of an inch, and now we are going
to essentially trace around the staircase.
| | 02:37 | To do this I'm going to come up here,
and instead of just using my single Line
| | 02:40 | tool, I am going to use my Rectangle
tool here, because it is a nice shape and
| | 02:46 | it's the same shape as the entity
that I am trying to trace around.
| | 02:49 | I'm going to come down here to
the corner here of the staircase.
| | 02:53 | I'm just going to click once, and
I'm going to move up into the right.
| | 02:56 | Make sure you come out to at least this
point, and now I'm going to come back up
| | 03:03 | toward the outside curtain wall here and
click again when once I reach this line
| | 03:08 | that's the face of this curtain wall.
| | 03:12 | When you get there, go ahead and
click the big green check mark there.
| | 03:17 | Now let's take a look up at the First Floor.
| | 03:20 | As you can see we now have our opening in place.
| | 03:23 | One thing that I don't like is the fact that
we can still see a little bit of carpeting here.
| | 03:26 | I do know this curtain wall is slightly
offset from the curtain wall down below
| | 03:30 | it, so as a result of that let's go ahead and
get rid of this little bit of carpeting as well.
| | 03:35 | And you can do that by simply selecting
on the Opening object, coming up to Edit
| | 03:39 | Sketch, and then picking on this line
right here, and then just dragging it up,
| | 03:45 | and sometimes you need to get
a little aggressive with it.
| | 03:47 | If you just try to move it sometimes it
won't, so I like to something just drag
| | 03:50 | it up and then drag it right back down again.
| | 03:53 | And once it's flush with that curtain
wall assembly right there, you can let
| | 03:57 | go, and click on the big green check mark up
here in order to finish off your Opening object.
| | 04:02 | Now you can see that the
carpeting is no longer there.
| | 04:05 | Our opening comes around in this
direction and down in the Basement area,
| | 04:11 | nothing else has been affected.
| | 04:13 | Now if we look at this in a 3D View, we
will be able to see that our opening has
| | 04:17 | in fact cut through this floor, the
floor material up above and hasn't affected
| | 04:22 | the floor material down below
because of that quarter inch offset that we
| | 04:26 | specified down at the
base of the opening object.
| | 04:29 | The opening object is right in this
area, and it's cutting up through here and
| | 04:34 | coming up, and if I move my mouse to
just the right location, you can actually
| | 04:37 | see that opening object highlighted
and this opening object is cutting that
| | 04:42 | whole in the floor up above.
| | 04:45 | As you can see, opening object with
three-dimensional entities that allow you to
| | 04:49 | create your openings for
your interior staircases.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Building a railing at the top of the stairs| 00:01 | Now we need to generate our railings
up here on the first floor surrounding
| | 00:04 | our staircase area.
| | 00:06 | So I'm going to zoom in here where our
staircase is located at. I'm going to
| | 00:10 | select on the railing. I'm going to
click on Edit Path, and now I'm going to add
| | 00:14 | a little extension of railing from
here over to here, back toward where the
| | 00:19 | curtain walls are located at.
| | 00:22 | Select on the Line command, pick, come out.
| | 00:25 | I am going to go out about 4 inches
here, and then I'm going to click again and
| | 00:30 | then come back toward
that curtain wall assembly.
| | 00:32 | Once you get to there, click on the big
green check mark, and now we have a path
| | 00:38 | that are rails coming up.
| | 00:39 | It's going flat. That's where we add another
line instead of just extending this line out.
| | 00:44 | If we'd extended the line out, our
railing would've kept on going up, up, up, and
| | 00:50 | continued on its angle up here.
| | 00:51 | We didn't want it to continue the angle;
| | 00:53 | we wanted it to go flat.
| | 00:55 | That's why we added another little line.
| | 00:56 | So it would be flat there, and then
take it back toward the curtain wall.
| | 01:00 | Now I'm going to select on this railing
down here, and we're going to do the same thing.
| | 01:04 | I'm going to click on Edit Path.
| | 01:07 | I'm going to select on where the railing is at.
| | 01:08 | I can see that that's where it is, so
I'm going to come up here to the line.
| | 01:13 | I'm going to pick right here.
| | 01:14 | I'm going to draw my line from left to
right 4 inches out, pick again, come down
| | 01:20 | 5 inches, pick, move over here.
| | 01:26 | You want this to be 2 inches off
of the end of this opening area.
| | 01:29 | So this is going to be 13
feet 7 inches in this direction.
| | 01:33 | I'm going to pick the line right here,
and then move it back to where the curtain
| | 01:38 | wall is located at and dye it in
right when it hits the curtain wall.
| | 01:41 | Then click on the big green
check mark up here at the top and now we can
| | 01:46 | review our railing.
| | 01:48 | So come up here to the 3D button.
| | 01:50 | Now if we take a look at it, we
can see that we have a nice railing.
| | 01:54 | It's protecting our opening, so
that nobody can trip and fall in.
| | 01:58 | Also, it's a code requirement that
you have a railing that goes around any
| | 02:02 | openings, so that you don't
have accidents occur in the house.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Adding RoomsAdding rooms and room tags| 00:00 | Now it's time to place some
rooms inside of our Revit project.
| | 00:03 | Now that might seem a little bit strange,
because right now if we look on the screen,
| | 00:07 | it looks like we have a lot of rooms
already, because we can see our floors,
| | 00:10 | our walls, a lot of different objects
that we've drawn up to this point,
| | 00:15 | but as far as Revit is concerned,
these aren't actually rooms.
| | 00:18 | What a room object is inside of Revit is,
it allows you to do a couple different things.
| | 00:22 | Probably the two things that we
should be most concerned about
| | 00:25 | at the moment is first is it will
actually tell us what the total
| | 00:29 | square footage of the space
that's been placed in is.
| | 00:32 | Now the second thing that a room object
does and the thing that's the most obvious
| | 00:36 | is that it also will place
a room tag along with it.
| | 00:40 | So we'll be able to actually label such
things as our living room, our dining room,
| | 00:44 | our great room, and all the other spaces
with the appropriate tag for that space.
| | 00:49 | So to begin with we're going to come
up here to where it has Room & Area
| | 00:53 | underneath the Home tab and
we're going to select on Room.
| | 00:58 | Now some of the work that we did very early
in this project is about to pay off for us.
| | 01:03 | Early on we entered in some project
information and part of that
| | 01:06 | project information was room information,
which included room names and room numbers,
| | 01:12 | and you can see all those room names and
room numbers now on this room pulldown list.
| | 01:17 | Back then I said this is going
to be a great catch thing for us.
| | 01:22 | So we'll be able to catch if we
forgot any rooms or any spaces,
| | 01:26 | because as we select these, for instance I'm
going to select this master bathroom here and
| | 01:32 | place it into our space, not only is it
going to tell us this is the master bathroom,
| | 01:38 | this is the number of it, but it's
even going to remove it from the list,
| | 01:43 | so we'll know if there is anything still
left when we have all of our different spaces
| | 01:46 | filled in with rooms that there
still needs to be another space
| | 01:50 | that we need to draw inside of this project.
Let's keep filling in these spaces.
| | 01:55 | I'm going to come up here to Pantry,
I'm just going to fill-in our pantry here.
| | 01:59 | I know that I have a Closet right
next to these rooms.
| | 02:01 | Since this Closet leads to the bedroom
I'll go ahead and put the bedroom in,
| | 02:07 | and you can see how the tag
automatically gets dropped in.
| | 02:10 | We have a great room here, so I'm going
to move over here and click on Great Room
| | 02:15 | and it ends up filling in the dining
room and the kitchen area as well.
| | 02:21 | That's probably not what we want to have
happen, so I'm just going to click in here
| | 02:25 | for right now and you can see how this
entire space is now one big great room.
| | 02:30 | But there is a way that we can fix it,
so they will no longer be that way,
| | 02:34 | and that's another thing that's
underneath the Room word up here.
| | 02:38 | So I'm going to click on Room right
here and there are these objects called
| | 02:41 | Room Separation Lines that work
really, really well for this.
| | 02:44 | I'm going to select on a Room
Separation Line and this is going to
| | 02:47 | separate out our great room area from
the dining room area and the kitchen area,
| | 02:53 | I'm going to move in here and draw my
line from this point to this point.
| | 02:58 | For what it's worth, walls are
natural room separation entities;
| | 03:03 | ceilings, floors, they do it too.
| | 03:05 | So these rooms can't actually go past
those kinds of objects, but if there
| | 03:11 | isn't a wall in that location, if there isn't
some sort of object they can stop the room,
| | 03:15 | then the room will just keep trying
to go in and fill up those spaces.
| | 03:19 | So by doing a Room Separation Line, that
allows us to separate those two spaces
| | 03:24 | without actually drawing in walls or
other kinds of objects that otherwise
| | 03:29 | wouldn't need to be built
inside of the project.
| | 03:32 | Now I've drawn that Room Separation Line in
from here to here and up here and in here.
| | 03:37 | So pretty much any place that there
might be a couple of different spaces
| | 03:40 | that we need to add rooms to.
| | 03:42 | So if I come up here and select on Room,
I'm going to pick the Dining room
| | 03:47 | in this case, and by the way, take a look
at our great room now, it's no longer
| | 03:51 | filling in that area on the left,
because it is now being held by the
| | 03:55 | Room Separation Lines in the walls to its
appropriate space over there on the right.
| | 04:00 | I'm going to click on Dining room here,
you can see how I can drop in the
| | 04:03 | Dining room, and I'm also going to
do the same thing with Kitchen.
| | 04:07 | Now let's go ahead and try to speed
this along and do the lower level.
| | 04:11 | By the way you can see we have
a big white area right here,
| | 04:14 | this isn't actually a room,
what this is, this is an area
| | 04:18 | in the house where you're
going to have your plumbing,
| | 04:20 | your HVAC, that sort of thing
coming up through, it's not a real room;
| | 04:24 | it's just a space between your walls.
| | 04:26 | So I'm going to come down to the Basement
area next, and start to fill in these rooms.
| | 04:31 | So come back up here to your Room
command and come to your pulldown list here,
| | 04:36 | I'm going to pick Living Room next,
Bedroom 2, the Closet,
| | 04:47 | there's a Utility Room here, Lower
Level Bath, as well as a Storage area.
| | 04:59 | So by setting up these rooms, this gives us
the ability to very quickly and easily place
| | 05:05 | these rooms in, have these areas have tags
associated with them, and one other feature.
| | 05:11 | If I move my mouse over this,
you'll eventually see this little X.
| | 05:15 | Whenever you see this X that fills
up the room, this is your room object.
| | 05:19 | If you select on your room object, you'll
get an interesting piece of information.
| | 05:23 | And that is the total square
footage of your space.
| | 05:25 | That's another feature that rooms have;
| | 05:27 | the ability to give you the total square
foot of whatever area you place them in.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Residential Roof DesignCreating a gable roof| 00:00 | Now we're ready to add a roof to our
building, and in order to do that
| | 00:04 | we're going to need to come underneath our
Home tab up here and then select on Roof,
| | 00:09 | and it brings up the Roof command.
| | 00:12 | Now this roof is a Wood
Rafter, 8-inch thick roof.
| | 00:17 | You can see there in the preview that
it had multiple layers and materials.
| | 00:20 | If I select on Edit Type and then Edit,
next to the Structure button here,
| | 00:25 | you'll see each layer of material, 1/4 inch,
5/8 of an inch, 7 1/2 inches, that make up this roof.
| | 00:32 | If you end up having trusses delivered to
the site you might have slightly different
| | 00:36 | dimensions here, and depending on your
part of the country, 7 1/2 inches
| | 00:41 | might not be big enough; you might need
to beef this up if you live in Denver,
| | 00:45 | or if you're living in northern areas
that have a lot of snow load because
| | 00:50 | that's a lot of weight to be bringing down
on your roof and that might need to get
| | 00:54 | bulked up just a little bit.
| | 00:57 | Go ahead and come down here. I'm going
to click on OK to get out of this.
| | 01:00 | I'm going to click on OK to this,
| | 01:02 | but in general this is a fairly
typical residential style of roof.
| | 01:07 | Make sure that your Base Level is this TOP,
which is going to be your top of plate.
| | 01:12 | The plates are those boards that go across
the top of your walls on the exterior of
| | 01:16 | your building and they're going to
support the load of your roof up above.
| | 01:20 | You also have your Base Offset right here
and that kind of affects how the roof is
| | 01:25 | going to be setting on that part of the
building. In this case it's -8 inches.
| | 01:30 | That works out fine for me, so
I'm just going to leave it at that.
| | 01:33 | I'm not going to worry too much
about this overhang right now.
| | 01:36 | People that are used to doing roofs
inside of Revit probably know that
| | 01:39 | you can come over here to the Pick
Walls tool, select here and this
| | 01:43 | Overhang will automatically put in a 2-foot
overhang for you as you're coming around.
| | 01:47 | But one of the things I found with this
particular house is, it doesn't always seem
| | 01:51 | to put the roof down exactly where I like
it to be at, so it's supported by the walls
| | 01:55 | in the location that I really want it
to be at. So as a result of that,
| | 01:59 | what I'm going to do is, I'm going to
take a little bit longer route in order
| | 02:03 | to make sure that the roof works out
and is perfect the first time-around.
| | 02:06 | And in order to accomplish that
and make sure that the roof works,
| | 02:10 | I'm going to come up here and pick on
the Line tool and I'm going to zoom in
| | 02:15 | on this corner of the building.
| | 02:16 | I'm going to click once and I'm just
going to come out 2 feet in this direction.
| | 02:21 | Next, I'm going to draw a line 2 feet up.
| | 02:25 | Now this point right here is going to be
my base point, for everywhere else
| | 02:29 | I'm going to be drawing, the rest
of this main body of our roof.
| | 02:33 | From here, I need to come over,
| | 02:36 | and the dimension here is going to be
40 feet 2 inches going directly to the left.
| | 02:41 | You can see how, from here to here, it's
going to be covering the building pretty well.
| | 02:48 | Next, draw a line going straight down
| | 02:51 | and that line is going to need to be
46 feet 4 inches down; so 46 feet 4 inches.
| | 02:59 | Of course make sure that line is straight,
if it's at a little bit of an angle,
| | 03:03 | it's going to give you a rather odd
shaped roof so make sure that you have
| | 03:06 | everything going at 90 degree
angles from here on out.
| | 03:09 | We will end up adding the actual
pitch to this roof here in just a moment.
| | 03:13 | Go ahead and come back over to the side again.
| | 03:16 | In this case come over 40 feet 2 inches,
come straight up and you can actually
| | 03:24 | cover this line up; we're going to
delete it here in just a moment anyway.
| | 03:27 | It's just giving us a warning message
saying that this line,
[00:03:30 .20]
that little line right there was covered
up by this big line, and that's okay.
| | 03:33 | Go ahead and hit Escape a couple of
times on your keyboard just to basically
| | 03:38 | get out of most of the command, and
then window around these two lines and
| | 03:42 | hit the Delete key in order to get rid of
that extra line work that you don't need.
| | 03:46 | Now before we finish this roof,
right now we have a flat roof.
| | 03:50 | We need to have a slope to it.
| | 03:52 | So in order to do that there is really a
couple of ways, but I like selecting on
| | 03:56 | the outside lines and coming
up here and defining the Slope.
| | 04:02 | And here we have Slope and it says 9'/12";
change this to be a 4'/12" slope,
| | 04:07 | and do the same thing over on the other side.
| | 04:09 | In this case, it's over on
the left side of your roof.
| | 04:12 | So define the Slope and change this
to be 4'/12" slope for your roof.
| | 04:18 | Now this has covered up a good portion of
our porch as well as most of our building.
| | 04:23 | We're going to need to do a secondary
roof that's going to come out like this,
| | 04:27 | come across, and it's going to go
underneath this roof surface and tie into
| | 04:32 | this wall back here and come
back around very shortly here
| | 04:36 | after we finish creating this roof.
| | 04:38 | So once you get to this point, come up
here, click on the big green check mark
| | 04:42 | and check out the roof that
you have up to this point.
| | 04:45 | You can spin it around, you can see
that you have a nice gable roof here,
| | 04:50 | that covers most of the building.
| | 04:52 | But we obviously have a few wind and
drainage issues going on in here
| | 04:57 | with these great big openings.
| | 04:58 | So if we want to be able to clear those
sorts of things up, the trick to that is
| | 05:02 | is, is to select on one or multiple
walls, such as this, and you can do that by
| | 05:10 | just clicking and holding down
your Ctrl key at the same time.
| | 05:13 | Whenever you select on a wall, you'll
end up getting this option,
| | 05:16 | it's called Attach Top/Base.
| | 05:17 | Go ahead and click on that and then the
question it's going to be asking is:
| | 05:22 | do you want to attach the top of the wall
or the bottom of the wall to the object
| | 05:26 | you're getting ready to click?
| | 05:28 | In this case obviously we want to
attach the top of our wall to the roof.
| | 05:31 | So pick on the Roof next, and you can
see how it's automatically brought all
| | 05:37 | those walls that are currently underneath
that roof all the way on up to attach
| | 05:42 | themselves to the right location.
| | 05:44 | Now you'll also need to do that if you have
any other smaller walls, say this side little
| | 05:49 | brick wall right here, it also, even
though it's a different material,
| | 05:53 | has Attach Top/Base associated with it,
| | 05:55 | and then it's just a matter
of attaching it to this roof.
| | 05:59 | Now we will be needing to draw in a second roof,
and when we draw in that second roof, then
| | 06:04 | we'll come in and clean up the rest of these
conditions that we're seeing here in our model.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a roof for the porch| 00:00 | Now that we have the main roof over our
house drawn, we now need to have a roof
| | 00:04 | that's going to cover up
this front porch area
| | 00:06 | as well as a little bit of
the main body of the house.
| | 00:11 | Let's start by zooming in on this
portion of the house.
| | 00:14 | The reason why we didn't do this all
in one roof surface is the fact that
| | 00:18 | this roof comes over here, comes
out, and then dives in underneath
| | 00:23 | the big main roof body that's
covering the majority of the home.
| | 00:28 | That's something that one roof inside
of Revit just isn't capable of doing.
| | 00:31 | It can't curve in and wrap
itself back underneath itself.
| | 00:36 | It requires at least two roofs in
order to be able to accomplish that task.
| | 00:40 | Now our next thing that we need to
do is start to draw in the outlines
| | 00:43 | of where this roof is
going to be covering.
| | 00:47 | So to begin with, underneath
the Home tab here,
| | 00:49 | I'm going to be coming over
and selecting on the word Roof.
| | 00:53 | You can pick on the word
or just on the roof.
| | 00:56 | If you pick on the word,
you'll get a variety of options,
| | 00:59 | including Roof by Footprint
and that's what we'll be using.
| | 01:02 | We're going to select the exact same
Roof options that we had before with the
| | 01:06 | main body of the roof, and that's
going to be a Wood Rafter 8-inch.
| | 01:11 | Also make sure your Base Level's at TOP, and
the Base Offset is going to be -8 inches.
| | 01:18 | Now we're going to draw in manually each
location where these lines are going to
| | 01:23 | need to be, where the roof
is going to need to be.
| | 01:25 | So I'm going to select on the word Line
right here. Next I'm going to draw in
| | 01:31 | a line from right here, and
I'm just going to draw it up.
| | 01:34 | I think it's going to be a 2 feet
1 inches, just straight up here.
| | 01:40 | Now in truth I might be able to just
draw it up right here to this edge,
| | 01:44 | it's hard to say if that's
going to clean up the roof.
| | 01:46 | I like to kind of cross them over just a
little bit if they're going to be touching,
| | 01:50 | so that I know for a fact I can get these two
roofs to join together at the end of the process.
| | 01:56 | Next, come over and make sure that that
dimension right there is currently being
| | 02:00 | covered up by Intersection and Horizontal;
it ends up showing up as being 2 feet.
| | 02:04 | As long as it shows up as being 2 feet,
you know that you're in the right location
| | 02:08 | and you're in a great starting point.
| | 02:11 | Now this next one is going to actually
have a defined slope associated with it.
| | 02:16 | So it's going to slope up from this
point up and then from over here on up.
| | 02:20 | But we're going to define that slope
after the fact because we can and we'll
| | 02:24 | just kind of speed this process along.
| | 02:28 | I'm going to type in 10 foot 5 inches
when it's going straight down.
| | 02:32 | So go ahead and type in the 10 foot 5 inches.
| | 02:36 | Next, move over to your right, 26 feet.
| | 02:42 | Come straight up and tie this
roof directly into the wall.
| | 02:46 | So bring it right up to the wall, because
that's where it's going to actually tie into.
| | 02:51 | Now move over, and how far we want
to draw this line over to the left,
| | 02:56 | is going to be 13 feet. Why? Because
that's the exact middle of this roof,
| | 03:01 | that 26 feet that we just drew.
| | 03:03 | Now we're going to bring this down and
just have it line up with that first
| | 03:11 | purple, magenta, whatever color line that is,
and just make sure that it's lining up fine.
| | 03:18 | Now we no longer need this line right here,
| | 03:20 | so you can go ahead and delete
this very first line that we drew.
| | 03:25 | But the second line that we drew which
we've oftentimes in the past have
| | 03:28 | deleted as sort of a reference line for
the spot that we're going to be starting
| | 03:32 | our drawing at; this can be of use for us
because it's in the right location already.
| | 03:36 | So select on that line, grab onto
the blue dot, and just pull it over.
| | 03:43 | Once it's one continuous line as you follow
it around, we need to do one more thing
| | 03:47 | before clicking on the big green
check mark, and that is,
| | 03:51 | select on this line on the left-hand side
and this line on the right-hand side,
| | 03:55 | and we need to define the slopes for each of
those so the roof will slope up appropriately.
| | 04:02 | Once you've done that, just clicking
over here and telling it the slope
| | 04:05 | isn't going to be quite good enough.
| | 04:06 | We need to actually go in here and
in each location select on the line
| | 04:12 | and either click where this text is at and
turn it into a 4'/12" slope or select on
| | 04:17 | the line and click where this text
is at and turn it into 4'/12" slope.
| | 04:22 | Either one works; it's filling
in the same information,
| | 04:25 | just in two different locations
where it can be done.
| | 04:28 | Once you finally have this together,
come up to the big green check mark,
| | 04:32 | and select on the big green check mark.
| | 04:35 | Now if we take a look at it in the 3D
view by coming up to the little 3D house,
| | 04:39 | and we spin our building
around to take a look at it,
| | 04:41 | You'll see that our two roofs are now lining
up, but they are crossing over each other,
| | 04:46 | which means we're going to need
to join them together next.
| | 04:50 | Now that's easy enough to do. It
doesn't matter which roof you select on;
| | 04:53 | just pick one of them and there's a command
up here on the Ribbon, it's called Join.
| | 04:58 | Select on the Join tool and then pick
one roof, whichever one, doesn't matter,
| | 05:03 | and pick the other roof, and you'll
see, they automatically join together.
| | 05:07 | Now it's not a perfect cleanup but it's
pretty darn close, and it'll print out well
| | 05:12 | and just look good overall whenever we're
doing presentations and that sort of work.
| | 05:17 | It also takes away some of the extra little
material that didn't need to be there.
| | 05:23 | Now if we spin this around a little bit
more, we can see that in fact this roof
| | 05:27 | does wrap in underneath the main roof,
and that would have been an impossibility
| | 05:31 | if we had drawn this with just one roof.
| | 05:34 | Also we will come back in and
actually clean up this wall, this wall,
| | 05:39 | the walls on the underneath side here,
as well as adding some extra structure
| | 05:44 | here in order to finally
finish off our front porch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Applying gutters and facia boards to the roof| 00:00 | Now that our roof is in place,
| | 00:01 | let's go ahead and add our Fascia
Boards and Gutters up there.
| | 00:05 | Let's zoom in just a little bit,
so we can see our roof a bit better.
| | 00:09 | Find the Roof tool, select
where it has the word roof.
| | 00:13 | From there, come down and let's start off
by incorporating the Fascia Board first.
| | 00:19 | We're going to be drawing in a 1x12 board
| | 00:23 | and it's going to go along
the front face of our roof.
| | 00:26 | In order to accomplish that, there are
two different spots that could be clicked.
| | 00:30 | There's a top spot and a bottom spot.
| | 00:33 | Always pick the top spot, because
the top of the fascia board
| | 00:36 | is going to attach at that location.
| | 00:39 | In this case we're going to click there,
| | 00:40 | and you can see the fascia board
gets put in at the proper height.
| | 00:45 | Continue that on around your building,
picking the top edge in each case.
| | 00:52 | You'll see once you get to this point that
your fascia board doesn't go all the way
| | 00:56 | to the end and the reasoning behind that
is this is technically two separate roofs.
| | 01:01 | We're going to come back in and
clean this up in just a minute.
| | 01:04 | So let's spin the building around and
pick the top edge, the top edge,
| | 01:10 | and now pick this top edge here and
finally this top edge here,
| | 01:14 | and we now have fascia board going
almost completely around our building.
| | 01:19 | Now in order to clean up a couple of
situations that have developed,
| | 01:23 | this is how we go about doing it.
| | 01:25 | First, if I select on the Fascia Board here,
you can see how it's going through our roof
| | 01:29 |
in this location and that's because
there are two separate roofs here.
| | 01:33 | In order to be able to clean that
up, all you have to do is select on
| | 01:37 | your fascia board, click on the little
circle, and then just drag this up
| | 01:41 | until you get to ridge of your roof.
| | 01:44 | When you let go, the fascia board
automatically comes up to its
| | 01:48 | correct location and the roofs once
again clean up on one another.
| | 01:52 | Also, you can select on the fascia
board here, select on the little circle,
| | 01:56 | and pull it over to the edge.
| | 01:57 | Once you get that square,
that's the end point, let go,
| | 02:01 | and the fascia board will
automatically clean up.
| | 02:04 | Now the next step is to install
a gutter to the outside edge.
| | 02:09 | To do that, we need to come underneath
the same location which is the Roof tool
| | 02:12 | and select on Gutter.
| | 02:13 | We're going to place the
gutter also along that top edge.
| | 02:18 | The only thing that I dislike about this
is that the gutter looks a little bit
| | 02:21 | high up for my taste; so we will be
dropping the gutter down in just a minute.
| | 02:25 | I'm going to place another gutter
right here and now that I'm looking at it,
| | 02:29 | I notice that I'm actually missing a fascia
board going across this particular surface,
| | 02:34 |
and that's because I never clicked on
it when we were adding the fascia boards.
| | 02:38 | So before we add a gutter in there,
we need to add that fascia board to it.
| | 02:41 | I'm going to come down, select
on the Fascia command, and click.
| | 02:46 | Escape out of the command, come
back up to Roof, select on Gutter,
| | 02:51 | and now place our gutter in.
| | 02:53 | You'll notice that I can select
on this gutter individually,
| | 02:56 | but if I select on this gutter,
it actually selects all of them.
| | 03:00 | It's an interesting feature of Revit.
| | 03:01 | If you draw them individually, not one
after another, they'll be placed individually.
| | 03:07 | On the other hand, if you draw them one after
another, items like gutters or fascia boards,
| | 03:11 |
then they'll all be considered part of the
same grouping of fascia boards or gutters.
| | 03:17 | In this case, I'm going to drop
my gutters down about 2 inches.
| | 03:20 | So I'm going to select on each of my
gutters and then change the vertical
| | 03:24 | profile of them, and I'm going to
drop it down -2 inches from the base point
| | 03:29 | which was the top of that edge of
our roof and you can see by doing that,
| | 03:33 | it's dropped the gutter down 2 inches;
it's not quite centered on the fascia board
| | 03:36 | but it's close enough and I'm really
happy with the way that it looks.
| | 03:40 | So by using these tools
underneath Roof, Fascia and Gutter,
| | 03:45 | and just by selecting on the edges,
you can very quickly come in here
| | 03:48 | and place fascia and gutters
for your house.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Tying the roof to the structure| 00:00 | Now that our front porch
has a roof over it,
| | 00:03 | we still need to make some fairly
dramatic modifications to it.
| | 00:07 | If we zoom in here, you can see that
we have quite a few ventilation and
| | 00:11 | drainage issues that need to be
taken care of to begin with,
| | 00:14 | as well as a floating front porch roof
which just isn't going to work out too well.
| | 00:19 | So we need to come in and start
to add the structure here
| | 00:22 | and have that structure be supported
by these columns down here below.
| | 00:26 | Now this is going to be
fairly simple for us to do.
| | 00:29 | One more thing that I'm going to
point out is I am currently leaving
| | 00:32 | these walls at their current height.
| | 00:34 | It's true I could select them and say
Attach Top/Base, just like I did over here
| | 00:39 | with these other walls in
order to bring it up to the roof.
| | 00:42 | The only real question is
whether or not that's required.
| | 00:45 | The reasoning is that this could end up
either being truss construction,
| | 00:50 | and that's probably what's going to
happen over the main bulk of this roof,
| | 00:53 | or it could end up being stick framed
construction, which is using things like
| | 00:57 | two by sixes, two by eights, two by tens,
| | 01:00 | in order to be able to create
the roof structure up above.
| | 01:03 | Sometimes we are using combination,
trusses and stick framing,
| | 01:07 | in order to frame in these roofs.
| | 01:09 | If that's going to be used, there is a
good chance we might not even need to
| | 01:12 | bring this up because this is just all
going to be considered underneath the
| | 01:16 | roof once the rest of this front porch
structure has been added on to our model.
| | 01:21 | So we're just going to leave
those walls the same for right now.
| | 01:24 | At some point though we'll need to take care
of this brick wall and get it up and over,
| | 01:28 | because there's currently not a roof over
it other than this one many feet up above.
| | 01:34 | So in order to be able to frame this out,
we need to come over and go to our floor plan,
| | 01:39 | and the one we need to go to is going to
be this TOP which is the Top of Plate view.
| | 01:45 | Once we're in it, we can't really see too much
about what's going on inside of the building.
| | 01:49 | So we need to select on the roof itself,
come down to little eyeglasses and say
| | 01:54 | Hide Category, this will hide all of
the roof elements, and since we're not
| | 01:58 | drawing in any roof elements,
that's fine for us.
| | 02:02 | Next we need to add in some walls that are
going to come around here and wrap around.
| | 02:06 | Now in reality will you usually be
actually framing this in with walls
| | 02:10 | if you're going to be building
this out in the field?
| | 02:13 | You can make an argument either
way, I suppose, but probably not.
| | 02:16 | But you will have some boards you're
going to be attaching your siding to,
| | 02:20 | so that it has the right appearance, and
this could be on the outside of any trusses,
| | 02:25 | stick framing, however
way you decide to frame this.
| | 02:28 | But in order to best show this inside
of a Revit view, oftentimes using walls,
| | 02:33 | even if it isn't for their exact
intended purpose, works out for the best,
| | 02:38 | because walls work really good
for showing off items like siding.
| | 02:42 | They're also structural in the fact
that while you're going to be framing to
| | 02:45 | whatever the members are you put up here
anyway, using walls is going to work nice
| | 02:49 | in order to show this and give you
the right level of detail that
| | 02:52 | you'd expect to see on
the outside of your building.
| | 02:55 | So I'm going to come in here to this
corner first.
| | 02:59 | I'm also going to take a look
at a few properties of these walls.
| | 03:02 | The first thing that I
want to take a look at is
| | 03:05 | I want to look at the
exterior side of these walls
| | 03:08 | and we need to have this Siding @
Porch wall be the one that's used.
| | 03:14 | If you select on that, next you'll see
that there is a base constraint to it and
| | 03:18 | that is listed as being top, that is fine,
but we need it to come down -1 foot 4 inches
| | 03:26 | so it's going to be supported properly
on these columns or at least come down
| | 03:29 | to there where any of the structure
might be hidden behind the walls.
| | 03:34 | Next, we're going to have the Base
Extension, and with the Base Extension,
| | 03:39 | that should be 0 feet 0 inches,
just like it says.
| | 03:43 | For the Height, it doesn't really
matter what the height is
| | 03:46 | as long as it's tall enough
that you can easily see it.
| | 03:49 | In this case it happens to be defaulting
to 9 foot and that works just fine for me.
| | 03:53 | We're going to come back in here and
clean this up after the fact anyway.
| | 03:56 | We have a gable roof that we need to deal
with, a sloping roof that we need to deal with.
| | 04:02 | So no matter what the height is,
it wouldn't be a correct one anyway,
| | 04:05 | because it just wouldn't automatically
clean it up by default anyway.
| | 04:08 | But this is just fine, you want to do
it to the finish face of the exterior,
| | 04:14 | and then come over here to the edge of
this wall and click whenever you get that box.
| | 04:19 | When you come straight down you'll see
that the wall is on the wrong side.
| | 04:23 | If you hit the Spacebar, it will
flip it over to the right side.
| | 04:27 | Now move straight down and how our
design has it, is that to come down until
| | 04:31 | it gets to this point, 5 foot 10
inches down. Click, move over.
| | 04:37 | We want this one to go 22 feet in
this direction which takes us to
| | 04:41 | the same location on this column as
we were on this column over here.
| | 04:46 | Next, move straight up, and
we're going to tie this wall
| | 04:50 | directly into this big wall over here.
| | 04:53 | Once we're connected you can hit Escape a
couple of times to get out of that command.
| | 04:59 | Now if you happen to see one of these
walls dying into this wall like right here,
| | 05:03 | you may not want it to be that way,
it's not going to hurt anything,
| | 05:07 | but it's not really a nice clean design.
| | 05:09 | So one of the things that you can do
is you can highlight on the wall,
| | 05:13 | select it, right-click when you see this
dot and do this thing called Disallow Join.
| | 05:17 | That will allow you to pull the wall
back without it automatically trying
| | 05:21 | to clean up there at that intersection.
| | 05:24 | Next we need to do the same sort of thing
over here, and it's going to be a wall,
| | 05:28 | a wall, and another wall.
| | 05:31 | So in order to accomplish that we're
going to once again use our Wall tools,
| | 05:34 | make sure you have the Exterior Siding
to the Porch, make sure that all this
| | 05:38 | information is the same as it was over here.
| | 05:41 | For me it's a little bit easier, if I just
pick one of these corners and kind of start
| | 05:45 | to draw from there, so I'm going to select
this corner right here in the lower left,
| | 05:50 | I'm going to hit the Spacebar to flip the
wall to the other side,
| | 05:53 | I'm going to click, and then
I'm going to click up here again
| | 05:56 | once we get up to the face of the next wall.
| | 06:00 | Just zooming back to make sure that I
have the right surface picked.
| | 06:04 | In this case you could see once again it's
trying to clean the wall up well on the inside,
| | 06:08 | not exactly where I want it to go.
| | 06:10 | So if I select on the wall,
right-click and say Disallow Join,
| | 06:13 | I can pull this thing back until it's
flush with the face of that wall.
| | 06:17 | Now let's go ahead and draw in one more
wall, we need to be able to enclose this in.
| | 06:24 | So just click here at the
intersection of these.
| | 06:27 | This looks like it's already drawn in
the right direction, so that's a good point.
| | 06:31 | Come back. That looks pretty good,
it should be enclosed just like that.
| | 06:36 | Now we're still going to need to: one,
clean up these walls so that they're
| | 06:39 | at the right elevation relationship to
the roof up above,
| | 06:42 | and then two, we also need to put in
a ceiling in that location so that
| | 06:47 | we can't see the structure up above
and so we can also insulate that area
| | 06:50 | because we have it open going into where
our roof space is in our house as well.
| | 06:55 | I think I'll go into my 3D View so
we can take a look at this first.
| | 07:00 | Now that we've done that we can see our roofs
up here and our walls are way, way up high.
| | 07:07 | To fix that, select on the
different walls you want to join
| | 07:11 | and do this Attach Top/Base like
we did in the other locations.
| | 07:15 | Select on your roof and you'll see
how your walls will drop straight down
| | 07:18 | and start to clean up.
| | 07:20 | Do the same thing with this next
section of walls, Attach Top/Base on down.
| | 07:28 | You can see how it's cleaned up well with
the structure.
| | 07:31 | We need to add ceilings next.
That's pretty easy at this point.
| | 07:35 | We can come into our Ceiling
Plans and double-click on First Floor.
| | 07:39 | Now to add a ceiling, move over to the
Home tab and select Ceiling off of the list.
| | 07:45 | Make sure that Vinyl bead board is the
type of ceiling that we're going to install;
| | 07:50 | it's a typical kind of ceiling
you might see in a porch area.
| | 07:56 | The Height Offset here is going to need to
be adjusted and so is the location of it.
| | 08:01 | So instead of being First Floor,
we'll need to bring this TOP of Plate,
| | 08:05 | where it has 8 feet, we'll need to
drop this down to -1 foot 4 inches,
| | 08:10 | and I'm going to move my cursor to the
inside here and I'm just going to click.
| | 08:15 | Once I've done that, I need to reset
this, for whatever reason it likes to
| | 08:19 | kind of reset itself whenever you
click inside of that space.
| | 08:22 | And we're going to change that once again
to be TOP, make sure it's -1 foot 4 inches,
| | 08:29 | and then click inside of that space.
| | 08:30 | You can't really see it from the top here,
but it has placed that material in, and
| | 08:35 | if we look at this in a 3D View we'll be
able to see that we now have some grayed
| | 08:40 | out areas right here, as well as right
here and those are the ceiling objects
| | 08:45 | that we placed in, in order to fill
this area in where all the structure,
| | 08:50 | insulation, all that kind of stuff is
inside here at the top of the porch.
| | 08:55 | Now the only thing we're going to have
left will be to actually finish this off
| | 08:59 | by fixing this wall so it follows
the profile shape of the roof up above.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying a wall profile| 00:00 | Now things are almost complete
on this outside of our house.
| | 00:03 | The only thing that we have left
to do is modify this front wall
| | 00:07 | so its profile matches
the underside of our roof.
| | 00:11 | Now you can see, if I select on this
wall right here, it's not going up
| | 00:15 | high enough to be able to
match the roof up above it.
| | 00:18 | If I use this command that we've used
in the past called Attach Top/Base,
| | 00:21 | and then I select on this roof,
| | 00:25 | in the past this has always cleaned
everything up and just made it look right,
| | 00:28 | much like this front gable
that we see over here.
| | 00:31 | The problem is though,
if we select on this roof,
| | 00:34 | you can see that Attach Top/Base
misses an entire portion.
| | 00:38 | The reason is that this brick wall doesn't
actually go all the way over to here.
| | 00:43 | Now when it's finally constructed, it
will, but the base of it is stopping
| | 00:48 | just past where we can see it
here in the Elevation View.
| | 00:51 | In reality there's going to be a little
brick ledge up here that's going to be
| | 00:54 | holding some of this brick up in order
to finish the view off and make it look
| | 00:58 | right aesthetically from the
front elevation of the house.
| | 01:01 | Now that brick ledge isn't something
we're going to need to model in.
| | 01:04 | It's something you would just note,
maybe throw in a couple lines and say
| | 01:08 | that it's there and go on; there's
no reason to model it in Revit.
| | 01:13 | But in order to show it here we have to
be able to modify this wall so that
| | 01:18 | we can see the brick coming over and coming
down and being in the correct location.
| | 01:24 | To begin with, while I could do it in 3D View,
there's a lot of little accuracy problems,
| | 01:30 | because you're trying to draw
this in sort of a perspective
| | 01:33 | and it just doesn't turn out quite right.
| | 01:36 | If I try to draw here to here, there
might end up being just a little gap
| | 01:40 | here or there that I would miss in this view.
| | 01:42 | So I like coming into my Elevation views,
in this case my South Elevation View
| | 01:47 | and be able make those changes here where I'm
looking completely straight on at my brick wall.
| | 01:52 | I'm going to select on the wall and
then click on the big Edit Profile button
| | 01:56 | that appears when the wall is selected.
| | 01:58 | It's going to give us just kind of a
warning message saying that
| | 02:02 | it can no longer keep this shape, which is
attaching itself to the roof,
| | 02:06 | if we do this command; that's okay,
that doesn't bother us.
| | 02:10 | We already knew this already, because
whenever you click on Edit Profile
| | 02:14 | it will automatically change the wall back
to the shape it was when it was first drawn.
| | 02:20 | So from here I'm going to select on
this line and click on the Delete key.
| | 02:25 | Next I'm going to select on this line
up here and start to draw in my shape.
| | 02:30 | Now Revit just kind of naturally
likes to snap itself to the angles;
| | 02:35 | in this case, the roof it is following.
| | 02:38 | It's kind of hard to describe but when
you start to move your mouse it almost
| | 02:41 | feels like it's jumping along those angles.
| | 02:44 | So you know that you have it.
| | 02:45 | Once you get this blue dash line, go
ahead and click, start to move down,
| | 02:51 | you'll kind of feel like it's
snapping to the right locations.
| | 02:55 | Once you get to a point
where you're well below this,
| | 02:58 | in fact, you'll probably get another
blue dash line that kind of appears,
| | 03:01 | just go ahead and click once, come down,
the exact locations don't really matter.
| | 03:06 | I know in reality the brick is probably
going to come straight across right here
| | 03:10 | and up and you could model
it that way if you wanted to,
| | 03:13 | but for what we're going to see, whether it
be in building sections or front elevations,
| | 03:17 | the shape that we're doing
is going to work just fine.
| | 03:21 | So come straight down, when you see
the blue line going down at the angle
| | 03:26 | as well as the blue dash line coming
straight up, go ahead and click,
| | 03:29 | and we can finish that off by
using this tool right here,
| | 03:32 | the Trim/Extend to Corner tool
to trim these lines together.
| | 03:37 | Once this is all one continuous line, you can
click on the big green check mark up above.
| | 03:42 | Don't worry about this warning message.
| | 03:44 | We'll just go ahead and say
Unjoin Elements to this
| | 03:47 | and we'll just want to make sure
that nothing strange has happened
| | 03:50 | like a wall moving or something getting deleted.
| | 03:53 | Most likely it hasn't, but it's always
good whenever you get a warning message
| | 03:57 | just to verify that nothing bad has occurred.
| | 03:59 | We'll take a look at it from
underneath, from the sides.
| | 04:03 | All-in-all it looks like
it's turned out really well.
| | 04:06 | If you want to be able to make these
kind of modifications so that your wall
| | 04:10 | can follow the underneath of a roof, always
remember if the wall material doesn't go
| | 04:17 | all the way over to this edge or if you want
to create some sort of odd custom shape
| | 04:21 | with the wall, you can always use the
Edit Profile tool in order to be able to
| | 04:25 | draw the perimeter of the wall
and the wall will automatically
| | 04:29 | take on the form that you've drawn.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Kitchen, Bathrooms, and UtilityPlacing cabinets and kitchen appliances| 00:00 | Now, we need to start placing
cabinetry into our house.
| | 00:03 | When we're doing this, we're also going
to take the time to place our appliances in.
| | 00:07 | Now the reason why we're doing
cabinetry and appliances at the same time
| | 00:11 | is it's a little bit easier during this
drawing process to do it that way,
| | 00:15 | that way we know what our spacing should be,
so we know the width of a refrigerator,
| | 00:19 | the width of an oven, that kind of information.
| | 00:22 | So we're going to come up here on the
list and come up to our Components and
| | 00:27 | then try to find our first cabinet.
| | 00:30 | Now over here on the Type Selector
List, up towards the top, we can see that
| | 00:34 | there's Base Cabinet-Single Door & Drawer.
| | 00:37 | We'll go ahead and select on that.
| | 00:38 | There's only a 24-incher in there, that
happens to be the only size cabinet of
| | 00:43 | this type that we're going to placing in.
| | 00:45 | Now I'm going to move this up toward the top
here, and it just kind of snaps into place,
| | 00:49 | and it'll even sort of
snap up against the wall.
| | 00:52 | It almost feels like putting legos together;
it kind of reminds you of that when you're
| | 00:56 | actually going through
the process of placing them.
| | 00:59 | Place the second 24-inch cabinet
right next to the first one here.
| | 01:04 | Now, right here's going to be the
area where we're going to have our sink.
| | 01:08 | So in order to do that, our
sink is going to be bigger
| | 01:10 | than the 24-inch cabinet
is going to be able to hold.
| | 01:14 | So as a result of that, we
need to have a bigger cabinet.
| | 01:17 | So let's take a look on the list, and try
to see if we can find a bigger cabinet here.
| | 01:22 | It's going to ultimately hold this
sink which is 42 inches.
| | 01:27 | Here we go; we have a Vanity Cabinet
designed for a sink,
| | 01:31 | and we'll go ahead and pick the 48 one,
because, well that's going to be
| | 01:34 | plenty big enough to be able
to hold that kitchen sink.
| | 01:38 | Now just like the previous cabinets,
this kind of snaps right into place
| | 01:42 | and we just click and there you go!
| | 01:44 | Next to the sink, always a great place
for it, is going to be the dishwasher.
| | 01:49 | So we'll have to come up to Component,
| | 01:51 | make sure that we can find a
Dishwasher as one of our available choices.
| | 01:55 | Here we have one that's 24" x 24" x 34".
We'll go ahead and place that into our project.
| | 02:01 | Whenever you have a Dishwasher, you can
usually see the outline of the door
| | 02:05 | that opens up with a dishwasher.
| | 02:07 | You can start to see that down there
toward the bottom of the dishwasher.
| | 02:10 | That's how I know where the front of it is.
| | 02:13 | Now just go ahead, and install that in.
| | 02:17 | Next, there's going to be another
24-inch cabinet right here,
| | 02:22 | so I'm going to select on that and
just quickly move it into place.
| | 02:29 | Now I need to add some cabinetry down here
as well as our Range and our Refrigerator.
| | 02:34 | So I'm going to come up on the list
and try to find a refrigerator first,
| | 02:38 | and just put a refrigerator there in the corner.
| | 02:41 | Now this is always alphabetical, so
just come down to look for your Rs,
| | 02:46 | here we have Refrigerator.
| | 02:47 | I'm going to zoom in here and now one
of the problems with refrigerators is
| | 02:53 | it's sometimes really hard to be able to see
where it needs to be inserted in at.
| | 02:57 | In this case, I don't really have any visual
clues at this moment where it should be placed.
| | 03:02 | In other words, I don't know where the
refrigerator door is, if we look at this in 3D.
| | 03:07 | So I'm just going to have to place it close
| | 03:09 | and then kind of figure it out
from there if it's in the right spot.
| | 03:12 | So I'm just going to move it in here,
place it roughly right about here,
| | 03:18 | and for just a brief moment there I've
got a glimpse of something which told me
| | 03:20 | which direction it needed to go into.
| | 03:23 | If I highlight over this, and
click on it, I can see this line;
| | 03:27 | usually if you see this line, particularly
if it's related to an appliance,
| | 03:31 | it usually means this is the air gap
between the wall and the appliance itself.
| | 03:35 | Because this is the distance between
the wall and the appliance that tells me
| | 03:39 | the wall should be down here, and this
must be the front of the refrigerator.
| | 03:44 | Because it's already been placed,
I need to use the Rotate Command
| | 03:47 | in order to rotate this on around.
| | 03:49 | So I'm going to click once and
just start to rotate it on around.
| | 03:54 | I'm going to try to
just rotate it 180 degrees.
| | 03:57 | One of the odd things here is,
you see it's trying to snap to
| | 04:02 | 179 degrees, and I'm not really
sure why it's trying to do that.
| | 04:05 | It must be finding something
that it's trying to snap to.
| | 04:08 | But as soon as you see those temporary
dimensions, you can always type in the
| | 04:11 | degrees to get it exactly right, in this
case, it rotated exactly a half a turnaround.
| | 04:17 | Now I'm going to use my Nudge command which
you might remember as being the arrows on
| | 04:22 | the keyboard, to push this into place; just
kind of nudge it up to the appropriate location.
| | 04:27 | It's wherever that line is, that's
where the wall should be located at.
| | 04:31 | I'm going to try to put the refrigerator as
close to the wall as possible, but maybe just
| | 04:36 | leave a tiny bit of a gap there just in case
we need it for being able to open the door.
| | 04:41 | Now that I've got the refrigerator
in place, I need to put another
| | 04:45 | one of those 24 inch cabinets in, in this location.
| | 04:47 | So I'm going to come up here to the
Components, I'm going to find my cabinetry.
| | 04:52 | I'm going to start to drop them in.
| | 04:56 | Now I can spin these around, and in
this case, I was going to need to because
| | 05:00 | they were originally inserted in like
this and wherever my cursor is at,
| | 05:04 | that's always the back of the cabinet.
| | 05:06 | But if you hit the Spacebar, you can
see it will spin the cabinet around.
| | 05:09 | Even with things like refrigerators, these
cabinets will snap right next to them,
| | 05:14 | that will allow you to start to
put these things right in place.
| | 05:18 | Now I can see that this one needs to be
moved down just a little bit.
| | 05:21 | I clicked on this line
instead of down by the wall,
| | 05:25 | so I'm just going to use the
Move command to move it down.
| | 05:26 | Now we're going to have to
put a range in here somewhere.
| | 05:29 | So I'm just going to put a range right there.
| | 05:32 | Components, try to find a range; there is Range.
| | 05:39 | Use the Spacebar to flip it around,
and have it put into position.
| | 05:44 | I'm going to do two more cabinets, and just
use your Spacebar if you need to flip them,
| | 05:52 | which you probably will, and
then place them next to each other.
| | 05:56 | Now I still have two more cabinets to go;
one is going to go in the bathroom area here.
| | 06:02 | So I'm going to select on Component.
| | 06:06 | This one's going to be a
little bit bigger than the 24.
| | 06:07 | I'd like to put maybe a 36 incher in there.
| | 06:10 | So we're going to look on here, see if
we can find one that's 36. Here we go.
| | 06:14 | It's already rotated properly, and
finally, down in the basement area,
| | 06:23 | we have the same condition now
like one down here in this corner.
| | 06:26 | So once again, come up to Component.
| | 06:29 | There you have your Vanity, hit the
Spacebar to rotate it around,
| | 06:36 | and put it in the proper location.
| | 06:39 | So just by coming underneath Component, and
then moving your cabinetry into the space,
| | 06:43 | hitting the Spacebar to rotate it around,
you'll find that your cabinetry snaps into
| | 06:47 | place and at the proper elevations and heights.
| | 06:51 | One other thing, I also could have put
some of the upper cabinets in as well,
| | 06:55 | but in this design, I've chosen not to, but
if you're going to put upper cabinetry in,
| | 06:59 | it's the exact same process.
| | 07:02 | Pick it off of the list, find the wall,
it already knows its height, click,
| | 07:07 | and the upper cabinetry will go in as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing countertops| 00:00 | Now we need to place the Countertops in,
in our kitchen and in our bathrooms.
| | 00:05 | In order to accomplish that, we need
to zoom in first at the kitchen area
| | 00:09 | and then underneath the option for
Components, go ahead and select on Component,
| | 00:13 | we're going to find Counter Tops, and there
are a couple of different ones that we can use.
| | 00:18 | One's going to be Solid Countertop and
the other one's going to have a hole in it.
| | 00:21 | The one that we want here first is
going to be the one with the hole in it.
| | 00:26 | Now the reason is that we're going to have
our kitchen sink in this location right here
| | 00:30 | and we need to have that space set aside
for it, so that we can actually install it
| | 00:34 | in without having a solid countertop
going through the top of our sink.
| | 00:39 | So go ahead and select on the 24-inch depth
here, Vanity Counter Top with Square Sink Hole.
| | 00:46 | Move it over here.
| | 00:48 | Now one of the odd properties about countertops
is they tend to like to move with the hole,
| | 00:52 | not so much with the ends but with the hole.
| | 00:55 | So what I mean is that if I happen to make
an adjustment to the size of the hole that
| | 00:58 | the sink is going to be going into,
then the rest of the countertop
| | 01:02 | will kind of move along with it.
| | 01:03 | So I'm going to go ahead and click
once on over the place that there,
| | 01:07 | I'm going to zoom back, and now
I'm just going to pull this out
| | 01:12 | and I'm going to pull this
back in this direction.
| | 01:17 | Now that my countertop is in the right location,
the next thing that I'm going to do is,
| | 01:21 | I'm going to zoom back and I'm going to place
a countertop here, as well as here, and here.
| | 01:27 | So come back up on the
list, find your components.
| | 01:31 | Next, we're going to find that Solid
Counter Top that I mentioned earlier.
| | 01:34 | Here we have Counter Top 24-inch Depth;
you can see there's no hole in it.
| | 01:39 | So go ahead and select on that.
| | 01:41 | Using the Spacebar just flip it around,
just like we do with the cabinets,
| | 01:45 | and then place it in the appropriate location.
| | 01:48 | Now obviously, I don't want it to
go in over the top of my range here.
| | 01:51 | So I'm going to select back on and just pull
it until it happens to be the right length.
| | 01:57 | Now if I select on this, click on Copy,
and then move this over to here,
| | 02:03 | I can copy it from location to location.
| | 02:05 | Now I shouldn't really put two
of these next to each other,
| | 02:08 | like this one and then copy it over to here,
| | 02:13 | when all you have to do is just stretch
the existing one over and actually have
| | 02:15 | it be constructed very similar to how you
would install any countertops in real life.
| | 02:21 | Now I need to install a couple more countertops.
| | 02:23 | One's going to be here in the bathroom
| | 02:25 | and the other one's going to
be in the bathroom down below.
| | 02:29 | Come back up to Components, select on
Counter Top, but make sure that it's not
| | 02:34 | this Counter Top because this one
doesn't have the sink hole in it.
| | 02:37 | So we need to come down here until we find
| | 02:39 | the Counter Top with the
Sink Hole and select on that.
| | 02:43 | I'm going to move this into place.
| | 02:47 | Always remembering that these
countertops aren't exactly forgiving,
| | 02:50 | so I always like to put that hole for
the sink right there in the middle,
| | 02:54 | and then kind of adjust it after
the fact, after I have that hole
| | 02:58 | in roughly the right location,
because if you move that hole,
| | 03:01 | there's a good chance that the rest of
the countertop will move along with it.
| | 03:05 | Now I'm going to go down to the Basement
area and place our last countertop.
| | 03:09 | It's going to come down in this location.
| | 03:13 | I'm going to hit the Spacebar to flip it
around, find the spot where I want the
| | 03:17 | sink to be in, and just let
the countertop down there.
| | 03:21 | Click, drag it over, click, drag it
over, and now we have our countertops
| | 03:28 | associated with those cabinets,
in both the kitchen and the bathrooms.
| | 03:34 | One other thing that you should
always check before leaving,
| | 03:37 | and that is to come back up the first floor
and let's take a look at our kitchen
| | 03:41 | to make sure that the countertops
are in the right locations.
| | 03:44 | I know in the Bathrooms they are, but we
want to verify that they are in the kitchen.
| | 03:48 | We're going to look up here underneath
View here and we're going to place a
| | 03:53 | camera inside of our kitchen to look out
here to see how our kitchen is developing.
| | 03:59 | So underneath 3D view there's
an option here for Camera.
| | 04:01 | I'm going to stand in front of the
window here, I'm going to click once
| | 04:06 | indicating that's where I'm standing with
my camera, and then anything that's inside
| | 04:10 | of this cone that's developing here, that's
what's going to show up in our camera picture.
| | 04:15 | So I'm just going to click somewhere
out here in the Great Room area.
| | 04:17 | It's kind of hard to tell but it looks
like something is going on over here.
| | 04:23 | I'm going to pull on these little
circles that show up here on the sides
| | 04:26 | in order to be able to see a little bit more.
| | 04:28 | Now we're looking straight down our kitchen.
| | 04:31 | This countertop looks like it's in a
good location but it looks like these are
| | 04:34 | coming in just a little bit high.
| | 04:36 | So we should adjust those and I'm going
to come in here and try an Elevation setting
| | 04:40 | of just -4 inches, because it looks like
they're kind of floating maybe 4 inches above
| | 04:44 | where they're supposed to be at.
| | 04:46 | Come in here; just verify that.
| | 04:48 | They were coming in and just sort of
wind up with the top of this range,
| | 04:51 | which isn't where we wanted them to be at.
| | 04:53 | But now we've got them dropped back down.
| | 04:55 | They are sitting on top of our cabinets
and that's the reason why we came back up,
| | 05:00 | just to verify that their locations
were right when you had other stuff
| | 05:03 | that could've affected the
locations of those countertops.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing plumbing fixtures| 00:01 | Now that we've added our counters in,
it's going to be time to come in and
| | 00:03 | start adding in our sinks,
our toilets, and our bathtubs.
| | 00:08 | So I'm going to zoom in first here on
the Kitchen and right in this area where
| | 00:14 | we're seeing this, that's where I'm
going to need to put my kitchen sink at.
| | 00:17 | So, I'm going to come up
here, select on Component,
| | 00:21 | and we're going to look for a kitchen sink.
| | 00:23 | So we'll see what we can find.
| | 00:26 | There is a Sink Kitchen-Double,
that will work for us.
| | 00:30 | I'm just going to move this over, and
place it right here in this location.
| | 00:34 | I'm going to select on the countertop
and make sure that this hole here is
| | 00:39 | covering the appropriate area, so that
the kitchen sink doesn't have any sort of
| | 00:44 | hard surface going over the top of it.
| | 00:47 | This is important, should we do any
renderings or see this in any kind of 3D View,
| | 00:52 | that the sink is in its proper location and
doesn't have countertop going over the top of it.
| | 00:58 | Now I'm going to start to come down
here and place the sink in this area.
| | 01:03 | Obviously, it doesn't need to be as
big as our current kitchen sink was,
| | 01:06 | but it does need to be a decent size
sink, this Sink Vanity-Square will work.
| | 01:10 | I'll move it over, try to get it
centered here in the space,
| | 01:17 | click and I'll just make sure that
it is sitting there in the hole,
| | 01:21 | and that is close enough
for what I care about there.
| | 01:25 | So now I'm going to step back a little bit,
make sure that I have that information in,
| | 01:30 | and next, I'm going to place the toilet in
this location, and the bathtub in this location.
| | 01:37 | If I select on Component, I'm going to start
by looking for my bathtub; it's just right here.
| | 01:43 | You can see it's a 3Dimensional Bathtub, so if
we would ever put a camera view or any other
| | 01:48 | thing like that inside of our bathroom, we'd
be able to see this bathtub in 3Dimensions.
| | 01:52 | I'm going to go ahead and select right here.
| | 01:55 | You can see that the bathtub is able
to sort of fit right into that space.
| | 02:01 | One thing to note, is always keep an eye if
the bathtub has a floor drain listed or not,
| | 02:05 | because if there's a drain listed here,
then that means that more than likely
| | 02:09 | that's where the plumbing is going
to come out, which also means that,
| | 02:12 | that's probably where your plumbing
wall is going to need to be at.
| | 02:15 | In this case, this is where the plumbing is
going to come out and then any shower or
| | 02:20 | any sort of head that comes out here, will
then be able to just drain right into the bathtub.
| | 02:25 | Now, we need to do the same thing here where
we're going to end up placing in a toilet.
| | 02:30 | So I'm going to come up here, select on
Component, and try to find a toilet on the list.
| | 02:34 | Here we have the Toilet-Domestic-3D, and I'm
just going to place it right about this area.
| | 02:44 | Now, we need to place the same kind of
fixtures down in the Basement down below.
| | 02:48 | We will need a sink, a tub, and a toilet.
| | 02:56 | So Components, it's already defaulting
to the last thing that I placed.
| | 03:02 | So in this case, we're
going to place a Toilet in.
| | 03:05 | Remember, you can always hit the
Spacebar just like we did with our cabinets
| | 03:08 | in order to spin this thing around.
| | 03:10 | Let's place this up pretty close
to the wall, and then just click.
| | 03:14 | Now, this is freestanding, so it doesn't
necessarily have to be directly against the wall.
| | 03:20 | Now I'm going to come
back up here to Component.
| | 03:23 | I'm going to find a bathtub. Here
we go. It's listed as being a Tub.
| | 03:30 | And interestingly enough, you might see this
little circle with a line going through it,
| | 03:36 | and we had this before with the
tub up there on the first floor.
| | 03:39 | The other place where you've probably
have seen this is when we were starting
| | 03:43 | to place our doors and windows in.
| | 03:45 | This particular tub is apparently a wall-
hosted family, which means there has to
| | 03:49 | be a wall for this bathtub to go up against.
| | 03:52 | In this case, it's looking
for a wall here at the side.
| | 03:55 | So I'm going to go ahead and place this bathtub
in after just clicking on the wall here,
| | 03:59 | and you can see the bathtub
snap itself into place.
| | 04:03 | And finally, we need to place the sink.
| | 04:05 | So I'm going to click there
and start to look for sinks.
| | 04:09 | Here we have a 3Dimensional
Sink that will work just fine.
| | 04:13 | I'm going to hit the Spacebar to get it
to the right location, move around here,
| | 04:19 | try to get it lined up with that hole if
I can, so I won't have to reconfigure that hole.
| | 04:24 | That looks good to me, and those blue
lines are kind of indicating that yes,
| | 04:28 | that is the spot where it likes to sit in.
| | 04:30 | So go ahead and click once
you get that location in.
| | 04:33 | After being able to do that, always
remember, if you want to be able to place
| | 04:37 | these sorts of components, just come up
underneath the Home tab, select on Components,
| | 04:42 | and find the appropriate bathroom
fixture to place in your design.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating the utility room| 00:00 | Now we're going to place typical items
you might find in a typical utility room
| | 00:04 | in just about any house.
| | 00:06 | These could be items such as a water
heater, a washing machine or dryer,
| | 00:11 | your furnace, your electrical
panel, maybe even a floor drain
| | 00:15 | so that in case you get water on
the floor it has some place to go.
| | 00:18 | So let's take a look at that.
| | 00:21 | I'm going to zoom in here at the
Utility Room, down in the Basement level.
| | 00:26 | Now everything that I just mentioned happens
to be considered a component family,
| | 00:29 | much like the fixtures that we
placed in the bathrooms earlier on.
| | 00:34 | So I'm going to come back up
here and select on Component.
| | 00:38 | The first thing I'm going to be looking
for is going to be a water heater.
| | 00:42 | Water heater, of course, starting with W and
everything on here would be in alphabetical.
| | 00:46 | We can find Water Heater down toward the bottom.
| | 00:48 | I'm going to select on Water Heater.
| | 00:52 | I can see it's going to be associated with
the Basement level and it's going to be
| | 00:55 | Offset 0 feet 0 inches, which means
it's going to be sitting on the floor,
| | 00:59 | and in this case, that's going to be just fine.
| | 01:01 | I'm going to place my Water Heater
right about in this location.
| | 01:05 | It gives us easy access.
| | 01:08 | It also is going to allow us, up on
the upper level, where we have that space
| | 01:13 | between where our bathroom is at and
where our pantry is at, for the plumbing
| | 01:17 | from the water heater to kind of start to
go on up and help feed the bathroom up above.
| | 01:23 | Also, whenever you're dealing with
certain kinds of water heaters, such as
| | 01:27 | a gas water heater, you might end up needing
to be able to ventilate it out and that
| | 01:31 | space would be good for doing that as well.
| | 01:34 | Same thing that goes with a furnace, you always
need to have some ventilation with a furnace,
| | 01:38 | and since right above in this area, I'll go
ahead and show it here on the First Floor plan.
| | 01:44 | We have this space right here.
| | 01:45 | It's going to be a really nice, easy access
if we place the furnace in that area,
| | 01:50 | which is going to be essentially
right underneath this area right here,
| | 01:54 | to be able to vent it up and out through the roof.
| | 01:56 | So I'm going to come in here to the Basement
area and I'm going to find a Component
| | 02:01 | that's going to be in case our furnace.
| | 02:05 | Here I have the Furnace.
| | 02:06 | If it asks do you want to load a tag,
just say no to that, and we're going to
| | 02:10 | place the furnace in really
close to the water heater.
| | 02:13 | There's still enough area to be able to
access that furnace, should it need to
| | 02:17 | have a filter changed or
anything along those lines.
| | 02:20 | So that's going to be a
good location at the moment.
| | 02:22 | Next, I'm going to place a
washing machine and a dryer.
| | 02:26 | They're practically the same things as far as Revit
is concerned and the placement's almost identical.
| | 02:31 | So I'm going to try to find Washer first.
| | 02:37 | You can hit the Spacebar in
order to rotate it around if need be.
| | 02:40 | I'm going to place it close to the
wall in approximately this location.
| | 02:44 | Next I'm going to try to find a dryer.
| | 02:46 | So I'm going to come back up here to Component
and look for the Ds on our list. There's a Dryer.
| | 02:54 | I'm going to spin it around so
it's back is towards the wall
| | 02:59 | and there are still a couple
more things I'd like to place.
| | 03:01 | One's going to be the Electrical panel.
| | 03:03 | It's one of those easy things to overlook,
whenever you're first trying to design a home.
| | 03:07 | A lot of people don't think about where's
the electric going come into the building at.
| | 03:11 | Actually that's sometimes a nice question to
ask even before we start your house design -
| | 03:16 | where's the electric going to come in -
| | 03:17 | so you can design an area for that
electrical panel to hang at.
| | 03:21 | In this case, though we're going to say that
it's coming in on this side somewhere,
| | 03:25 | and we're just going to look
for the Electrical Panel.
| | 03:27 | We'll select on Power Panel here.
| | 03:30 | Say No if it asks you for the tag, and then
just find a spot for that electrical panel.
| | 03:35 | I'm just going to place it
right about here on the wall.
| | 03:39 | Next thing we're going to need to add
on to this is going to be floor drain.
| | 03:42 | So I'm going to come up here, underneath
Components, and look for my Floor Drain.
| | 03:47 | Now everything that we've designed up till
this point has all been 3Dimensional items,
| | 03:53 | but I do want to point this out.
| | 03:55 | Not everything has to be 3Dimensional
in Revit, even in a Revit model.
| | 03:59 | In this case, this is a 2Dimensional floor drain.
| | 04:02 | Oddly enough, if we were to do a rendering,
we'd actually still see it sitting on the floor.
| | 04:06 | It would just look like
some 2Dimensional line work.
| | 04:09 | Now since it's completely in the concrete,
there's no reason to actually model it out in 3D.
| | 04:14 | It's just going to look like hole
there on the ground, and as it is,
| | 04:18 | it's just going to look like a hole here on our plan.
| | 04:20 | So as a result of that, there's no
reason to put anything that's a nice,
| | 04:24 | big 3D model, if you're not going to see it.
| | 04:26 | But in the case of a Floor Drain,
we just select it, drop it in,
| | 04:30 | and it'll give us the right representation,
and when it comes time to build the house,
| | 04:34 | they'll know where all the water needs to drain at.
| | 04:36 | Also, when we're discussing floor drains
or the washing machines or the dryers,
| | 04:41 | you always have to think about where's it either
going to vent out at or where's the plumbing
| | 04:46 | going to come out when you're going through this
process of building your home or designing your home.
| | 04:52 | Because of that, some other things
you should start thinking about are,
| | 04:56 | maybe we need to have such things as spigots
that would be on the outside of the house,
| | 05:01 | so that you can attach your garden hose to it.
| | 05:03 | Maybe we need to think about where is
our air-conditioning unit going to be at.
| | 05:07 | We're not to place them in this model,
but they are items to think about,
| | 05:11 | but they place in just like the heater, the
water heater, and the washer and dryer did.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Ceilings and LightsPlacing a normal ceiling| 00:00 | Now we've reached the point where we need to
start placing our ceilings into our Floor Plan.
| | 00:05 | Whenever you're going to be doing this,
always make sure that you don't do it
| | 00:08 | actually in your Floor Plan View.
| | 00:11 | In this case, I happen to be
in First Floor > Floor Plans.
| | 00:14 | But if I started to place the ceiling in
right now, I wouldn't be able to see it.
| | 00:19 | The reason is, is that we're
looking down at our Floor Plan,
| | 00:22 | not up at our ceiling, and our ceiling plan.
| | 00:25 | So we can find underneath the Project
Browser over here, the words Ceiling Plans.
| | 00:31 | We have a few different options.
| | 00:33 | For this particular plan, we will
be using the First Floor plan.
| | 00:38 | I will want to add this though:
| | 00:39 | If you've been following along from the start
and you've finally made it down to this exercise,
| | 00:44 | you might have several more
ceiling plans currently available.
| | 00:48 | The reason is, is whenever
you first drew in your levels,
| | 00:52 | it automatically created
those ceiling plans by default.
| | 00:55 | As a result of that, you probably have
quite a few more plans than what I do.
| | 00:59 | That's not necessarily a bad thing,
but you probably don't need them either.
| | 01:03 | I will point out that if you
ever highlight on one of these,
| | 01:07 | right-click and don't actually do
this with your Basement Ceiling Plan,
| | 01:11 | but if you have some extra views, you don't
want them, just right-click on their name,
| | 01:16 | come up to Delete and they'll go away.
| | 01:19 | That being said, they're
not hurting anything either.
| | 01:22 | So if you just want to leave them, that's okay.
| | 01:24 | Right now, I'm inside of
my First Floor, Ceiling Plan,
| | 01:27 | and we're going to start dropping
in some ceilings into the space.
| | 01:31 | Come on up to the Home tab here,
I'm going to select on Ceilings.
| | 01:35 | There's an option here and the ceiling I want
to choose is this GWB, which is a Gypsum Wallboard.
| | 01:42 | Now the level is currently set at First
Floor, and 8 foot off of the first floor.
| | 01:49 | And that is the height that I
want to place our ceilings in here.
| | 01:52 | You'll notice that this check box called
Automatic Ceiling is available to us.
| | 01:57 | Now as long as it's highlighted, it
means it will automatically try to
| | 02:01 | put a ceiling in any place
where these red boxes show up.
| | 02:06 | In the case of our house, we do in
fact want to have 8 foot ceilings
| | 02:10 | and everything that's showing up
is red currently on the screen.
| | 02:14 | So I'm going to go ahead
and click inside of this area.
| | 02:16 | We can't see that it has placed a ceiling,
but I can say that it has the wallboard ceilings.
| | 02:23 | They don't have a pattern associated with them,
| | 02:26 | so we're not seeing any little dashes or
little marks indicating the ceiling pattern.
| | 02:31 | But it is there as long as
you clicked inside of the space.
| | 02:35 | Try not to click multiple times
inside of the same space
| | 02:38 | or else you'll be placing a ceiling
on top of a ceiling, on top of a ceiling,
| | 02:42 | and that's something I think we've
all done at one point or another.
| | 02:45 | The next thing I'm going to do is come in
here and click inside of this bathroom area,
| | 02:51 | inside of the pantry area.
| | 02:54 | I'm going to click here which is a closet area.
| | 02:58 | But two areas that I'm not going to click
inside of is going to be this room here,
| | 03:02 | which is a bedroom, and the reason is,
is we will eventually be doing a more
| | 03:05 | complex ceiling inside of this space.
| | 03:09 | I'm not going to click
inside of this area either.
| | 03:12 | This is the area that's going to
have our pipes, our mechanical,
| | 03:16 | the duct work for the HVAC coming up.
| | 03:18 | And as a result of that, there's no
reason to have ceiling in that space.
| | 03:22 | It's an unfinished area.
| | 03:24 | Now let's go down to the basement
and add some ceiling down there.
| | 03:28 | You'll notice that I didn't go
to the Basement Ceiling Plan.
| | 03:31 | In reality, I really use that level as
much for the ability to place a ceiling on
| | 03:37 | as to actually place a ceiling in.
| | 03:40 | You really want to place it
in your Basement Ceiling Plan.
| | 03:44 | So in Basement, once again come up here,
and we're going to select on Ceiling.
| | 03:50 | This kind of ceiling is going to be just fine.
| | 03:53 | The one thing that I would change though,
and you'll remember I said we did this
| | 03:56 | just for the level as much as
anything else, go ahead and change this
| | 04:00 | so that it says Basement Ceiling, and let's
assign a Height Offset of just 0 to that.
| | 04:07 | Now that I've done that, I can come in
here, and you can see that I'm getting
| | 04:10 | some highlights down in here as well.
| | 04:14 | This means that it can place it on
this level down here in the Basement.
| | 04:19 | So where do I want these ceilings go in?
| | 04:20 | Well, I'd like to have a ceiling
right here in this location.
| | 04:24 | So I'll go ahead and place it inside
of this bedroom, inside of the closet.
| | 04:29 | Here it's just saying it wasn't able
to see it and part of the reason is,
| | 04:32 | is when we clicked inside of here, is
that it's telling us, wait a second,
| | 04:36 | this is going to be placed in the Basement level.
| | 04:39 | There is an issue here, because
every time we're going to click,
| | 04:42 | for whatever reason, it's going to try to
reset itself to the current level that it's at.
| | 04:47 | So what I'm going to do, since
we just clicked the ceiling here
| | 04:50 | and we now have one that's actually
a ceiling sitting on the floor,
| | 04:53 | I'm going to click on the Undo
button which is right up here.
| | 04:57 | In fact, you'll notice there's another
little triangle right next to it,
| | 05:00 | and if you click on that, you can
see each of the different ceilings
| | 05:04 | or each of the past commands that you just did.
| | 05:07 | But in this case, I only want to
undo one which is that last ceiling,
| | 05:11 | so I'm just going to click the Undo button once.
| | 05:13 | Now we no longer have a ceiling
on the floor, it's now gone,
| | 05:16 | but the one ceiling which we
placed there is still there.
| | 05:20 | So we just need to keep making sure that
this continues to say Basement Ceiling.
| | 05:26 | Then we're going to come over
here, click inside of here.
| | 05:29 | You can see how it reset itself.
| | 05:32 | We'll just keep telling it, you want to
place it at the Basement Ceiling level,
| | 05:35 | and you can see how these lines just
ended up going away, so we know in fact
| | 05:40 | we do have a ceiling that
just got placed in that area.
| | 05:43 | I'm going to do this one more time.
| | 05:46 | I'm going to place the ceiling
inside of the bathroom here.
| | 05:49 | That's been placed in there.
| | 05:51 | Now, I don't really have an interest
in placing a ceiling in this area;
| | 05:54 | this is the storage area, it can remain
largely unfinished up above.
| | 05:57 | The same thing here with our utility room
area; it can remain largely unfinished.
| | 06:02 | The only reason I might place a ceiling in here
may be to put insulation up in there, so that
| | 06:06 | we can have some sort of noise dampener for
going up there to whatever happens to be up above
| | 06:12 | in this case, a bedroom, but that said,
we'll just leave it off for right now.
| | 06:16 | So coming up here to Ceiling and just
selecting inside of any spaces that have
| | 06:20 | walls associated with them, the ceilings should
be able to automatically expand themselves out,
| | 06:27 | find the appropriate walls, and automatically
place those ceilings in for you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adjusting the ceiling for stairs| 00:00 | When we created our basement ceiling,
we ended up creating a special condition
| | 00:04 | that we still need to address, and this
can probably be best seen if we zoom in here,
| | 00:09 | and kind of look down at this from this view.
| | 00:13 | And what we're looking at here is that
this part right here is the floor
| | 00:17 | and the structure for that floor up above.
| | 00:19 | What we're looking at here is the ceiling.
| | 00:23 | Now there is an issue and the issue is that
we have a pretty big gap between the floor
| | 00:27 | and the ceiling right now, and that's going
to need to get filled with some sort of object.
| | 00:32 | In this case, we're going to use a Revit wall
object to fill this space between here and here.
| | 00:39 | So let's begin. Down here in our Ceiling Plans,
there's an option here for a Basement Ceiling.
| | 00:45 | Go ahead and double-click on that.
| | 00:48 | This is going to take us into our Basement
Ceiling plan and if I zoom in on this portion,
| | 00:53 | we can see where the staircase is coming up,
we can see the outline for the ceiling,
| | 00:58 | but the thing is that we're still going
to need to put in some walls in there
| | 01:01 | in order to be able to make up that difference.
| | 01:03 | So when someone is walking down those stairs,
they can't look over or look straight ahead
| | 01:08 | and look right on through into
this kind of dirty, dusty space
| | 01:12 | with light fixtures coming down from
it and it just won't look very good.
| | 01:16 | So we're going to try to close that up.
| | 01:18 | We need to start off by
drawing some walls up here.
| | 01:21 | So I'm going to come up here to the Wall command.
| | 01:24 | Go ahead and pick off of this
list the Interior Wall 4 inches.
| | 01:29 | In reality, this could be built
in a variety of different ways,
| | 01:33 | but I'm just going to go to standard 4-inch
thick wall in this particular instance.
| | 01:37 | Next, we need to be able to adjust the heights
at which this wall is going to be sitting at.
| | 01:44 | In this case, we're going to
look at the Base Constraints.
| | 01:47 | Now the Base Constraint of being a Basement
Ceiling is going to be just fine.
| | 01:52 | For a Base Offset, we're going to
need to adjust this and in this case,
| | 01:55 | we're going to adjust this to be 5/8 of an inch.
| | 01:58 | That happens to be the thickness of the
ceiling up above, and it's going to be
| | 02:03 | essentially sitting right over the top
of that ceiling or maybe better yet,
| | 02:07 | a better description would be that ceiling
is going to be hanging directly off of it.
| | 02:12 | So next, we're going to come down to Top
Constraint to make sure that that's okay.
| | 02:15 | We want to make sure that that goes up to the
first floor and set a Top Offset of -11 1/4 inch.
| | 02:22 | If it isn't already set to that, go
ahead and type in -11 1/4 inches,
| | 02:30 | and we should be set to
start drawing those walls in.
| | 02:33 | Once that's done, come over here and
pick the intersection of these two lines;
| | 02:38 | this one here and this one here,
that's where your ceiling is stopping.
| | 02:42 | So click once and come down in this direction.
| | 02:47 | Click where these points intersect,
come over in this direction.
| | 02:52 | Now don't worry that you're not seeing the walls.
| | 02:54 | They are getting drawn; they're just getting
drawn on the other side of the ceiling object.
| | 02:59 | And then come straight on up and click right
up here, and then go ahead and escape on out.
| | 03:05 | In case you're wondering, are they really there?
| | 03:08 | All you have to do is move your
cursor over the top of this,
| | 03:11 | click on the ceiling, and then you can see
those walls coming through the ceiling.
| | 03:16 | I'll also point out; one of the advantages
of having the ceiling in here is
| | 03:21 | it's also hiding your beam structure
that's supporting the floor up above.
| | 03:27 | By doing this and placing these walls in,
it makes it a lot nicer because you can
| | 03:31 | start to clean up some of these areas
where you'll be able to see into the guts
| | 03:35 | of the building that usually
aren't all that pretty.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a coffered ceiling| 00:00 | Now that we have our ceilings
in other spots in the building,
| | 00:03 | we now need to put one inside of our master
bedroom area, also known as bedroom number one.
| | 00:09 | Now the reason why I left this one to
the side is because I wanted to put
| | 00:12 | a more complex ceiling into the space,
something that looks a little bit nicer,
| | 00:17 | and a ceiling that you would
usually find in a bedroom like this.
| | 00:21 | In this case, it's going
to be a coffered ceiling.
| | 00:23 | In order to draw it in, make sure that you're
not in your First Floor > Floor Plan View,
| | 00:29 | but you're inside of your
First Floor > Ceiling Plan View.
| | 00:32 | So it's going to be the reflected
ceiling plan of your first floor.
| | 00:36 | Zoom in on that bedroom area and it's
this box right here right off of the porch.
| | 00:42 | Now we're going to place
a coffered ceiling in,
| | 00:44 | and what a coffered ceiling does is
that it looks like a rectangular shape,
| | 00:48 | going around the perimeter of your room with
a higher part of the ceiling there in the center.
| | 00:54 | So around this perimeter, we're going
to have about an 8-foot tall ceiling.
| | 01:00 | Up in the center there's going
to be a 9-foot tall ceiling.
| | 01:03 | And in order to be able to make up
that difference between the two ceilings,
| | 01:07 | whether it would be a gap, you'd be able to
look in between the ceilings to see any
| | 01:11 | of your ceiling structure up there,
we need to also put in some walls
| | 01:15 | in order to be able to hide that difference,
and that'll be our soffit pieces for up there.
| | 01:21 | I'm going to come up to my Home tab,
and make sure that I click on Ceiling.
| | 01:25 | We'll place in to this area an 8-foot
tall ceiling off of the first floor.
| | 01:32 | We'll just use the Automatic Ceiling for right
now and we'll come back and edit it later.
| | 01:37 | Move inside of this space and
click to place this ceiling.
| | 01:41 | We can already tell what's placed in there.
| | 01:43 | Probably, the easiest way to be able to
tell that we've placed the ceiling in there
| | 01:46 | is the fact that there's no more lines
that were right here in this area before.
| | 01:51 | They're getting blocked out by that
ceiling structure that we just dropped in.
| | 01:55 | Next we need to make a
modification of the ceiling.
| | 01:58 | One thing you need to be very careful with
is if you're still inside the Ceiling command,
| | 02:03 | you don't click inside of here again.
| | 02:05 | Click inside of here one or two or three
more times trying to select on the ceiling,
| | 02:10 | you'll just be dropping a ceiling after
a ceiling, after a ceiling in again.
| | 02:14 | I think it's happened to just about everyone
who has used Revit at one point or another
| | 02:18 | and you don't want to be
that person on this exercise.
| | 02:22 | So go ahead and hit Esc a few times
on your keyboard to make sure
| | 02:25 | that you're out of the command entirely.
| | 02:27 | Move your mouse up until you're
touching that wall or any of these walls,
| | 02:34 | and then hit the Tab key on your keyboard.
| | 02:37 | Now when I say hit the Tab key, what
it really refers to is click on it,
| | 02:42 | like you're going to place a space in
between different words in a sentence.
| | 02:47 | So click, click, click.
| | 02:49 | Eventually, you'll get a box
that shows up around your room.
| | 02:53 | That box is going to be the ceiling component.
| | 02:55 | You can see this if you look down in
the lower left-hand side of Revit.
| | 03:00 | It'll say Ceilings: Compound Ceiling: GWB
and you know you've got it at that point.
| | 03:06 | But be very careful on this,
because if you move your mouse,
| | 03:10 | you'll just suddenly lose it.
| | 03:11 | So you need to left-click in
order to select that ceiling
| | 03:15 | and now we can make modifications to it.
| | 03:18 | Come up to Edit Boundary.
| | 03:21 | Next, we need to add another
boundary on the inside of this.
| | 03:25 | Why? Because this is going to make
this part the 8-foot ceiling;
| | 03:30 | anything on the inside of
this will just be a big opening,
| | 03:34 | a hole that we'll be able to fill, we
get another ceiling, the 9-foot ceiling.
| | 03:39 | Come up here on the ribbon
and go to Pick Lines.
| | 03:43 | Next, set an Offset distance,
in this case, 2 feet.
| | 03:48 | Now pick those lines that are currently
going around the perimeter of your building,
| | 03:52 | or the perimeter of your room in this case,
then click, and click, and click.
| | 03:58 | Once you have four lines, come up here,
and click on the Trim/Extend Corner tool.
| | 04:05 | Now, just click and click, click and click,
| | 04:08 | and just keep clicking each of the
lines that you want to be able to keep.
| | 04:14 | Once you have two boxes, one on
the inside, one on the outside,
| | 04:19 | you have the kind of ceiling
that you're looking to have.
| | 04:22 | Everything in between these lines is
going to get filled in with ceiling.
| | 04:26 | Anything on the outside or on the
inside is just going to be open air.
| | 04:31 | So go ahead and click on the big Plus sign up
here in order to finish our perimeter ceiling.
| | 04:38 | Now, we need to add another
ceiling there in the middle.
| | 04:41 | In order to be able to do that, we need
to once again activate the Ceiling tool,
| | 04:46 | instead of 8-foot First Floor, we
need to make this 9-foot First Floor.
| | 04:51 | So this ceiling is going to
come in at the 9-foot level.
| | 04:54 | We also need to sketch the ceiling in.
| | 04:56 | So go ahead and click on Sketch, click
on the little Rectangle tool up here,
| | 05:01 | because it's going to be faster for
us, and just draw a rectangular shape
| | 05:05 | that mirrors that rectangle
we've drawn already.
| | 05:08 | Now click on the big plus sign right here.
| | 05:11 | Now we have one ceiling here,
right now it's highlighted in blue,
| | 05:15 | that's at the 9 foot mark, and
then one out here is at the 8 foot mark.
| | 05:19 | Now we need to draw in our walls that are
going to be in between these two ceilings,
| | 05:24 | so that you can't see in between
them at all your ceiling structure,
| | 05:28 | or your roof structure up above.
| | 05:30 | Come up here to your walls.
| | 05:32 | We need to select Interior Wall 4-inch.
| | 05:34 | The location of Finish Face
is going to be just fine.
| | 05:37 | The Base Constraint of First Floor is
correct as well, 8 feet 0 and a half;
| | 05:43 | that's going to be a wall that's 8 foot off
the ground, plus the thickness of the ceiling,
| | 05:48 | and that is right, and then we
need to set an Unconnected Height,
| | 05:52 | and in this case the Unconnected
Height is going to be 11.5.
| | 05:56 | And that's just going to be the height that
the one ceiling is above the other one,
| | 06:00 | minus the thickness of the lower ceiling.
| | 06:03 | This is going to be 11.5 inches.
| | 06:05 | You can click on Apply to that, and now
let's go ahead and start drawing those in.
| | 06:11 | I'm going to click here, move down.
| | 06:15 | You can see those walls, or at
least the highlight of those walls,
| | 06:18 | as I'm placing it and
clicking from point-to-point.
| | 06:21 | I'm going to eventually escape out once
I have those walls in all four corners.
| | 06:26 | And you can see those as I just move my
mouse around, they'll just start to highlight,
| | 06:31 | or if you click on the perimeter
of that ceiling, and by hitting Tab,
| | 06:35 | you can just select on it, you can then see
through that ceiling to see those walls up above.
| | 06:42 | So by using your ceilings and your wall tools,
| | 06:47 | you can create some really dynamic
and good looking ceiling designs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing ceiling lights| 00:00 | Now that we have our ceilings in place,
we need to start thinking about what
| | 00:03 | kind of light fixtures might hang on them.
| | 00:06 | In this example we'll be working primarily
with two different kinds of light fixtures.
| | 00:11 | Both of them are going to
be mounted to our ceilings.
| | 00:14 | Now it's always important to remember,
if you're going to be dealing with a
| | 00:16 | ceiling-mounted light fixture that you do
in fact, need to have a ceiling in place.
| | 00:21 | If you don't have a ceiling in place,
the ceiling-mounted light fixture
| | 00:25 | won't have anything to hold on to.
| | 00:27 | If you've been working through these videos,
you'll know that when you try to place
| | 00:30 | doors and windows into walls, it gave us
a little circle with a line through it
| | 00:34 | saying that you can't place it.
| | 00:36 | Well, you can run into the same
errors if you're trying to place
| | 00:40 | a ceiling light fixture into a space that
doesn't currently have a ceiling in it.
| | 00:44 | So you always need to be
careful of those sorts of things.
| | 00:47 | In this case, we happen to have ceiling
showing up here and those ceilings aren't
| | 00:52 | going to show inside of a First Floor
> Floor Plan but those ceilings are
| | 00:57 | in our First Floor > Ceiling Plan.
| | 01:00 | So let's go ahead and start to place
those lights in here in our kitchen area.
| | 01:05 | I'm going to come up here to the Components
and underneath Components we'll find all
| | 01:10 | of our different kinds of light fixtures,
including the Downlight - Recessed Can,
| | 01:15 | and this is the one that I
want to be able to place.
| | 01:18 | So go ahead and select on that. You will
notice that there are a variety of other
| | 01:22 | sizes, but we just want this
8-inch one for right now.
| | 01:26 | I'm going to come in here and we're
going to place the first can light
| | 01:31 | inside of the kitchen area.
| | 01:32 | I'm going to place it roughly right here;
| | 01:34 | it doesn't have to be in this exact location,
but as long as it's in this general area,
| | 01:38 | we should be just fine.
| | 01:39 | I really like to use the copy command
after the first one has been placed.
| | 01:45 | So that's what I'm going to do.
| | 01:46 | Select on that light fixture,
come up to Copy, pick a base point,
| | 01:52 | and now we're going to copy this
over 3 foot 6 inches to our left.
| | 01:57 | So 3 foot 6, and we're going to
keep doing this; 3 foot 6, 3 foot 6.
| | 02:05 | Now that we have all of these in
place, we can window around them,
| | 02:09 | select the Copy command, pick a base
point and come straight down 4 feet.
| | 02:17 | We now have eight lights
inside of our kitchen area.
| | 02:21 | I'd like these to be centered
just a little bit better,
| | 02:23 | so I'm going to move my mouse
to the outside of my building,
| | 02:27 | click and hold my mouse button
down and window around these objects.
| | 02:31 | Next I'm going to use the Nudge command,
which are the arrow keys on your keyboard,
| | 02:35 | in order to be able to just nudge these up
so they're better centered inside of the room.
| | 02:41 | Eight lights should be enough to
light up this space fairly effectively.
| | 02:44 | Actually, I have this same arrangement in my
own kitchen and it lights it up really nice.
| | 02:48 | And I think that this should
work out just fine for us.
| | 02:51 | We'll be able to really test that theory
a little bit later on when we decide to
| | 02:56 | do the renderings of the inside of our space,
including looking into our kitchen area.
| | 03:02 | The next thing we're going to do is
place some lights inside of our bathroom.
| | 03:08 | I'm going to select on these
lights, hit the Copy command,
| | 03:11 | and just copy these straight
on down into our bathroom area.
| | 03:15 | You can center these up any way that you
wish by circling around them and using the
| | 03:20 | Nudge keys which are the arrow keys on your
keyboard just like we did with these up above.
| | 03:25 | Next I'm going to select on another light and
I'm just going to put this one in the pantry area.
| | 03:29 | So I'm going to use the Copy command,
I'm going to select on it,
| | 03:34 | and just use the Nudge feature to just kind of
nudge it over until it's roughly in the middle.
| | 03:39 | After this, I think we need to
put in some pendant lighting.
| | 03:43 | I think there will be a pendant
light here in the dining room area
| | 03:46 | as well as a pendant light
in our master bedroom area.
| | 03:51 | Come up to Components and let's
start to look for our pendant lighting.
| | 03:56 | Here we have our Pendant Lighting - Hemisphere.
| | 03:59 | The first one I'd like to place though is
this 2-foot 3-inch length pendant light.
| | 04:05 | It's going to be hanging down
over most likely a dining room table.
| | 04:08 | So do your best to try to
get it centered in there;
| | 04:10 | it doesn't have to be exact,
but at least pretty close.
| | 04:13 | And these temporary dimensions that
will show up will give you some idea
| | 04:16 | that you're at least close with that.
| | 04:17 | If you feel like adjusting it after the
fact you can, but for this example,
| | 04:21 | I'm just going to try to get it in
there and about where it needs to be.
| | 04:26 | Now I'm going to place another
one right here in the center,
| | 04:28 | roughly where we're seeing this X showing up.
| | 04:31 | Now this X is a room symbol.
| | 04:34 | If you ever highlight over it or click on it,
you'll be able to see this crossing pattern here.
| | 04:40 | In this case, rooms almost always try to
put their center directly in the middle
| | 04:44 | of the space that they're filling up.
| | 04:47 | This is almost X marks the spot for us
as far as where this fixture needs to go.
| | 04:51 | We're going to come up to Home and
we're going to pick on the Component tab.
| | 04:57 | Once again, we're going to place one
of these Pendant Light fixtures in.
| | 05:00 | It's not going to be the 2 foot by 3 inch,
but it's going to be the other one.
| | 05:04 | And it's a little bit longer, it's
going to hang down, but that's going to
| | 05:07 | work really well inside of this
space with the coffered ceiling.
| | 05:10 | I'm going to kind of eyeball
to get close inside of there.
| | 05:14 | I will point out that if I select on
this, we can still see the properties
| | 05:18 | of that fixture over here.
| | 05:20 | It is trying to attach itself to the ceiling.
| | 05:23 | Next thing that we want to do is we
want to make an adjustment to it,
| | 05:27 | so that it's maybe right
in the center of the room.
| | 05:29 | So I'm just going to move my cursor around
until I see this X coming through here,
| | 05:33 | and actually that light fixture
is really, really close.
| | 05:36 | I just need to move it over just a touch.
| | 05:39 | So I'm going to select on the light
fixture and then use those little arrows
| | 05:43 | on my keyboard again to just kind of move it
over and you can see that it's almost right on.
| | 05:49 | Now I'll just click it one more time to
get it there right in the center my room,
| | 05:53 | or close enough to the center of
my room that I can be happy with it.
| | 05:56 | Now that I've done that, I'm going to go into
the lower level and add some lights down there.
| | 06:01 | So I'm going to go into my Basement
Ceiling Plan and zoom in on this area.
| | 06:09 | Every place else I'm just going to assume
we're going to be installing some other
| | 06:12 | types of lights, and this area is
going to be the only place that we're
| | 06:16 | going to be installing in can
lighting, recessed into the ceiling.
| | 06:21 | So I'm going to be using Components one
more time, going to be coming back up here
| | 06:26 | to select on the Recessed Can: 8-inch.
| | 06:30 | Next I'm going to place this light
right in this general area right here.
| | 06:36 | Next I'm going to select on it and
use the Copy command to be able to
| | 06:40 | make multiple of these lights
throughout the space.
| | 06:43 | I'm going to click and move over 4 feet
in this direction, another 4 feet,
| | 06:50 | another 4 feet, and just one more to make
sure this space gets lit up really well.
| | 06:58 | Now that I have that spacing in place,
I'm going to window around them
| | 07:02 | and I'm going to use the Copy command,
going to pick a base point,
| | 07:06 | it doesn't necessarily have to be on the lights,
but I do like to always put it close to
| | 07:10 | the objects I'm getting ready to copy, and
I'm going to come straight down 2 feet 6 inches.
| | 07:16 | And we're going to do this two
more times; 2 foot 6, 2 foot 6.
| | 07:23 | Now between the big bank of windows
out here in the front
| | 07:27 | and all these individual light fixtures down
here, this should be a very well lit space.
| | 07:32 | Now that we've gotten through all this and
have placed all of these light fixtures in,
| | 07:35 | I think you can see how easy it is
to come in, place light fixtures.
| | 07:41 | All you need to do is have
a ceiling to attach them to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Creating 3D ViewsCreating an exterior camera| 00:00 | Our next step is to place cameras around
the perimeter of our structure so we can
| | 00:04 | better visualize what we've done so far.
| | 00:07 | Currently, you can see that I'm inside
of my Basement view and what I'm going
| | 00:11 | to do is I'm going to place a camera
and have it shoot toward the building.
| | 00:14 | This is much like if you're really out
on the site and just taking a picture of
| | 00:17 | your building after it's been constructed.
| | 00:20 | To begin with, we're going to need to zoom
out until we have a spot way out here in
| | 00:24 | the distance that we can be standing with our
camera to take the picture in this direction.
| | 00:30 | Next, we need to get our camera.
| | 00:32 | So underneath the View tab up here, hidden
under the words 3D View, is the word Camera.
| | 00:39 | Go ahead and select on that.
| | 00:42 | You can see a little picture of a
camera wherever your cursor is moving to.
| | 00:45 | Now if you move it up here, you'll start to see
that it kind of vanishes into the background.
| | 00:50 | The reason for that is that there's something
called a crop region that's blocking it out.
| | 00:55 | In order to be able to see the
camera, when we place it out here,
| | 00:58 | we need to come down here and pick on this little
tool right here that says Do Not Crop View.
| | 01:03 | It's right next to the circular shape of the X.
| | 01:06 | Go ahead and click on that.
| | 01:07 | Once you do you'll start to see a
few other objects start to appear.
| | 01:11 | These are called our elevation tags.
| | 01:14 | These allow us to see the left, right,
front, and back sides of our building.
| | 01:19 | Now if I come out here and just place the
camera somewhere in this area, and you can
[00:01:24.55
place the camera by just clicking once and
now move this big cone out in this direction.
| | 01:30 | Anything that's inside of this cone,
that's what you're going to see in the view.
| | 01:34 | If I only moved my cone out to here, I'd
only see just a tiny little corner of the
| | 01:38 | building as well as maybe just
a tiny little piece of the deck.
| | 01:41 | So make sure that you come out here so that
your entire building is encased in this cone.
| | 01:45 | Whenever you're out here, go ahead and click.
| | 01:50 | You can see how it's taken a
rear elevation view of our home.
| | 01:52 | Now if we want to be able to see a little
bit more, as I can see right now that it's
| | 01:56 | cut off just a tiny bit of my
porch, go ahead and come up here,
| | 02:00 | click on the dots, and just pull these until
the view is the way you'd like to see it.
| | 02:05 | Now let's do one from the front of our house.
| | 02:09 | Now in order to do this, we really
should come up to our First Floor.
| | 02:13 | The reason is, is that the grade, the ground,
is going to be sloping up and if we did it
| | 02:18 | from the Basement view, we might be underground
when we're taking this picture with our camera.
| | 02:22 | So let's go ahead and go to the
First Floor in order to set this.
| | 02:25 | Now I'm going to zoom out.
| | 02:28 | Let's go ahead and come down here to Do Not
Crop view and go ahead and click on that
| | 02:31 | so that we can now place the camera here without
it vanishing, just like it did down below.
| | 02:37 | 3D View > Camera, go to right at the front
of your house, standing like if you're
| | 02:43 | going to be standing across the street
from it, click once, and make sure that
| | 02:47 | your house is totally inside of
that cone and then click once it is.
| | 02:52 | Here we have a nice front
elevation view of our house.
| | 02:56 | You can always move these little circles, in
order to frame your house the way you like it.
| | 03:01 | Now the reason why you would do this, even if
there's nothing on either side of your house,
| | 03:05 | is because when it comes time
to do things such as renderings,
| | 03:09 | it's going render anything
that's inside of this box.
| | 03:13 | Also, I will point this out.
| | 03:14 | Down here at the bottom of your screen,
there are a couple of different options.
| | 03:18 | One is Render, but two right here,
and this is the more important one
| | 03:22 | at the moment is called Shadows.
| | 03:23 | If you select on Shadows being On, you can see
how the shadows are cast down onto your building.
| | 03:29 | Also, we have this gray box right here.
| | 03:32 | If you pick on that gray box,
which is the visual styles box,
| | 03:35 | you will see that this is
an option here called Shaded.
| | 03:37 | If you select on Shaded, you will
get a series of colors for this.
| | 03:42 | Some of your other options will include
Consistent Colors, which as you can see
| | 03:46 | we get slight difference in our
coloring with that, as well as Realistic.
| | 03:50 | Now Realistic isn't really realistic,
but it will give you a better idea of what
| | 03:55 | it might look like when it's rendered.
| | 03:57 | It really will look like a realistic view.
| | 04:00 | Now one thing I always state is that
you don't want to leave your Shadows On.
| | 04:04 | Nothing slows Revit down
more than casting shadows.
| | 04:08 | The reason is that it actually figures out
where each ray of light is coming down
| | 04:11 | and hitting the building.
| | 04:13 | As a result of that, it has to look:
Is this ray of light being blocked?
| | 04:17 | Is this ray of light being blocked? And it
has to do that essentially thousands of times
| | 04:21 | which really will slow things down.
| | 04:23 | Come back down here and turn your
shadows off, if you really don't need them.
| | 04:28 | Also, I'm just going to turn
this view back to a Shaded view.
| | 04:31 | Now let's place one more camera and
this is going to be looking at our building
| | 04:36 | from a little bit down the street.
| | 04:38 | So once again here in the First Floor
View, come back up 3D View > Camera
| | 04:45 | and then place the camera somewhere in this
direction, kind of to the side and back,
| | 04:50 | almost like you're almost
across the street from it.
| | 04:54 | Go in this direction and just click.
| | 04:56 | This is going to be a good view for
us a little bit later on,
| | 05:00 | once we start placing our planting
materials around our building.
| | 05:03 | It's going to allow us to see trees in
the background, bushes here in the front,
| | 05:07 | and it's going to give us a really nice
perspective as if we're going to be driving
| | 05:11 | down the street and looking at our building.
| | 05:14 | Now that we have those camera views in place,
it's always a good practice to rename this,
| | 05:18 | so you can always come back and find
them later without too much issue.
| | 05:22 | So let's go ahead and do that.
| | 05:24 | Underneath the Project Browser here, we can pan
down here and we can see we have some 3D views.
| | 05:30 | One is this interior kitchen one, which
happens to be the camera that we placed
| | 05:34 | a little bit earlier on in the project
when we were looking at our kitchen cabinets.
| | 05:37 | There is 3D.
| | 05:39 | 3D here is the view that every time we
click on this little 3D house up here
| | 05:44 | in order to be able to spin the building
around, this is a view that it's taken us to.
| | 05:48 | 3D View 1, 3D View 2, and 3D View 3 are the
three cameras that we just placed in this exercise.
| | 05:55 | So let's go ahead and rename
them so we can keep track of them.
| | 05:58 | Now the one that we're currently in
always shows up as being dark,
| | 06:02 | because I know that this one is dark
and this is a view that we're currently in,
| | 06:06 | I know that this is the view that
we're currently looking at.
| | 06:09 | In order to be able to rename this, just go ahead
and right-click on that, and come up to Rename.
| | 06:15 | After selecting on Rename, let's give this
the name of Exterior - Street View of Home.
| | 06:26 | Once you get there, just come in here and click
on OK, so that we know what the next one is,
| | 06:33 | even though I'm sure it's going
to be the front elevation,
| | 06:36 | let's just go ahead and double-
click on it just to be sure.
| | 06:39 |
So 3D View 2 here we have the front
elevation of our house which is also going
| | 06:45 | to be called the South Elevation.
| | 06:47 | So make this be the Exterior - South Elevation.
| | 06:51 | So select on the View name, right-click,
Rename, and Exterior - South Elevation,
| | 06:59 | and click on OK. One more time;
| | 07:08 | 3D View, we know this is
the back of the building.
| | 07:10 | Just so you can see it, if you double-click
on it you can see it brings up that view,
| | 07:14 | right-click on it, rename, and this
is going to be Exterior - North Elevation.
| | 07:21 | So Exterior, and to keep it consistent,
I'm going to add that dash, North Elevation.
| | 07:31 | The more cameras, the more views you create,
the more you're going to want to go over
| | 07:34 | there and rename them, because
if you have 47 different views
| | 07:39 | and they all have View 1, View 2, View 3.
By the time you've placed that 32nd one,
| | 07:45 | you're not going to be able
to tell one from the other.
| | 07:49 | So a great practice is to rename them
shortly after you've created them
| | 07:52 | so you can all keep them straight in your head.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an interior camera| 00:00 | Cameras can be used to visualize
the interior of a space, and
| | 00:03 | that's what we'd like to do in this case.
| | 00:05 | Let's go ahead and take a look at what it
would be like to stand inside of a great room
| | 00:09 | and to visualize our dining room, our kitchen
area, and even part of the great room,
| | 00:14 | and what it would be like to
really be standing in this space.
| | 00:18 | In order to do that, first make sure
you go to your First Floor view,
| | 00:22 | come up here to View, because we're
going to be viewing all this space and
| | 00:26 | come underneath 3D View and pick a Camera.
| | 00:29 | Now we're going to be standing here
with a camera and essentially taking
| | 00:32 | a snapshot from that location
where we're standing at.
| | 00:36 | Because of that, we need to move the
camera to where we'll be standing
| | 00:40 | if we actually wanted to take a
picture of the inside of our house.
| | 00:44 | In this case, I'm going to be standing
right about here in the great room.
| | 00:47 | The reason why I'm choosing this spot
is if I was right here, I really wouldn't
| | 00:50 | be able to see the dining room.
| | 00:51 | If I was standing right here,
I'd have a big wall in my way.
| | 00:55 | So by standing way back here, we can
encompass it all inside of a single shot.
| | 01:00 | Come down here and click once you're
in the spot you want to be standing in.
| | 01:04 | Once you're there, point the camera in the
direction you want to be able to take the shot.
| | 01:09 | In this case, anything that's inside of the cone
is what you'll to be able to take a picture of.
| | 01:14 | It's much like looking inside of
the viewfinder, the rangefinder there
| | 01:18 | inside your camera and looking in a
direction; anything you can see in that,
| | 01:22 | that's what's it's going
to be taken in the picture.
| | 01:24 | That's exactly what's happening
here with this cone that's opening up
| | 01:28 | where we're looking at the
dining room and the kitchen.
| | 01:31 | One other thing of note, the reason
why I'm taking this to the outside
| | 01:35 | of the building is so we can pick up
anything that might be along the exterior.
| | 01:40 | At some point, we might
have some trees out here;
| | 01:42 | we definitely have a deck on the
other side of our glass doors,
| | 01:47 | and we'll be able see all
that because the camera
| | 01:51 | is pointing out far enough to be
able to take a nice picture of it.
| | 01:53 | So once you get a cone that looks
about like this, go ahead and click.
| | 01:58 | You can see how it's automatically generated
an interior shot of our space for us.
| | 02:02 | If you don't quite like the way things are
centered, or you'd like to move things
| | 02:05 | around a little, just click
on these little blue dots,
| | 02:08 | hold your Mouse button
down and just adjust them.
| | 02:11 | If you want to be able to
see a little bit less floor
| | 02:14 | or a little bit more floor, you can do that.
| | 02:17 | You want to be able to see some of the
railings over here? You can do that as well.
| | 02:21 | One disclaimer though that I want to add to
that is that the more you stretch this out,
| | 02:25 | the more distorted it's going
to get toward the edges,
| | 02:28 | because you can only in real life see
so far around before the cone of sight
| | 02:32 | just doesn't allow you to see anymore, and
once it gets beyond this point, particularly
| | 02:37 | if you're drawing a perspective view, things
will start to get distorted and stretched.
| | 02:40 | So if you start to see that, stand
farther back with your camera or just start
| | 02:44 | to pull this in, so you don't see any
kinds of distortion around the perimeter.
| | 02:49 | Going through this process is a great
way to visualize what you've been doing.
| | 02:54 | Before we get too far, there is
one other thing that we should do
| | 02:56 | and that is we should rename
the view that we just created,
| | 02:59 | where it says 3D Views here on the
side and right now it says 3D View 1.
| | 03:04 | So that we don't forget this is what
this camera is taking a picture of,
| | 03:08 | Select on the words 3D View 1, right-click
and come up here on the menu to Rename.
| | 03:14 | Now we're going to be calling this Interior-
Kitchen and Dining, and click on OK to that.
| | 03:28 | Now if we have a need to come back
to that view all you have to do is
| | 03:30 | double-click on it and we will
automatically see this view again.
| | 03:33 | Just as an example, earlier on, we
created some Exterior views and you can see
| | 03:37 | if I double-click on it, it will
automatically take us back to that view.
| | 03:41 | If we come back to our kitchen view,
we will be back to that kitchen.
| | 03:45 | One final thing that I wanted to show is if
we come down here to the bottom of the screen,
| | 03:49 | there is this option here called Visual
Styles, and right now it's set at Hidden Line.
| | 03:53 | If you change this to Shaded or if you change
it to Realistic, you will start to get an
| | 03:59 | idea of some of the different material
properties that we have inside of our space.
| | 04:03 | Also, we can start to see
the windows that we placed,
| | 04:07 | the light fixtures that we placed,
the walls, kitchen cabinets, all these items,
| | 04:13 | and begin the feel the reason why we put
all this little detail in our building.
| | 04:17 | It isn't just to build it, but to
be able to visualize our design.
| | 04:21 | The reason why we put our sink here at
that exact spot in the countertop,
| | 04:25 | where there was a hole in the countertop,
because otherwise, we wouldn't be able
| | 04:29 | to see this white on the
inside of the kitchen sink.
| | 04:32 | It just would have been a
countertop going through it.
| | 04:35 | As a result of this, and all the detail
and level of detail that we placed into
| | 04:39 | our design, we can now by placing
cameras, be able to step back and best
| | 04:44 | visualize everything that we've accomplished.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. Creating 2D ViewsCreating section views| 00:00 | Building Sections and Wall Sections are
used the show the relationships between
| | 00:04 | materials and structural
components in our building,
| | 00:07 | as well as the relationships between the
different spaces inside of our building.
| | 00:12 | Now in order to be able to create a
Building Section, we need to come up
| | 00:15 | to our View tab on the ribbon.
| | 00:18 | Next, there's been this big icon
right next to 3D View called Section,
| | 00:22 | and that's what we need to select on.
| | 00:24 | So once you pick on Section, we're going
to click once over here in this location
| | 00:30 | and then another time over here in this
location in our First Floor plan view.
| | 00:36 | Move over here, click once,
come over, and click again.
| | 00:42 | This truly is creating a Section through our
building, so when we take a look at this view,
| | 00:47 | we'll be able to see the different layers
and materials that have been installed
| | 00:51 | in the building and have a better idea
about how the building is constructed.
| | 00:56 | One thing to know first before we move on,
whenever you see this blue dashed line
| | 01:01 | showing up the way that you see it here, it's
kind of like a box going around our building.
| | 01:06 | Anything that's inside of this blue dashed
line will show up inside of our Building Section.
| | 01:12 | If it's not inside of this blue dashed
line, we won't be able to see it.
| | 01:16 | In other words, if I wanted to be able
to see this back wall in our Section,
| | 01:21 | or if I wanted to be able to see these windows
in our Building Section, it would need to be
| | 01:25 | between these dashed lines, and if they're not
between them, you won't be able to see them.
| | 01:32 | If I click on these double arrows
here and pull it back like that,
| | 01:37 | we'd still be able to see this wall because
it's still inside of these dashed lines.
| | 01:42 | On the other hand, we would not be able
to see these windows right here because
| | 01:46 | they are not currently
inside of those dashed lines.
| | 01:50 | That being said, in this Building Section,
I do want to be able to see everything.
| | 01:54 | So just click on these arrows and pull
them down, and if for some reason,
| | 01:59 | you can't see everything whenever we go
to your Section, it's more than likely
| | 02:02 | because it's not inside of this dashed box.
| | 02:06 | If you do go there and find, I can't see
something, just come back to this view,
| | 02:11 | click back on this line,
this part of the Section,
| | 02:13 | and you'll automatically see those dashed
lines again and you can adjust them
| | 02:17 | and then you should be able to see pretty
much anything you want in the Section.
| | 02:21 | Now to get to the Section, there's actually a
few different ways you can go about doing it.
| | 02:25 | The first way is, is that you can zoom
in here and you can double-click here on
| | 02:31 | what's considered the Section head.
| | 02:33 | The second thing that you can do
is just select on this Section line,
| | 02:40 | right-click, and then go to View.
| | 02:43 | I find usually selecting on the
Section line and then right-click
| | 02:46 | and then go in the View is
usually a lot easier for beginners.
| | 02:49 | So go ahead and try that first.
| | 02:51 | Now that you've done that, we can now
see a Section going through our building.
| | 02:56 | We can start to see the different layers
and materials currently inside of the building.
| | 03:01 | You can see that we have our light
fixture hanging on the ceiling.
| | 03:04 | We can see those windows in the
background, the ones I was pointing out
| | 03:08 | that you wouldn't have been able to see
if they weren't inside of the box because
| | 03:11 | we pulled that box back out, those windows
are showing up inside of this Building Section.
| | 03:16 | We can see the relationships
of the walls in here.
| | 03:20 | If we zoom in, we can start
to see what's going on.
| | 03:23 | Now if you have some dark spots like this,
| | 03:26 | it's probably because of the
Detail Level on where that's set at.
| | 03:29 | So if you come down here to the Detail
Level right next to your Section
| | 03:32 | and click on that box, change
that to a fine level of detail
| | 03:36 | and you'll see a much better level of detail
| | 03:39 | as far as how your materials and the
relationships are and how they're going together.
| | 03:44 | One other thing that's kind of
blocking our view right now
| | 03:46 | is the fact that we have our thick lines on.
| | 03:49 | If you come up here to the View, turn on Thin
Lines and that'll give yet another layer material.
| | 03:56 | I find usually anything much less
than a half an inch in thickness,
| | 03:59 | kind of gets blocked whenever your normal
heavy lines are existing inside of a Section.
| | 04:04 | Now, this is the level of detail
that you'll find inside of Revit.
| | 04:09 | We can see that we don't have anything up here
that's actually tying in our roof to our walls.
| | 04:15 | There should be some boards
up here that are going to be here.
| | 04:18 | Those will be actually drawn in either in this
Section or in an enlarged Building Section,
| | 04:24 | which we'll be talking about at a later time.
| | 04:26 | If I zoom back out again, we can see
how our flooring materials are,
| | 04:31 | how they're sitting on top of our walls.
| | 04:34 | We can start to see our
ceilings and everything else.
| | 04:37 | To make a long story short, a full
Building Section is great for being able
| | 04:41 | to see those material relationships
and how everything comes together.
| | 04:45 | One other thing, let's go ahead and drop
in one other Section so we can see it.
| | 04:49 | Once again, up here on the First Floor,
and you could just double-click on
| | 04:53 | First Floor in order to be able to do this.
| | 04:55 | Let's put another Section in and we're
going to drop that Building Section in
| | 05:00 | right here in this location.
| | 05:02 | So come up to View and Section, select on that,
click once here.
| | 05:10 | I will point out that there are
options here for Building Section
| | 05:13 | as well as what's called a Detail View,
| | 05:16 | and depending on how you want to
organize things, here in your project browser,
| | 05:21 | you'll either choose Building Section
or Detail View and we'll show you that
| | 05:25 | here in just a moment.
| | 05:26 | So leave it at Building Section for
right now; once it's highlighted,
| | 05:30 | either double-click here on the Section head or
right-click and come up here to go to View.
| | 05:36 | Here we have a Building Section.
| | 05:38 | Now if you wanted to have this to be a full
wall section with a higher level of detail,
| | 05:43 | you just come down here at the Detail Level,
change it to be a Fine level of detail.
| | 05:48 | Next, you come down here to the
scale and change this to be a more
| | 05:52 | appropriate scale for a full wall section;
maybe it would be 3/4" = 1'.
| | 05:56 | You will see as soon as you did that,
that all of your text sizes change automatically.
| | 06:02 | An 8th inch piece of text is always
an 8th inch piece of text in Revit.
| | 06:05 | A 3/32" piece of text is always
3/32" plotted out size in Revit,
| | 06:11 | and it'll adjust as soon as you change the scale.
| | 06:14 | And if you zoom in here, you can see
that we now have a finer level of detail
| | 06:19 | in here that we can start to apply our drafting
patterns and that sort of thing inside here.
| | 06:25 | One last thing that I want to
mention. I mentioned drafting patterns.
| | 06:30 | Not everything in here is going to be detailed
and probably at an even higher resolution or
| | 06:35 | at a bigger level of detail
will add in more detail than this,
| | 06:38 | but I do want to point out that if
you come up here to the Annotate tab,
| | 06:41 | you have a variety of different tools that you
can use to help do your architectural drawings.
| | 06:47 | One of those tools is this
tool here called Insulation.
| | 06:50 | By selecting on that and then changing the
width of it to be something more appropriate
| | 06:54 | for the interior of a 2 x 4 wall,
in this case, let's say 3 1/2 inches,
| | 07:00 | you can start to draw in that level of thickness
of insulation right inside of your wall section
| | 07:06 | to wherever it is it needs to
be at; probably right up to the
| | 07:09 | top of your plate which you
would also have to draw in.
| | 07:12 | So by using these tools, you can
take a live section of your building,
| | 07:18 | a 3D dynamic building that can adjust
depending on if you want to change materials
| | 07:22 | or whatever, and draw right over the top
of it in order to better complete your
| | 07:26 | details and any sort of architectural
information you need to add to the project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an enlarged plan| 00:00 | One of the most commonly asked questions
is how do I make my bathroom area or
| | 00:04 | kitchen area or some place in my floor plan
enlarge, so that I can see those level of
| | 00:09 | details better, also so that I have
room to do things such as dimensioning,
| | 00:14 | place notes, and that kind of information.
| | 00:17 | In order to do that, you're going to
need to first zoom in on that area.
| | 00:23 | We can see how big this text called Master
Bathroom is or MBath as well as the number 6.
| | 00:30 | The reason why I abbreviated this instead
of being master bath or first-floor bath
| | 00:36 | is because I wanted something to be short,
so that master bathroom didn't start in
| | 00:41 | the middle of our bathtub
and end over here by our sink.
| | 00:45 | Also, if we're trying to dimension inside here,
| | 00:48 | we'd have to dimension from
here to here and then on over.
| | 00:51 | We'd have notes calling out the
properties of our bathtub of our toilet,
| | 00:56 | of our sink, what our different
cabinetry might be.
| | 01:00 | We might have information related
to the grab bars at the toilet,
| | 01:03 | so that you can have handicap-accessible areas.
| | 01:06 | All this stuff starts to add up and there's
not enough room in a normal-sized floor plan,
| | 01:11 | particularly in this case at a quarter of an
inch, in order be able to call all that out.
| | 01:15 | So in order to be able to do that,
we need to make an enlarged view.
| | 01:19 | Well, you can do enlarged views in
Revit by coming up and creating a new view,
| | 01:25 | and that's kind of your key.
| | 01:26 | If you're trying to find a command in Revit,
think about what you're really trying to do.
| | 01:29 | In this case, we're going to create a
new enlarged view and to do this,
| | 01:34 | we're going to come over here to a Callout.
| | 01:36 | Now a Callout is a traditional term
that's used to indicate we're calling out
| | 01:41 | something is going on in a certain area.
| | 01:44 | In this case, when we call this area
out, it'll create a new view that will
| | 01:49 | enable us to detail and dimension
at a much higher level of detail.
| | 01:53 | So we'll come in here, I'm going to
click once, I'm going to pull up like this,
| | 01:59 | and I'm going to click again.
| | 02:02 | Next, you can see how we
have this window around here.
| | 02:05 | Everything inside of this dashed line here
has now been created inside what's
| | 02:10 | called a Callout view.
| | 02:11 | In fact, we can see it over here,
it's called Callout of First Floor.
| | 02:14 | If you double-click here on the bubble,
or you select here, right-click and
| | 02:20 | Go to View or just come over here and
double-click on Callout of First Floor,
| | 02:24 | it'll take you to the view.
| | 02:27 | This is an enlarged view of that
same spot that we were looking at.
| | 02:30 | In fact, you'll notice here that this says this
is the scale of 1/2" = 1'.
| | 02:36 | The view that we were at before
was at a scale of 1/4" = 1'.
| | 02:40 | So currently it's twice as big.
| | 02:42 | I'm going to double-click here on Callout
of First Floor to get back to the view
| | 02:46 | and if I wanted to be able to change
the scale of this, so I needed this to be
| | 02:49 | even larger than what it currently is,
you can just come down here to where it
| | 02:53 | has 1/2" = 1' and then pick the
appropriate scale off of your list.
| | 02:57 | It'll automatically rescale everything.
| | 02:59 | If you've already put text, dimensions,
and notes on the inside of it,
| | 03:02 | it'll rescale those too, so that
they're all the appropriate size.
| | 03:07 | So generating Callouts is a really
good way to come in and be able to fill in
| | 03:12 | all that information into a view
that otherwise would just be too small.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating interior elevation views| 00:00 | Creating interior elevations are
essential for when it comes time
| | 00:03 | to design the interiors of our spaces.
| | 00:06 | Sometimes our users communicate
different wall finishes, other times,
| | 00:09 | such as in these examples, we'll be communicating
the layout of the kitchen and the bathroom areas.
| | 00:15 | In order to place these interior elevations, we
need to begin by zooming in on the Kitchen area.
| | 00:21 | Now, we need to come up here
to our View tab on our Ribbon
| | 00:24 | and we need to select Elevation off of the list.
| | 00:28 | Once you pick Elevation, make sure that
it says Interior Elevation over here
| | 00:32 | and now move that Interior Elevation
symbol into the Kitchen area.
| | 00:36 | Once there you'll see that the little
arrow around the top of this circle here,
| | 00:41 | if I pull it down, that
arrow will go to the bottom;
| | 00:44 | if I pull it up, it will go to the top.
| | 00:47 | What this does is it automatically
looks for the closest wall
| | 00:50 | and it will automatically point
itself toward that closest wall.
| | 00:54 | In this case I want to be able to do
an Elevation View of this side of the
| | 00:59 | kitchen as well as an Elevation
View of this side of the kitchen.
| | 01:03 | So in order to do that I'm going to
move this right to right about the middle
| | 01:05 | of the kitchen here, looking toward
the sink, and I'm going to click once.
| | 01:10 | By doing that it automatically generated
an Elevation View over here in our Views.
| | 01:15 | So if we come down here on the list,
we're going to look for Elevations
| | 01:18 | and you can see it's added an Elevations
(Interior Elevation) category now.
| | 01:23 | If we click the little plus there,
you can see it says Elevation 1 - a,
| | 01:28 | that matches up with the
naming convention over here.
| | 01:31 | It's always possible to select on this
by clicking on the head and then clicking
| | 01:35 | in here in order to be able to rename it.
| | 01:38 | Also you could rename it from over here,
so it would be a little bit more descriptive.
| | 01:43 | But in this case I'm just
going to leave it the same.
| | 01:45 | Something else to know, after clicking
on this little arrow shape here,
| | 01:49 | we can see this blue line
that goes straight across.
| | 01:53 | Now what occurs in this situation is
that usually these try to hold themselves
| | 01:59 | inside of walls, inside of the
spaces that they were placed inside of.
| | 02:03 | In this case it didn't, and the reason why
it didn't is that this is not an opening,
| | 02:08 | this is not a door. What this is, is one
wall that comes up to here and stops
| | 02:13 | and this secondary wall
starts here and comes up.
| | 02:17 | Since there's nothing there to actually
stop it, it's going out to the next thing
| | 02:20 | that would stop it, which is this
exterior wall here on the outside.
| | 02:25 | Because it's done this, it means
that if I double-click here on
| | 02:28 | on the arrow part of this Elevation tag,
| | 02:32 | it's going to take us out and we can see
how it's zoomed all the way out to the
| | 02:36 | outside edge of the building instead of staying
kind of contained inside of the Kitchen area.
| | 02:41 | Now in order to be able to correct
this situation, just move up here,
| | 02:44 | select on this box that surrounds
our Interior Elevation,
| | 02:48 | and grab onto the little circle that
exists there and just pull it straight down.
| | 02:53 | Once you get it in place, it will just
kind of lock itself in that position and
| | 02:59 | it will keep this so when it comes time to
be able to draw on top of this, place notes,
| | 03:05 | call out the different kitchen cabinet
sizes, it will just be there,
| | 03:09 | it will be right, and you won't have to
keep resizing this again and again.
| | 03:14 | Now let's go ahead and
place another one of these,
| | 03:16 | so it's looking the opposite
direction inside of the kitchen.
| | 03:20 | To do that, I'm just going to come up
here to the little x and click on Close,
| | 03:23 | it's not going to actually
delete the view; it's still over here.
| | 03:26 | The only thing this does is just closes the
view so that we're not looking at it anymore.
| | 03:31 | Now I'm going to select on the circular part.
| | 03:33 | Now these extra options won't show up
unless you click on the circular part of this.
| | 03:38 | If you click on the arrow, you'll
get a different set of options.
| | 03:41 | Now I want to look in this direction, so
check the box that's closest to the cabinets.
| | 03:47 | By doing that we automatically have
generated a new elevation over here
| | 03:51 | and you can see its name here.
| | 03:52 | If we want to take a look at that, we can
either double-click here or come over here
| | 03:56 | to our Elevations, underneath the
Project Browser, and see how it looks.
| | 04:01 | Now this one has the same condition going on,
so it's just a matter of selecting on
| | 04:05 | that little circular shape and pulling it in.
| | 04:10 | Once you get it to the spot that you'd like
to see it at, you can go ahead and leave it,
| | 04:14 | or you can come in here and use your tools
underneath the Annotate tab to add dimensions,
| | 04:19 | notes, line work, and further clarify
everything it is that we're looking at
| | 04:23 | in the inside of this Interior Elevation View.
| | 04:26 | Now let's go ahead and place one more, and that's
going to be on the inside of a Bathroom area.
| | 04:31 | In this case I'm going to zoom in here
on our Master Bathroom and place one in.
| | 04:36 | Underneath View, I'm going to come over
and I'm going to place another elevation.
| | 04:41 | Make sure it's still Interior Elevation.
| | 04:43 | Now I'm going move up in this direction,
| | 04:45 | and you can see it's once again pointing
toward whatever the closest wall is.
| | 04:49 | Where I really want is going to be in this general location,
| | 04:52 | but I want it pointing toward the sink.
| | 04:55 | And by default, every time I pull it down,
it doesn't want to be pointing toward the sink
| | 04:59 | because this is now the closest wall.
| | 05:01 | So in order to be able to accomplish that,
I'm just going to pull this down and click.
| | 05:06 | I'm going to Esc out of the command.
| | 05:07 | I'll select on the circle and
then clear this check box right here.
| | 05:12 | It's going to give us a big warning message
saying you're going to delete the view;
| | 05:15 | are you sure that that's what you want to do?
| | 05:17 | I'll just click on OK to that.
| | 05:19 | Now click this one, which is actually looking in
the direction that we want to create the view for.
| | 05:25 | Once you've done that, it automatically
will create that new Elevation View
| | 05:29 | of the interior of this space.
| | 05:31 | But there is something going
on here that we need to address.
| | 05:34 | Now by selecting on this arrow we can
see that it is now being held inside
| | 05:38 | of this Master Bathroom area, much the
same way that we originally wanted that
| | 05:42 | to be held inside of the Kitchen area up above.
| | 05:44 | But there are walls on either side here,
and not an opening like there was in
| | 05:48 | the kitchen area, so our view when we take a
look at it is going to be inside of this space.
| | 05:54 | But there is a problem and we'll be
able to see it when we double-click here
| | 05:58 | on the actual Elevation tag arrow.
| | 06:02 | Now this doesn't look much like our
bathroom, but what's really happening here
| | 06:05 | is if we select on this box, we can click on
the little circles here and we can drag it up.
| | 06:12 | Now we can start to see what
our view actually looks like.
| | 06:15 | If we needed to expand it out anymore,
you can drag out in this direction,
| | 06:19 | or whichever way that you want.
| | 06:20 | What occurred, and if this happens to you, is
that we have a really thin floor in this position.
| | 06:28 | Now, since the floor is right there and
it's only about a quarter inch in thickness,
| | 06:32 | what our view tried to do is it
tried to go ahead and create a view
| | 06:35 | between our two layers of floor.
So it tried to create a view between
| | 06:39 | our structural floor and
our finished layer of floor,
[00:06:43 .69]
which just doesn't work
out too well obviously.
| | 06:46 | So we had to pull it up because, well, our
Elevation tags aren't always all that smart.
| | 06:51 | The good news is though, this is
the correct information, and also,
| | 06:54 | now that we have our Interior Elevations
created, we can visualize what our bathrooms
| | 06:59 | and kitchens will look like,
and you can come back now or later
| | 07:02 | and add normal Revit notes and tags
to finish these Interior Elevations off.
| | 07:07 | Also once noted and dimensioned,
| | 07:09 | these elevations will be ready
to be placed on our sheets.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating exterior elevation views| 00:00 | Now that we've placed the Interior Elevations
in our house, I want to point out the fact
| | 00:04 | that we in fact already have some
Exterior Elevations available to us.
| | 00:08 | Now I know that, because if we look here
on our first floor, one of the things that
| | 00:12 | I haven't pointed out yet are these
little boxes with the arrows next to them.
| | 00:16 | These are the same kinds
of symbols that we had
| | 00:18 | when we placed our Interior Elevation
symbols here on the inside of our space.
| | 00:23 | Now, these are our Exterior Elevation
symbols and they actually work the exact same way.
| | 00:29 | When we place our Interior Elevation symbols,
we were able to do that by coming up here
| | 00:34 | to View, selecting on Elevation, and then
picking the appropriate one off of the list.
| | 00:39 | In the case of exterior, you would
pick your Exterior Elevation symbol,
| | 00:43 | in this case it happens to be called Building
Elevation, you'd click and move it over,
| | 00:49 | and any time there is a wall close to it,
it'll automatically point in that direction,
| | 00:52 | just like the interior ones did.
| | 00:55 | I'm not going to actually place this one,
because I already have one down here,
| | 00:59 | but if I wanted to I would just click
here and we would automatically see
| | 01:03 | our Exterior Elevation of our building.
| | 01:05 | That being said, I'm just going to
hit Esc to get out of that command.
| | 01:09 | The ones that we can see, as of this
moment, are going to be on the west side,
| | 01:13 | the east side, as well as the north
side of our building, but we do have an
| | 01:18 | Elevation symbol also over on the south part
of our building, we just can't currently see it.
| | 01:24 | It's currently getting cropped off
by something called a Crop Region.
| | 01:28 | In order to be able to see what that
Crop Region is and where it's located at,
| | 01:32 | we need to move down here toward the
bottom of the screen
| | 01:35 | and we have a couple of
different symbols right here.
| | 01:38 | The one that I want to click on
first is going to be Show Crop Region.
| | 01:42 | Now that's the box that's
going around this view.
| | 01:45 | Anything that's on the inside
of this box will show up;
| | 01:48 | anything on the outside of this box will not.
| | 01:51 | If you have anything that
is crossing over this box,
| | 01:55 | that might affect whether or not you
can actually see that particular symbol.
| | 02:01 | In the case of the South Elevation symbol,
if I come down here and pick the button
| | 02:05 | that was right next to it, which is
Do Not Crop View, it sort of negates
| | 02:08 | the properties of the Crop Region and
allows us to see anything that might be
| | 02:13 | outside of that Crop Region.
| | 02:16 | In this case we can see that the South
Elevation View is in fact inside of the box,
| | 02:22 | but there's something
else that's going on there.
| | 02:24 | Part of this South Elevation View though,
could be from out here in this area.
| | 02:28 | It could come over here to the right.
| | 02:32 | To make a long story short on that, and what
I'm trying to communicate is the fact that
| | 02:37 | just because this symbol shows up
doesn't really tell the whole story
| | 02:40 | of what we're really looking
at in a South Elevation View.
| | 02:44 | These symbols really are just trying to
communicate the fact that this is where
| | 02:48 | we're going to be taking the view from,
for anybody who is looking at it in a
| | 02:53 | floor plan, but that doesn't necessarily
mean that that's everything to be seen
| | 02:57 | as far as where the camera is that's pointing
toward the house and taking the actual picture.
| | 03:03 | So let's go ahead and take a look at
this and get a better idea of what each of
| | 03:07 | these Elevation Views actually look like.
| | 03:10 | If I click on the head here
of the South Elevation tag,
| | 03:15 | we can see how the house is here in space.
| | 03:19 | Something that showed up there,
which was kind of interesting,
| | 03:21 | when I double-clicked on that, was this.
| | 03:23 | Let me go ahead and close this view down.
| | 03:27 | Next, I'm going to zoom out just a
little bit so we can make sure to see it.
| | 03:31 | When I clicked on the head here,
here you can see this blue line.
| | 03:34 | That's the reason this Elevation symbol was
originally hidden is because this blue line,
| | 03:39 | even though we can't see it, it
doesn't print, was outside of the box.
| | 03:44 | Now this is a very similar kind of box
or blue line that's associated with
| | 03:48 | our Section tags which we talked about earlier.
| | 03:51 | Anything inside of the dashed line of the
Section tag would be what would show up.
| | 03:55 | Anything inside of the blue line in
this direction of the Elevation tag
| | 04:01 | is what's going to show up
inside of our Elevation View.
| | 04:04 | So let's come back to that Elevation View.
| | 04:07 | This is the front of our building.
| | 04:09 | Also, we can get to those other Elevation
Views without actually clicking on the
| | 04:14 | head of those Elevation tags.
| | 04:16 | So in order to be able to do that, we
come down here and look for Elevations.
| | 04:20 | In this case we have a North Elevation,
an East Elevation, a West Elevation,
| | 04:28 | and of course we had our South Elevation before.
| | 04:31 | Now, if we look over here, we can see
the different Levels that we created right
| | 04:35 | at the start of the project.
| | 04:37 | We can also see the different
Elevations that they're going to be at.
| | 04:40 | So we have the -4'9", the 0'0"
here for the First Floor,
| | 04:47 | where the Top Of Plate Height is at.
| | 04:50 | Now this is all critical information
for the construction of a building.
| | 04:53 | They need to know, when they're out in
the field, how high do we make these walls?
| | 04:58 | At what elevation do we pour
the basement floor slab in?
| | 05:02 | Where are the top of footings going to actually be at?
| | 05:05 | So all this information is critical
for the construction of your building.
| | 05:08 | So always make sure that you come in
and place these Elevation symbols in.
| | 05:13 | The reason is they communicate properties,
both physical properties, as far as materials,
| | 05:19 | as well as Elevations, as far as
where these elements really need to
| | 05:23 | be created inside of your building.
| | 05:25 | So it's important to remember that
these Levels and the Elevations associated
| | 05:30 | with them and the actual Elevation tags
and Elevation symbols that we've created,
| | 05:36 | all communicate different pieces of information
| | 05:39 | and are vital for the
construction of our building.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. Schedules and LegendsCreating a door schedule| 00:00 | Door Schedules are used to
communicate door sizes, types, and properties.
| | 00:05 | For this project we'll create
a rather simple Door Schedule.
| | 00:09 | To do it, we need to come up
underneath the View tab on the Ribbon.
| | 00:12 | Next, come down and select on Schedules.
| | 00:16 | The kind of schedule that you want
to do will be a schedule in quantity.
| | 00:20 | This takes the information directly
from the building model and incorporates
| | 00:24 | that information in our Sschedule.
| | 00:26 | Once you do that, come down
on the list and find Doors.
| | 00:31 | This is a list of all the different
architectural objects that we can find
| | 00:35 | inside of the building
that's possible to be scheduled.
| | 00:38 | In this case of course, we're looking for
Doors, so select on that, and click on OK.
| | 00:42 | Now we need to consider what
information we want to have on our schedule.
| | 00:49 | The purpose of a Door Schedule is to communicate
what the door is going to look like,
| | 00:54 | as well as the height
and the width of the door.
| | 00:57 | Now there's going to be other information
that might be communicated on a Door Schedule,
| | 01:01 | such as things like fire rating, perhaps
what kind of finish might be on the door,
| | 01:05 | and a variety of other information.
| | 01:07 | But for just this house we're going to keep
it simple and we're just going to have
| | 01:10 | information such as its height, its width,
and what information we should reference
| | 01:15 | as far as how this door should look.
| | 01:17 | So we're going to first start off by
picking the door number off of the list.
| | 01:21 | And the door number is always referred
to as the Mark number in a Revit Schedule.
| | 01:26 | That's the number 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 that we've
seen next to our doors on the Floor Plan Views.
| | 01:32 | So click on Add to that.
| | 01:34 | Next, we want to do the Type Mark.
| | 01:36 | Now the Type Mark actually references
completely another drawing that we will
| | 01:40 | be doing in the future, and that drawing
is going to have all the different doors
| | 01:44 | and the way that they look on it.
| | 01:47 | How it's referenced is by letters;
| | 01:49 | let's say A, B, C, or D,
or some sort of designation.
| | 01:53 | That being said, I'm going to
highlight on Type Mark and click on Add.
| | 01:57 | And those pictures that we'll be drawing are
also going to have that A, B, C, or D or D-1,
| | 02:03 | or however way that you decide to label
those, and that's going to be the Type Mark.
| | 02:09 | The next one is going to be Height.
| | 02:10 | So select on that and Add it. Width.
| | 02:16 | Now if you've added these in a different order,
I will point out that you can always highlight
| | 02:19 | it here and either use Move Up or Move Down
to bring them into the right order on the list,
| | 02:25 | so that it shows up right if we
ever come to place this onto a sheet,
| | 02:30 | so it can be referenced
during the construction process.
| | 02:33 | Now one thing I do want to do is
come over here to Sorting/Grouping.
| | 02:37 | Now Sorting/Grouping allows us
to put things in a certain order.
| | 02:40 | In this case I want to make sure that
it's sorted by the Mark number,
| | 02:44 | which means that door number 7
doesn't come ahead of door number 1.
| | 02:48 | We want all the doors to be
in order based on their number,
| | 02:51 | which is going to be 1 through
12 or 13 in this case.
| | 02:56 | So go ahead and do your Mark number here, make
sure to Itemize every instance has a check mark.
| | 03:02 | That means every door is going to show up
on the schedule and click on OK to that.
| | 03:06 | Here we have a list of
all of our different doors.
| | 03:09 | We also have their Heights, we have
their Widths, and we have that Type Mark
| | 03:14 | that I was describing that will
ultimately reference another chart
| | 03:18 | that shows what that door is going to look like.
| | 03:21 | So by creating a Door Schedule, it's
sort of a nice and easy way to be able to
| | 03:26 | communicate the properties related to a door.
| | 03:29 | Having the Mark numbers will correspond right
with those numbers we see with the doors
| | 03:32 | right in our Floor Plan Views,
and to see those little bit better,
| | 03:35 | I'm just going to go ahead and close out of the
schedule and zoom in here and we can take a look.
| | 03:40 | Here is the number 1, 2, 3, and 4,
and those are the Mark numbers.
| | 03:45 | It's a lot easier to have the door
information be associated back to a schedule
| | 03:50 | than try to fit all that information
here in this tiny little clustered area,
| | 03:55 | which is known as a Floor Plan.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Generating a door elevation legend| 00:00 | Door Legends are used to communicate
the look and type of door for those trying
| | 00:04 | to install them out in the field.
| | 00:06 | They show drawings of
how the door should look
| | 00:08 | and they're often surrounded by
a border and other information.
| | 00:11 | Let's go ahead and draw it in.
| | 00:13 | Underneath the View tab here, we
have the ability to select on Legends.
| | 00:19 | Click on the word Legend.
| | 00:21 | Now it's going to ask us what
do you want to name our Legend?
| | 00:23 | We want to call this a Door Legend.
| | 00:28 | Next change the Scale to be
1/8" = 1' and click on OK.
| | 00:33 | From here we have a blank drawing area
and the first thing we need to do is
| | 00:36 | draw in the border for our Legend.
| | 00:39 | Unfortunately, there isn't an
automatic border command in Revit,
| | 00:42 | so you just have to draw it in by hand.
| | 00:46 | Zoom out a bit, I know it's hard to
see here, but if you just use your wheel,
| | 00:49 | you can zoom out a bit, and then we're going
to start to draw in a rather large title block,
| | 00:55 | if you will, but it will be a big Legend block.
| | 00:58 | Come up here, select on Annotate, pick
on Detail Line, choose Wide Lines off of
| | 01:05 | the list so we have fairly robust
lines when it comes time to print.
| | 01:10 | Make sure that your Line tool is selected.
| | 01:13 | Click once, and now draw a line
that's 7 feet in this direction.
| | 01:18 | Draw another line going in
the same direction 7 feet,
| | 01:22 | another line in the same direction 8'4", and
another line in the same direction still 8'4".
| | 01:29 | We've drawn each of those
lines individually for a reason.
| | 01:32 | It's going to make drawing our
columns a lot easier here in just a minute.
| | 01:36 | Now I'm going to come down 48 feet.
| | 01:40 | Move over till you get to the edge
there and you get the dashed line,
| | 01:43 | and now come back up again.
| | 01:45 | This is our outside border.
| | 01:47 | Now we're going to draw some of
the lines going straight down.
| | 01:50 | Select on your Detail Lines again and pick the
endpoint of each of those lines you just drew
| | 01:56 | and just bring those straight down.
| | 02:02 | Now that we've done that, let's go ahead and
use the Copy command and copy these lines down.
| | 02:08 | So select on those lines, come up to Copy.
| | 02:11 | Make sure Multiple is checked.
| | 02:14 | Click right there, and for this, this is
going to be the area where our titles are at.
| | 02:18 | So just come down 3 feet;
| | 02:20 | everything else is going
to be 9 foot increments.
| | 02:23 | So go down 9 foot once, twice,
three times, and finally a fourth time.
| | 02:33 | Now we have our grid in place that we're
going to place all of our information into.
| | 02:38 | Now start to zoom in here and select
on Text up here underneath Annotate.
| | 02:46 | We're going to want a 3/32" Arial Text.
| | 02:49 | Zoom in to this area, click inside of
the box, and type in Door Mark. Click out.
| | 02:56 | If we hit Esc, it will probably erase it, so
just click right there and type in Door Mark,
| | 03:01 | and whenever you're done, click outside of
the box and it will finish up the command.
| | 03:05 | Now, while it's still highlighted,
if you can, see if you can move it.
| | 03:08 | If you can't, just click
on it and just move it over.
| | 03:11 | You can always use the
Nudge command if you wanted.
| | 03:15 | Next, select on that title and
we're going to copy it on over,
| | 03:18 | and we're going to use the Copy command and we're
going to use that for our other category headings.
| | 03:22 | So click and click and click and click
on over until we have four categories.
| | 03:28 | This first one is going to need to be Door Type.
| | 03:34 | This one here is going to be Elevation.
| | 03:40 | The next one is going to be called Plan.
| | 03:42 | Elevation is the way the doors are
going to look in Elevation view.
| | 03:46 | Plan is the way that those
doors look in Plan view.
| | 03:49 | Go ahead and let's just center this up, so
it's all appropriate and looks nice and neat.
| | 03:57 | Next, after you've done that, we're going
to add some letters coming straight down.
| | 04:01 | We're going to do A, B, C, D, and E.
| | 04:05 | To do that I'm going to select on one of our titles,
| | 04:06 | come up here to Copy, and I'm just going
to copy it down one spot to begin with.
| | 04:12 | And once we get down to about the
midpoint here, you can go ahead and let go.
| | 04:16 | Now click, change this to be an A.
| | 04:20 | You can see how it's left-justified and
it's probably not what we want it to be.
| | 04:23 | So once it's highlighted, come back
up here and select on Align Center
| | 04:27 | and that's going to align it
right in the center of this.
| | 04:30 | Now, I'm going to move this over, and
also I'm going to expand out this textbox
| | 04:36 | so that this is going to stay
centered inside of our legend.
| | 04:39 | Select on this, use the Copy command
and copy it straight on down, and
| | 04:43 | we're just going to copy it again and again
and again until all those cells are filled.
| | 04:51 | Now we need to change each of
these to read B, then C, D, and E,
| | 04:56 | and these letters correspond
to specific wall designations,
| | 05:01 | and those wall designations are the Type
Marks that you can see in our schedule.
| | 05:12 | Once you have all those, come back over
here to the Door Type, copy it over,
| | 05:23 | and I'm going to turn this into
a 3068, I'm going to hit Enter;
| | 05:29 | Exterior, Enter, Hinged, Enter, Door.
| | 05:38 | Now select on it after you've typed
that in and use your Nudge tool,
| | 05:42 | the little Arrow Keys on your keyboard,
to raise this back up a bit.
| | 05:46 | Now this is going to be the shortest
line out of this series of five
| | 05:49 | that we're going to be placing in here.
| | 05:51 | So I'm just going to raise this up just
a little bit so it's not quite centered,
| | 05:54 | but it will be in roughly the
same spot as far as the top goes,
| | 05:57 | as where it's going to be in
underneath all these other categories.
| | 06:01 | Now I'm going to select on this and
I'm going to use the Copy command,
| | 06:04 | and I'm going to copy this actually
all the way down to the bottom one.
| | 06:08 | Now I'm going to change the text of this
one to say 6068 Interior Double Hinged Door.
| | 06:24 | Select on that and go ahead and Copy that
one on up to each of the remaining cells.
| | 06:33 | Now that you've done that let's go
ahead and come back up to B again.
| | 06:38 | Click in here, and this one is going to be
instead of a 6068 Door, this is going to be
| | 06:43 | a 3068 Door, and it's going to
be an Interior Single Hinged Door.
| | 06:51 | C here is going to be a 5068, so
5068 Interior Double Sliding Door.
| | 07:05 | So we need to change Hinged to be Sliding.
| | 07:11 | After that we have a 6068
Exterior Double Hinged Door.
| | 07:20 | So we're going to change
Interior to be Exterior.
| | 07:28 | And this information is correct.
| | 07:30 | Now we need to start adding in those
individual pictures into each of these categories.
| | 07:34 | In order to do that we're going to once
again come up here to Annotate and right
| | 07:38 | next to the word Component that looks like
there's a little down arrow or a little triangle.
| | 07:42 | I'm going to select on that
and pick on Legend Component.
| | 07:45 | Depending on the resolution of your
screen, it might actually be right to the
| | 07:49 | side of the word Component, but go
ahead and click on Legend Component.
| | 07:55 | Once you have that, we need to place
this door in the appropriate location.
| | 08:01 | This one happens to be a
Double-Glass 1: 72" x 80".
| | 08:07 | Now the Double-Glass 1: 72" x 80", that
one is our Exterior Double Hinged Door.
| | 08:14 | So I'm going to go ahead and
move that one down to this location.
| | 08:18 | This is the Double Hinged Door that
leads out from our dining room area
| | 08:22 | and goes out onto our
back porch, our back deck.
| | 08:26 | Go ahead and click there.
| | 08:27 | Next, come up here to View
and change it to be Floor Plan.
| | 08:31 | If you do that, you'll now
have your doors swinging out
| | 08:34 | in the appropriate Floor Plan View look.
| | 08:36 | Now there is this little box that
shows up down here at the bottom of it.
| | 08:40 | What this is, is it's
your actual Wall symbol,
| | 08:43 | and it's showing up whenever
we're placing these components.
| | 08:46 | Well whenever we're done placing the
components we're going to turn off Wall,
| | 08:49 | so we no longer have to see that
little box down there at the bottom,
| | 08:53 | and it looks appropriate
for that door symbology.
| | 08:57 | Next, we need to find a few more of
our doors and start to place them in.
| | 09:01 | Another door that I know that we're
going to use was the Doors: Front Door.
| | 09:05 | That was our front door of our house,
and that's the very first door up here,
| | 09:09 | the Exterior Hinged Door.
| | 09:11 | So go ahead and move this, kind of
line it up with the door down below
| | 09:15 | and go ahead and click.
| | 09:17 | After that, move up here to Floor Plan
and change this to be a Front View and
| | 09:22 | drop your Front Door's Front
Elevation right onto our legend.
| | 09:26 | Another door that we
were making use of was this
| | 09:29 | Doors: Single-Flush 36" x 80" door.
| | 09:34 | So go ahead and select on that, and
that's going to be Door B here on the list.
| | 09:40 | And put it roughly
centered with the rest of them.
| | 09:43 | We can always tweak it to get
them to line up after the fact,
| | 09:46 | but just put it in place for right now,
and those adjustments can be made later.
| | 09:50 | Come up to Floor Plan;
| | 09:52 | put the Floor Plan View of
that door onto the sheet.
| | 09:55 | Let's take a look for a few more doors here.
| | 09:59 | The next one is going to be the 5068
Interior Double Sliding Door,
| | 10:03 | and it's designation here on our chart
is Doors: Sliding-Closet 60" x 80".
| | 10:07 | So go ahead and select that off of the list,
pull it down, put that Floor Plan View
| | 10:16 | in place or the Elevation View in place,
depending on which one that you chose,
| | 10:20 | and then come up, change
it to the other kind of view,
| | 10:24 | and drop that in the correct
spot here on our Legend.
| | 10:29 | Once you've done that, we
just have one more door to go.
| | 10:32 | So let's come up and look for the
6068 Interior Double Hinged Door.
| | 10:38 | That was the larger of our two
closet doors, the two sliding doors.
| | 10:41 | So it's the Sliding-Closet 72" x 80" door.
| | 10:44 | We're going to come in here and we're
going to drop this down to the bottom here,
| | 10:48 | and we're going to place the Floor Plan
View of that over here in this column.
| | 10:53 | Hit Esc a couple of
times to get out of there,
| | 10:57 | and then you can select on your
individual doors and tweak them
| | 11:00 | by just using your little arrow keys
on your keyboard, the Nudge command,
| | 11:04 | in order to nudge everything in place so
that everything is lined up nice and perfect.
| | 11:09 | One last thing we needed to do was shut
those Walls off here in the Plan View,
| | 11:12 | and to do that you can either type in
V+V on the keyboard, Victor Victor,
| | 11:18 | or come up here to Visibility/Graphics,
and click on the big Edit button here,
| | 11:22 | and you can shut those Walls off, which what
that object is, by clearing out the box,
| | 11:27 | clicking on OK, and now you
can see that, that box is gone.
| | 11:30 | Now, this was a long process, a lot of
drafting was involved, but this is really
| | 11:36 | a needed step so that the people out
in the field can identify the doors as
| | 11:40 | you've drawn them, both in your Floor
Plans as well as your Elevation Views.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. Notes, Text, Drafting, and DimensionsDimensioning| 00:00 | Now we're going to do what's
essentially a Dimensioning 101;
| | 00:04 | how to go about doing the basics of
drawing in Dimensions in the Floor Plan
| | 00:08 | and also what to look for.
| | 00:10 | First, I'm going to take a Dimension
that's going to Dimension the overall
| | 00:13 | distance of our building.
| | 00:15 | Now this is for when they're first
deciding to construct the building.
| | 00:18 | You always have to remember that the
siding isn't going to be put into place
| | 00:21 | until much later in the project.
| | 00:24 | Because of that, having a Dimension from
the outside of the siding to the outside
| | 00:28 | of the siding won't be very much help for
those people putting the building together.
| | 00:33 | What we want to do is put a dimension
from the outside face of the stud
| | 00:36 | to the outside face of stud.
| | 00:38 | Studs being the 2 x 4s that
make up the exterior walls.
| | 00:42 | Underneath the Annotate tab, we need to come
in here and choose on the Aligned Dimension.
| | 00:47 | It's going to be tempting to click on
Linear because that's the same direction
| | 00:50 | that we're going to be going in, but I find
the Aligned Dimension to be just easier to
| | 00:54 | use and it can do everything that we need in
order to be able to Dimension the building.
| | 01:00 | Next make sure the Faces
of core is highlighted
| | 01:04 | and then come over here
to Individual References.
| | 01:06 | As long as it says Individual
References you can make these picks.
| | 01:10 | Come over here and pick
the outside face of core,
| | 01:12 | which is the outside
face of stud on this wall.
| | 01:15 | Zoom out and zoom back in to the
outside face of stud on this wall.
| | 01:21 | Come back out and then place the Dimension.
| | 01:23 | Just so it's easy for us to see,
I'm going to place it right here.
| | 01:26 | Historically, I probably would have placed
it out here or farther out to get it away
| | 01:30 | from the building and make it a
little bit more cleaner to read,
| | 01:33 | but so that we can see
it easily on the screen,
| | 01:36 | I'm going to keep it close to the
building and place it right here.
| | 01:38 | Now, if you're going to do the placement,
you have to click somewhere out in space
| | 01:42 | where there's not an object to touch.
| | 01:45 | If you hit the Escape key
you'll lose it at this point.
| | 01:47 | So, just click somewhere out here in
space and it'll place your Dimension.
| | 01:51 | In this case, we can see it's 36 feet
from face of stud to face of stud.
| | 01:57 | Next, we're going to do the same
Dimensioning along this wall here,
| | 02:02 | and we're going to get the
total length of the building.
| | 02:04 | So Face of stud, zoom out, zoom back in,
I'm just using my wheel to do that.
| | 02:10 | Zoom back out again and then click to
get that overall length
| | 02:15 | and we can see this is
46 feet long in this direction.
| | 02:19 | Now, there is a window here.
| | 02:21 | It's looking into the kitchen
and I'd like to Dimension that,
| | 02:24 | and I'd like to Dimension it a little bit
faster than what we've done up to this point.
| | 02:27 | So come up here to Individual
References into Entire Walls.
| | 02:31 | Select on Options and
put a check mark in Openings,
| | 02:35 | which is related back to
the centers of this window.
| | 02:38 | Now clear out this box
that says Intersecting Walls.
| | 02:40 | That would give us a few too many
Dimensions of what we want to do
| | 02:43 | and go ahead and click on OK to that.
| | 02:45 | Now select on the wall and just pull out.
| | 02:48 | It did the entire wall.
| | 02:50 | It automatically generated the
Dimension for the entire wall
| | 02:54 | and took this Dimension strain
right to the center of the windows.
| | 02:59 | Now we want to place in
a few interior Dimensions.
| | 03:02 | I'm hitting Escape once in order to
get out of that part of the command,
| | 03:05 | but you'll notice that I'm still
inside of my Dimensioning command.
| | 03:08 | Now I'm going to place a Dimension
string from here all the way on over.
| | 03:13 | Now, in order to do that,
I'm just going to zoom in.
| | 03:16 | I'm going to make sure that it's
Individual References not Entire Walls,
| | 03:21 | and I'm going to click the outside
face here, the inside face, move over,
| | 03:29 | click the inside face and
then the outside face of stud.
| | 03:35 | As proper Dimensioning procedure,
always extend that Dimension string
| | 03:39 | all the way on over except in rare conditions
where you've repeated that Dimension 47 times.
| | 03:45 | The reasoning behind that is, is that
you never know when someone is going to
| | 03:48 | look for a Dimension at a certain location
and you always want them to be able to
| | 03:52 | build it right and find that Dimension fast.
| | 03:55 | So always try to do that Dimension
string all the way across and
| | 03:58 | it's going to help people read the plans much
easier and from typical drafting convention
| | 04:04 | that's just a nicer way to go about doing it.
| | 04:07 | Now, we're going to place a
couple of more Dimension strings.
| | 04:11 | Always remember to Dimension everything that
you can, so people know where things should go.
| | 04:16 | As an example, I'm going to dimension these
walls here that make up this part of the kitchen.
| | 04:21 | So, I'm going to come up here
to the Line tool once again.
| | 04:24 | I'm going to make sure Individual
References are still checked,
| | 04:29 | and once again I'm going to pick Points.
| | 04:32 | Going all the way across, picking faces here,
the face of each of these studs on the inside,
| | 04:41 | moving across, clicking in
and placing our Dimensions.
| | 04:49 | Now once you have that going all the way
across, you can just click out here in space
| | 04:52 | and it'll place that Dimension string.
| | 04:54 | I'm going to do one more Dimension
and that's going to be going all the way
| | 04:58 | across here to this point.
| | 05:02 | So, go ahead and select on Aligned, zoom here
toward the bottom, Faces of core on each wall.
| | 05:14 | You'll notice that this one's going to
be a little bit wider Dimension because
| | 05:17 | this is a wider wall.
| | 05:20 | Come back up, Dimension, but in this
case I ended up picking the wrong spot.
| | 05:26 | So, is there anything that I can do about
it once I've actually picked the wrong spot?
| | 05:30 | The answer is yes.
| | 05:32 | If you pick back on that spot that you
picked at you'll remove that Dimension
| | 05:36 | and in this case, I can select and
select again and just keep on going.
| | 05:41 | So I'm going to come back up here,
I'm going to click, I'm going to click,
| | 05:46 | and then I'm going to click
somewhere out here in space,
| | 05:50 | and that finishes off
that Dimension string.
| | 05:53 | Now obviously this isn't all the
Dimensions you need in order to
| | 05:56 | be able to construct this building.
| | 05:58 | So whenever you're going to be placing
Dimensions in, always make sure pickup
| | 06:03 | every wall, every Dimension, get the depth
of the pantry, get the depth of the closet,
| | 06:09 | the widths of these things.
| | 06:11 | You can never really have too many
Dimensions, you can only under Dimension.
| | 06:15 | This is just an example of the process
that you should go by in order to
| | 06:19 | finish your floor plans and
have them Dimension properly.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding general notes| 00:00 | General Notes are typically
project-wide notes
| | 00:03 | which are often the longest
group of notes in the project.
| | 00:06 | If it's related to the project and
doesn't need to be called out
| | 00:09 | in a specific location such as on a floor
plan, a building section, et cetera,
| | 00:14 | it's likely getting called
out in the General Notes area.
| | 00:17 | To create your General Notes there is a
couple of different ways you can do it.
| | 00:21 | One is by just using Text and
just typing in the General Note.
| | 00:24 | But that can sometimes get messy,
numbers can get pulled apart,
| | 00:28 | and things will no longer
get lined up appropriately.
| | 00:31 | To keep things nice and neat
and consistent I like to use a
| | 00:35 | Schedule to do all my General Notes,
and now let me show you how to do it.
| | 00:40 | Underneath the View tab up here,
we can go to Schedules, and the kind
| | 00:45 | of Schedule that we're going to be using to do
these General Notes is called a Key Schedule.
| | 00:50 | So select on Schedules/Quantities, and we
can see, Schedule keys is available here.
| | 00:56 | But right now it's grayed out.
| | 00:58 | The reason is, in order to do a
schedule key this schedule needs to be
| | 01:02 | associated with some type of object.
| | 01:05 | Unfortunately, there is no way to do a
schedule key without it being associated
| | 01:08 | with the type of object, at
least not currently in Revit.
| | 01:11 | So as a result of that we need to
find something that we're never going to
| | 01:15 | schedule, really don't care that
much about the properties for,
| | 01:19 | so we can associate a
Schedule Key along with it.
| | 01:22 | In this case, I'm never going
to schedule my parking spaces.
| | 01:26 | There won't even be a
parking space in this project.
| | 01:29 | So this is a really safe
thing to go for our General Notes.
| | 01:33 | So select Parking and click on Schedule keys.
| | 01:37 | Now I'm going to type-in General Notes
and I'm going to do the same thing down here
| | 01:45 | in the Key name, so General
Notes and click on OK.
| | 01:51 | Next, what we want to have is Number and Notes.
| | 01:56 | We don't need the Key Name, so you can
highlight on that and click on Remove,
| | 02:00 | select on Number, and
add it. Notes, and add it.
| | 02:05 | So now we're going to
have the number of the notes.
| | 02:09 | Note number 1, 2, or 3, and then the note,
the actual text of the note following it.
| | 02:15 | We also want to do Sorting/Grouping so
that no matter what happens,
| | 02:20 | number 1 will always be ahead of number 2.
| | 02:24 | We don't want our numbers
to come out of sequence.
| | 02:27 | So good ahead and select on
Number to that and click on OK.
| | 02:31 | This brings up the new
General Notes Schedule that we have.
| | 02:35 | If we look down on our Schedules list
under here on the Project Browser
| | 02:39 | we'll be able to find General Notes over here.
| | 02:42 | Now in order to be able to add General
Notes, I'm going to pull this part out,
| | 02:46 | which is Notes, and I was able to do
that by just moving my cursor over
| | 02:51 | until that little double arrow
there with a dark line showed up,
| | 02:54 | and I did that here on this end and you
can just click and hold down your mouse
| | 02:58 | and pull it out so that
you have a longer note field.
| | 03:01 | Next, come up here to New, which is
right above Row, and click on it.
| | 03:07 | Do this a few more times.
| | 03:11 | Now we can start typing in.
| | 03:13 | This is 1, 2, 3, 4, and you can
see how it's putting it in order,
| | 03:21 | because we told it to sort by
the Number field, 1, 2, 3, and 4.
| | 03:26 | Now it's time to type in our General
Notes, and I'm going to keep it well,
| | 03:30 | real generic, and I'm going to make
this just be General Notes #1.
| | 03:39 | I'm going to copy this and just paste
this down to all the other rows here,
| | 03:44 | but I will point out that with each and
every General Note I could just click in
| | 03:47 | the space that I wanted it to type it in
at and just start typing just like I did
| | 03:51 | with General Note #1.
| | 03:54 | You can see I just did a Ctrl+C to copy it
and a Ctrl+V to paste it in each location.
| | 04:01 | Now I'm going to make this be General
Note #2, General Note #3, General Note #4.
| | 04:07 | Now in real life it wouldn't actually
say General Note #1, 2, 3 and 4.
| | 04:10 | It would give the note
project-specific information
| | 04:14 | and make it available for everybody to use.
| | 04:17 | The ultimate purpose in doing this in a
Scheduled format is that no longer can
| | 04:21 | the Numbers and Notes get pulled apart.
| | 04:23 | They'll always keep their formatting
and they'll always have a nice, clean,
| | 04:28 | easy-to-read appearance.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding notes with text| 00:00 | We now need a way to add Notes to our
project that reference a list on our drawings.
| | 00:05 | To do this, we'll use a Note Tag and Schedule.
| | 00:09 | For this project I created a Note Tag
Family that can be found underneath
| | 00:12 | Families > Annotation
Symbols in the Project Browser.
| | 00:16 | So over here underneath Project
Browser, if we look down, we'll
| | 00:21 | find Families > Annotation
Symbols, and then Note Tags.
| | 00:26 | Now the use of a Note Tag is fairly easy.
| | 00:28 | You click on the word Note Tag, hold
your mouse button down, and drag over until
| | 00:34 | your mouse is inside of the drawing area.
| | 00:37 | Next, let go and move your mouse
until you get to a spot where you want
| | 00:41 | to place the Note Tag in.
| | 00:43 | In this case a Note Tag is just going to be
a circular shape with a number in the center
| | 00:48 | of it, and that number is going to
reference information on a Schedule,
| | 00:50 | that can also be placed on the
same sheet as your floor plan.
| | 00:55 | That way someone will look at that
Number, look up at the Schedule,
| | 00:58 | up in the corner of your plan, and be
able to know that this piece of information,
| | 01:03 | that's in the Schedule, relates back to this
Note which is on the floor plan in this location.
| | 01:09 | So I'm going to go ahead and
click to place this first one in.
| | 01:14 | By default it automatically
puts a Question Mark.
| | 01:17 | The reason is that we haven't
given it any information yet.
| | 01:19 | So I'm going to go ahead and
hit Escape a couple times to that.
| | 01:23 | I'm going to select on my Note Tag.
| | 01:25 | Now I can either click on it and
then click on the Question Mark and then
| | 01:29 | type in information such as the number 1,
or I could have typed in the number 1
| | 01:35 | up here and then just started to fill in
the information here in the properties,
| | 01:39 | and that's what I'm going to do in this case.
| | 01:41 | I'm going to go ahead and fill in the
information related to this General Note
| | 01:45 | here on my properties.
| | 01:46 | So to begin with, with this number 1, the
Note associated with it is going to be Carpet.
| | 01:52 | It's going to refer to the material that the
Note is currently on here in the Great Room.
| | 01:58 | So I'm just going to type in Carpet to that.
| | 01:59 | Underneath there we have Floor.
| | 02:01 | Now Floor is going to indicate, this
is the first floor of the project or
| | 02:06 | this is the basement in the project.
| | 02:08 | In this case, it's our first
floor, but to keep things simple
| | 02:11 | so I don't have to type a lot, we're
just going to put the number 1 in.
| | 02:14 | It's pretty self-explanatory,
first floor, the number 1.
| | 02:18 | Now that we've done that we can start
to place this Note in multiple locations.
| | 02:22 | I 'm going to zoom out and then zoom back in.
| | 02:26 | Now if I select here, I'm going to go
ahead and use the Copy command
| | 02:30 | and I'm going to copy it from here
down to our Master Bathroom area.
| | 02:35 | Now the flooring material in our Master
Bath is obviously not carpet; it's a tile.
| | 02:39 | So in order to be able to indicate that,
I'm just going to select back on my Note,
| | 02:43 | change this to be note number 2,
and for the General Note itself
| | 02:49 | I'm going to type-in VCT
which is a tile indication.
| | 02:53 | And finally, I'm going to leave
Floor 1 the way that it is, because we're
| | 02:56 | still on our first floor plan.
| | 02:59 | Now you might be wondering where is
this going to actually print itself off at?
| | 03:02 | Or where can I reference
this information at?
| | 03:05 | Well, we're going to need to
create a Schedule related to that
| | 03:08 | so that we can have this running list of
all of our different Notes in the project.
| | 03:13 | So let's go ahead and do that now and
we'll take a look at what information
| | 03:17 | we've currently entered.
| | 03:18 | So to accomplish this it's not
going to take a normal Schedule.
| | 03:22 | We're going to have to come underneath
View up here, go over to Schedules,
| | 03:26 | and then we're going to come down not to
Schedules/Quantities like we have up to
| | 03:29 | this point, but we're going
to come down to Note Block.
| | 03:33 | Note Block references a specific
kind of Family inside of Revit.
| | 03:37 | In this case, it's a Note Block Family and
that actually is what this is, our Note Tag;
| | 03:42 | this circle with a number in it,
make sure that that Note Tag Family
| | 03:46 | is highlighted, move over here,
and now let's give this a name.
| | 03:51 | The Schedule that I want to create here is
just going to be called First Floor Notes.
| | 03:59 | So once you've typed that in,
go ahead and click on OK.
| | 04:03 | Now it's asking, what information
do you want to have in this Schedule?
| | 04:06 | This is fairly easy.
| | 04:08 | All we're going to need to do is put
in the number, which is the number that
| | 04:11 | we see here like number 1
or number 2 and click on Add.
| | 04:15 | Second, we're going to want
that General Notes information.
| | 04:19 | So go ahead and add that
and put this over here.
| | 04:22 | I will mention that this could be renamed.
| | 04:24 | So if you don't want this category to be
called General Note, you'd rather it be
| | 04:27 | called Notes or something else, it is possible
to edit it and make those changes if you wish.
| | 04:33 | But for right now I'm just going
to leave this at General Notes.
| | 04:36 | I'm going to move up here and
I'm going to select on Floor
| | 04:40 | and add this to my Schedule as well.
| | 04:41 | While technically not required in order
for us to get the proper information on
| | 04:47 | our sheet it will be required for something
we're getting ready to do here in just a moment.
| | 04:51 | So let's just place it there for now.
| | 04:52 | Now that we've done that come over here
to Sorting/Grouping, and it says Sort by.
| | 04:59 | Click right here where it has the word
None and change this to be NO for number.
| | 05:05 | So it's going to sort it by the number.
| | 05:06 | So it's always going to keep it in
order of Note 1, 2, 3, 4, et cetera.
| | 05:11 | And if anything gets renumbered, changed
around, it will automatically put it in
| | 05:15 | the proper place in this list of Notes.
| | 05:18 | Once you've done that, come down here
and you notice there's an option here that
| | 05:22 | says Itemize every instance.
| | 05:24 | We don't want this, because if this
has a check mark in it,
| | 05:27 | it means that every time there is a
number one with the exact same Note,
| | 05:31 | it'll repeat that Note
again and again and again,
| | 05:34 | and we don't really want the
same Note 14 times in our Schedule.
| | 05:38 | So by clearing this out if the Note is there
once, it will only appear once in our Schedule.
| | 05:43 | There's one more thing that we need to do,
and this could be the most important step,
| | 05:48 | and that's a tab here called Filter.
| | 05:50 | So go ahead and move up here to Filter,
select on it and go to Filter by,
| | 05:54 | and we want to filter by the Floor information.
| | 05:58 | Now that's the reason why we entered the
field information here and put Floor in
| | 06:01 | the first place is so we could
generate a filter from that information.
| | 06:06 | Now that we're here we
want to make the Floor equals
| | 06:09 | in this case the number 1.
| | 06:11 | You remember that we typed in the number 1
to indicate first floor in that Note Tag;
| | 06:15 | this is the reason why we did it.
| | 06:17 | Next, I'm going to take a look at this.
| | 06:20 | This is looking pretty good to me,
but we're going to move over here to
| | 06:22 | Formatting and we're going
to highlight on the word Floor.
| | 06:26 | Now we don't really need
to see this in our Schedule.
| | 06:30 | It has to be part of the Schedule
so that our filters can work,
| | 06:33 | but we don't need be see it on the
Schedules and we don't need to see it
| | 06:36 | as part of our General Notes.
| | 06:38 | It's going to be implied, because when
we place all this onto a sheet, the Notes
| | 06:43 | are going to be on the same sheet as the
first floor, and then we're just going
| | 06:47 | to reference the Numbers on the floor
plans with the Notes up in the corner;
| | 06:51 | the Floor is going to be implied.
| | 06:53 | So from here we're going to come
down here to the Hidden field and
| | 06:56 | put a check mark next to that.
| | 06:58 | So it'll still be part of the
Schedule, but we won't be able to see it.
| | 07:02 | Go ahead and click on OK to that.
| | 07:04 | Once you do, we can now see our
First Floor Notes, we can see the Number.
| | 07:09 | By the way, this can be renamed as well.
| | 07:11 | So it's either all uppercase or uppercase
and then lowercase from there on now,
| | 07:15 | and you can see that I can
type it in here if I wished.
| | 07:18 | You can see the numbers 1 and 2 and we
can see it's related to carpet and tile.
| | 07:22 | So that you can see something else,
let's go ahead and close out of this.
| | 07:25 | One thing that I didn't do is I only
have a number 1 here and a number 2.
| | 07:30 | What happens if I select on
this and then copy this Note down?
| | 07:34 | Well, once I have this in this location,
this bedroom still has carpeting in it
| | 07:40 | and it would be called out.
| | 07:41 | If I select back on the Note, I notice this
has the same information as this Note here,
| | 07:46 | and because we cleared out the check
box that says Itemize every instance,
| | 07:51 | that means if everything is set up
correctly that the Notes shouldn't
| | 07:55 | be duplicated when we did this copying process.
| | 07:59 | So let's go ahead and check
that back on our Schedule.
| | 08:00 | We'll move back up to our
Schedules here and try to find that.
| | 08:04 | Here we have our First Floor Notes and
here you can see there's still only one
| | 08:09 | instance of that number 1 in Carpet,
just the way that it should be.
| | 08:13 | Now let's go ahead and add
a Note down in our Basement.
| | 08:16 | If we've set it up right it shouldn't automatically
number it here on our First Floor Notes.
| | 08:23 | So we'll move to our Basement Floor Plan
and we're going to add a note down there,
| | 08:29 | in the living room area.
| | 08:30 | So I'm going to move down here on
the list, find the Family down here,
| | 08:35 | drag the Note Tag out to tag the floor, and
I'm going to copy it to right at this location.
| | 08:41 | Now I'm going to select on the little
circle, click on the little Question Mark
| | 08:45 | and the information I'm going to enter
in here is 1, because this will be Note
| | 08:49 | number 1 on this sheet and also I'm
going to change this information so that
| | 08:53 | it says VCT underneath the General Notes.
| | 08:57 | Let me click out of there so it will
apply and we're going to do VCT for the
| | 09:02 | General Notes, and for the floor,
remember this is in the basement level,
| | 09:06 | so I'm not going to number 1;
it's just going to be B for basement.
| | 09:09 | Now that I've done that I'm going to
clear out of this Floor Plan View,
| | 09:15 | and you can see it didn't add it here,
because it's been filtered out.
| | 09:19 | It's not a number 1; it's the letter B for basement.
| | 09:22 | But we're going to need to have a
Basement Notes Note sheet as well.
| | 09:26 | So let's go ahead and create
a Schedule related to that.
| | 09:29 | So I'm going to move up here.
| | 09:30 | I'm going to click where it has First Floor
Notes and I'm going to right-click on it,
| | 09:34 | and I can duplicate the view.
| | 09:37 | So just come over here in Duplicate and it
makes an exact copy of that last schedule.
| | 09:41 | We're going to rename
that to be Basement Notes.
| | 09:49 | Once you have Basement Notes come back in here
and we need to create a new filter for it.
| | 09:55 | So select Edit right here next to the word
Filter and change that number 1 to a B.
| | 10:02 | Click on OK and now you can see
it's only listing the Basement Notes,
| | 10:07 | because it has the letter B
associated with that Note Block.
| | 10:11 | So it's going to be easy enough to note our
plans by just dragging the Note Block off,
| | 10:16 | placing it in the location we need
and filling in the proper information.
| | 10:20 | Then you duplicate your different Note
Block Schedules and then drag all this
| | 10:25 | information onto a sheet
and it'll be ready to print.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating detail views| 00:00 | Now we are going to try to develop
some of our details using callout views.
| | 00:04 | Now the idea behind a callout view, and
we have talked about a little bit earlier
| | 00:08 | here when we were working on our first
floor plan, is to make an enlarged area
| | 00:13 | that will allow us to do a
higher level of detail and drafting.
| | 00:18 | But there is another kind of callout
view that we can leverage in order to be
| | 00:22 | able to do such things as our wall sections.
| | 00:25 | And that kind of callout view is
going to be essentially a detail view.
| | 00:30 | So let's go ahead and show how
that detail view can be put together.
| | 00:33 | So I'm going to zoom in here and we already
have a wall section in place in this location.
| | 00:39 | I'm going to double-click right here on
the head of the wall section in order to
| | 00:42 | be able to bring up the section view.
| | 00:45 | I will point out that you can always
click on this line, right-click, and Go to
| | 00:49 | View if you have a hard time double-
clicking on any sort of section head.
| | 00:53 | So I am just going to double-
click on that and zoom into our View.
| | 00:58 | We can see this layer of insulation
that we put in a little bit earlier on.
| | 01:02 | While this has a fairly decent level of
detail to it, this is still a little bit
| | 01:07 | too compressed for us to be able to
see each and every layer of material.
| | 01:11 | So it's really not practical for the
kind of application that we want to do,
| | 01:15 | we'll just be able to see each and
every board, everything that's going to make up
| | 01:19 | the structure of this building.
| | 01:21 | So in order to be able to achieve
that we're going to need to add a Callout
| | 01:25 | Bubble and then proceed from there.
| | 01:28 | Now one thing I do want to do first
before we move on, is I am going to click on
| | 01:32 | this line right here, and I am going to
select this little circle and pull this
| | 01:35 | out a little bit farther, I want to be
able to see the end of our roof when we
| | 01:39 | are going to be doing this detail.
| | 01:40 | Let's go ahead and add that Callout Bubble.
| | 01:44 | Up here underneath View, we are going to
come over and we are going to select on Callout.
| | 01:49 | From there, we need to think about, okay,
what scale do we want this View to be at?
| | 01:54 | For right now, we'll leave
it at half-inch equals a foot.
| | 01:57 | Always remember that after you've
done this you can always come down to the
| | 02:00 | scale at the bottom of the screen and
adjust it, so it's larger or smaller
| | 02:04 | whatever you require.
| | 02:05 | When we are dealing with a detail
view, there are actually a couple of
| | 02:10 | options that we have.
| | 02:11 | Right now if we replace it, it would
become a building section and show up as a
| | 02:15 | building section down here
underneath our Project Browser.
| | 02:19 | But we also have the ability to select
here and tell it all of our detail view
| | 02:23 | should show up underneath detail view.
| | 02:25 | So anything within enlarged amount of
data and information that we can see more
| | 02:30 | easily most likely would be a detail view.
| | 02:33 | And that's what I want to do
in this case, a detail view.
| | 02:37 | Now I am going to draw a window
around this upper portion of the wall.
| | 02:41 | You can see how I am just doing this
little section of the wall right here.
| | 02:45 | I am going to click the place, now this
is a going over the top of my level here
| | 02:51 | and I don't really like the look of that.
| | 02:53 | So I am going to select on this Callout,
grab the little dot and pull it up so
| | 02:58 | it's no longer in the way
of this word called TOP.
| | 03:01 | Now that we've done that you can
always select on it, right-click and go to
| | 03:06 | View, or double-click here on the circle.
| | 03:08 | But I do want to point out that one of
the things I changed up here was a change
| | 03:13 | that to a detail view, and you can see
under the Project Browser we now have a
| | 03:17 | new detail view, in this case it's
being called Detail 0, you should probably
| | 03:22 | renamed to something you'd recognize,
but I am just going go ahead and
| | 03:24 | double-click on this for right now.
| | 03:26 | And we can see a detail view showing
the top of our building at the moment.
| | 03:30 | If we want it to be able expand this
out we can always click on it, select on
| | 03:34 | this little dot here and just pull it
down and you can see how we can adjust
| | 03:39 | this to get as much of this part of
the building as we require to complete
| | 03:44 | our drafting process.
| | 03:46 | Now we need to consider, all right,
what goes on the inside of this wall.
| | 03:49 | But one thing I want to point out first,
is you notice that this wall here is
| | 03:54 | empty, if we come back to the view that we
were in, the wall had the insulation in it.
| | 04:00 | Anything that's drawn from the
Annotate tab only exists in the view that you
| | 04:06 | drew it in, and that includes the
insulation that we drew on the inside of the wall.
| | 04:11 | So when we re-created this view or
enlarged this view as a detail view, it
| | 04:16 | no longer showed that insulation in it, so
let's go ahead and go to that detail view.
| | 04:20 | Notice that the insulation isn't there
anymore, but we can draw it in, In order
| | 04:25 | to do that I am going to come up here
to Insulation, select on that, and I am
| | 04:29 | going to change this to be
3 1/2 inches of insulation.
| | 04:34 | Move down here to the bottom, it
will kind of snap to the center, you can
| | 04:37 | already see the blue dash line,
click and draw right on it.
| | 04:44 | Now we have our markings for insulation.
| | 04:46 | Next let's put-in a couple of boards up
here, this is going to be our Top Plate.
| | 04:51 | One of the things you may have noticed
as we have been drawing this building, as
| | 04:54 | I kept referring to the level TOP, we
are really talking about up here, near
| | 04:58 | where the Top Plate is going to be
located at, and then we will lead that out in
| | 05:02 | the next discussion.
| | 05:03 | But anyway I am going to come up here,
I am going to add the boards up here.
| | 05:06 | I am going to come in here to our
Components, and I am going to select on Detail
| | 05:12 | Component, and go to drop it in.
| | 05:15 | Now you can see this is a 2x4 which
happens to be right for our construction.
| | 05:18 | The only problem is, is right now it's on
edge and we really need to tilt this thing down.
| | 05:23 | So in order to be able to tilt it
down I am going to use the Spacebar, and
| | 05:28 | just like a lot of the other things
like the toilets and sinks and other
| | 05:32 | objects if you hit the Spacebar to rotate the
thing around, so it's facing the other direction.
| | 05:37 | In this case it's facing where we
wanted to go to and I am just going to click
| | 05:40 | right here in order to be able to place it in.
| | 05:43 | Next I am going to place
another one in just down from that.
| | 05:47 | I will click right about here, it
doesn't do a really pretty snap, but as long
| | 05:54 | as you look at really close you can see
you get it right on, and once you zoom
| | 05:58 | out, they might as well be perfect.
| | 06:02 | Now that that's in location, I'm
going to add a couple of more lines.
| | 06:05 | I am going to add a line that goes
over from here to here, to indicate
| | 06:09 | something that the ceiling might be
hanging on, it also could indicate rafters
| | 06:12 | going up above here.
| | 06:14 | So I'm going to come up here with a
detail line, I am just going to draw it
| | 06:17 | across from here, straight on a cross,
you notice I can even go outside of the
| | 06:22 | view and it'll just stop
when it gets this outside line.
| | 06:25 | If I wanted to add insulation or
anything along those lines up here I could, I
| | 06:30 | will also point out I can draw some
more of their detail lines and come up.
| | 06:36 | I can add in more insulation if I wish.
| | 06:40 | I can change the thickness of that
insulation to be something that's going to
| | 06:43 | fit up to there more appropriately.
| | 06:45 | I believe a 7 1/4 inches
is what we have up here.
| | 06:49 | So I'll just come in, click,
drop in this direction.
| | 06:53 | I can always adjust that after the fact.
| | 06:56 | You can see how it automatically gets cut off.
| | 06:59 | If I wanted to click on this and just pull
it up, I could, so it's in the right location.
| | 07:04 | So now we have some
insulation up there in our rafter area.
| | 07:09 | I also could have drawn it from here
just across, so we would have had some sort
| | 07:12 | of insulation going right
across where our ceiling was there.
| | 07:14 | It just comes into how you
want to install it into the house.
| | 07:17 | But to make a long story short on the
detail work that's going on in here you
| | 07:23 | just draft on the inside of this
already existing three-dimensional object in
| | 07:28 | order to put in the final details.
| | 07:31 | There's no reason to have all this
information modeled in Revit when you can
| | 07:35 | just use a few lines and keep
your Revit model moving quickly.
| | 07:39 | The more information you put three-dimensionally
in Revit, the slower the Revit model moves.
| | 07:44 | Now I want to add one more thing to this,
and it's going to be a series of notes.
| | 07:48 | And underneath here we
have text, so select on text.
| | 07:53 | You see that we have some Leader
options, I am going to pick Two Segments,
| | 07:57 | but you can pick the one that you like the
most whether it be curved or just straight line.
| | 08:00 | And I'm going to point to a specific
spot here and it's going be the insulation.
| | 08:05 | I am going to click, try to draw an out here.
| | 08:10 | I don't want this to be quarter inch
Arial, it's going to be 3/32" Arial, and
| | 08:14 | this is going to be 3 1/2" R15, which
is an insulation value, BATT INSULATION.
| | 08:25 | I am going to click over here to
finish the command and it's saying that it
| | 08:31 | can't see any of those notes.
| | 08:33 | Well what's going on is that it's
going outside of this dash box right here,
| | 08:37 | and that will try to cut off any of
those notes, but if I click in this little
| | 08:40 | circle and pull it out, we will then
be able to see the notes and they will
| | 08:44 | just show up properly.
| | 08:45 | Now I am going to select on this
note and copy it straight down.
| | 08:51 | Next I am going to select on the arrow
and I am just going to move this up and
| | 08:56 | it's just going to be pointing
directly at our wallboard here, in this case I
| | 09:00 | could call it a half inch drywall,
but you can make this be whatever is
| | 09:05 | appropriate for the type of
construction that you're trying to accomplish.
| | 09:11 | Creating these detail views are as
simple as using such things as callouts,
| | 09:17 | maybe even building sections, and
detailing in on the inside of these
| | 09:21 | already live Revit views.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
15. The SiteSite creation| 00:00 | Our next step will be to create a site
for our building to sit on. Because we
| | 00:04 | have a large lookout in the back of our
building, we want to make sure our site
| | 00:07 | slopes down in this
direction to provide a good view.
| | 00:11 | To begin drawing our site, we
need to be in a Site Plan view.
| | 00:15 | If we were just in our First Floor Plan
view, it would give us a warning saying
| | 00:18 | that we couldn't see the site because
you're not looking down far enough to see it.
| | 00:23 | In the case of the Site Plan view
though, it has a nice deep view range and
| | 00:28 | view depth in order to be able to see
down far enough to see all the contours
| | 00:32 | our site will provide.
| | 00:34 | Next, we need to hide this roof that we
are seeing here. In order to do that, go
| | 00:38 | ahead and zoom in and just do a
little crossing window from here to here,
| | 00:44 | and that's by just clicking and holding
your mouse down and dragging it over and
| | 00:47 | letting go to once you cross over.
| | 00:50 | Now the reason why we're doing this is
it's going to grab on to our roof, our
| | 00:53 | gutters, and our fascia board, and by
only doing a small portion, those are
| | 00:58 | going to be the only objects that are selected,
instead of some other element of our building.
| | 01:03 | Once there, we want to hide these objects,
and to do that, you come down to your
| | 01:07 | little eyeglasses, which were the
temporary hide isolate down here at the
| | 01:10 | bottom of the screen, and hide the
category. That will hide all the objects
| | 01:15 | like those that we selected.
| | 01:18 | Now that they are hidden, we are going
to have much more control over the way
| | 01:21 | that our site comes together
and attaches to the building.
| | 01:25 | So let's go ahead and zoom out and
begin the process of creating our site.
| | 01:30 | Our next step is going to be
to actually draw that site in.
| | 01:33 | So come up here to our Massing & Site,
click there and pick on Toposurface, which
| | 01:40 | generates the site as we know it.
| | 01:42 | Now the elevations show up here on the
Options Bar. This elevation is going to
| | 01:48 | be the height at which we
are going to be clicking at.
| | 01:51 | So in other words, here at the front of
the building we are going to want it to
| | 01:54 | be -2 feet. Here at the back of the
building it's going to be -9 foot, 8 1/2
| | 02:01 | just like we see on the screen.
| | 02:03 | Now the reason why we're doing it this
way is because -2 foot isn't nearly as
| | 02:07 | deep as -9 foot 8 1/2.
| | 02:10 | The -2 foot is a step
down off of the front porch.
| | 02:14 | The -9 foot 8 1/2 is going to provide a
nice area for us to be able to walk out
| | 02:19 | the back of our building out on to the grade.
| | 02:22 | It's also going to give us a better view
looking at our windows in the back of the building.
| | 02:26 | So we are going to come up here to
the Elevation and change this to begin
| | 02:30 | with to be -2 feet.
| | 02:32 | Now we need to start being a
little bit careful as to where we pick.
| | 02:36 | I am going to start by just picking
the front corner of our front porch.
| | 02:41 | Now I am going to zoom in and start
picking some of the other corners of our
| | 02:45 | building, in this case different corners
of the front porch, up here toward the
| | 02:51 | edge, here along some of the
front corners of our building.
| | 02:56 | Now I am not going to pick too deep
here, but I'm going to come up to right
| | 03:00 | about here and just pick
right at this location here.
| | 03:03 | Now I am going to come straight over
here and I am going to pick somewhere in
| | 03:08 | this area, roughly directly across
from that last point that we did.
| | 03:12 | I'm going to make another pick up here.
| | 03:18 | Now so far, as it is, we've only drawn
the site in this location. We need to
| | 03:22 | continue to draw the sites in.
| | 03:24 | Now I want to put another point almost
straight across from these points over here.
| | 03:28 | I am going to drop another point way
down here on the list, so somewhere down
| | 03:34 | here in the corner will be just fine.
Over here and you can see you can even
| | 03:38 | pick on this box and that's okay.
| | 03:40 | Come up here, make this be roughly
straight across from the other points.
| | 03:46 | Now by doing this we have a nice flat
area that's -2 feet down from our First
| | 03:52 | Floor area in our building.
| | 03:54 | This is going to be a nice spot for
us to be able to have our driveway, our
| | 03:58 | street, and that kind of information.
| | 04:00 | Now we need to put that deeper slope
down here in the back of our building.
| | 04:04 | And that is going to be that
-9 foot 8 1/2 inch dimension.
| | 04:08 | So type in -9 foot 8, and you can
either do 0.5 or just the one 1/2 sign.
| | 04:13 | Now I am going to pick a point here
in this back corner of the building.
| | 04:18 | You can start to see all these lines
getting generated. And these lines are
| | 04:22 | called Contour Lines and what it
represents are different elevations getting
| | 04:27 | spanned. You get the idea. It just
slopes down to the back of the building,
| | 04:31 | this being the 9 foot mark.
It would be sloping back to there.
| | 04:34 | From this point I am going to go
ahead and draw some more points in, and I
| | 04:38 | am going to put one point in over here,
another point in almost directly across over here.
| | 04:44 | Now it doesn't have to be this nice
and clean, and try to not put in too many
| | 04:49 | points because the more points you put in, the
more busy that your site plan is going to look.
| | 04:53 | Now we do need to add a couple more
here, so we are going to drop in one more
| | 04:57 | here in the back and one more over
here so that we have a nice flat piece of
| | 05:01 | ground in the back of our building.
| | 05:04 | Once all that is completed, go ahead
and click on the big green check mark and
| | 05:07 | take a look at your sites in a 3D view.
| | 05:10 | Now that we can see our house, it has
a nice sloping contours coming down.
| | 05:15 | Now one thing that we want to do is we
really don't want to have the site look
| | 05:19 | like this. In other words, it looks like
we have one, a lot of dirt and we'd like
| | 05:24 | this to look like grass,
| | 05:26 | and two, if we look closely, we can look
inside of our building and see the site
| | 05:30 | is actually unfortunately on the
inside of our building, and we are going to
| | 05:33 | need to clean that up.
| | 05:34 | So to begin with, we are going to
select on the site and we are going to
| | 05:38 | change the material of it.
| | 05:39 | And that's simple enough, because over
in the Properties area, you can come over
| | 05:43 | here and select where it has By
Category, and if you see this little three-
| | 05:47 | dotted box right here, go
ahead and select on that.
| | 05:50 | Look for the word site. And this is all
in alphabetical order, so start to look
| | 05:54 | for your Ss, and then select on Grass.
| | 05:58 | One other thing: make sure that Use
Render Appearance for Shading has a check
| | 06:02 | mark in it. That's just going to
ensure that the site is going to look green
| | 06:06 | when we click on OK.
| | 06:08 | Now go ahead and click off of the site
and you see that we now have some nice
| | 06:12 | green grass growing on the inside of
our building as well as on the outside.
| | 06:16 | So we need to take care of this
material on the inside of our building now.
| | 06:20 | The next step will be to actually modify our
site so that that material is no longer in it.
| | 06:26 | To accomplish that, we need to come up
to our Massing & Site tools again and do
| | 06:31 | this command called a Split Surface.
| | 06:33 | Now I am going to move down and select on
the site, and now notice that that's activated.
| | 06:39 | Now I am going to go in to our Basement
view, and from the Basement view we are
| | 06:43 | going to trace around the
perimeter of our building.
| | 06:46 | So in order to accomplish that, come up
here, use your Line Work tools, and draw
| | 06:54 | right around the perimeter of the
building, because we don't want to have that
| | 07:03 | earth work to be inside of our foundation walls.
| | 07:08 | Once you get all the way around,
you can click on the big green check mark.
| | 07:13 | Now technically, that information is
still there. In fact if we zoom out to
| | 07:16 | appropriate area, you can start to see
the site is still there--the earth is
| | 07:20 | still sort of cutting through in that
location--but now we are in a position
| | 07:23 | where we can get rid of it.
| | 07:25 | What the split surface did was this:
go ahead and go to your 3D View, and now we
| | 07:30 | have one surface which is our main site,
and then we have a secondary surface
| | 07:35 | which is the site on the inside of our building.
| | 07:38 | Now because there are now essentially
two separate sites, what this is going to
| | 07:41 | mean is that we are going to be able
to reach in here, grab onto this site
| | 07:44 | that's in here, and then delete it.
| | 07:46 | Now if you are having a hard time maybe
grabbing onto that, you may need to hide
| | 07:51 | a wall or two by selecting on the wall
and moving down here and clicking on the
| | 07:55 | little eyeglasses to hide it. But if
you end up moving your mouse around, there
| | 07:59 | is a good chance you'll get this
blue outline like I have right now.
| | 08:02 | As soon as soon you see it, and it'll say
Topography surface, both probably where
| | 08:07 | your cursor is at, as well as down in the
lower left-hand side of Reviet, go ahead
| | 08:11 | and click and hit the Delete key on
your keyboard. That'll get rid of it, you
| | 08:15 | will notice that it's also
cleaned up next to your building.
| | 08:19 | From here our next steps are going to
be to add in a road, sidewalks, and other
| | 08:25 | sorts of materials you might
associate with a typical site plan.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating roads, sidewalks, and driveways| 00:00 | Now we need to create a road, sidewalk,
and parking area for our vehicles.
| | 00:04 | In order to do that, we'll be
using a tool that's going to be called
| | 00:07 | the Subregion tool.
| | 00:09 | But first, we need to do something
that's going to allow us to be able to
| | 00:12 | better see our site.
| | 00:14 | So I'm going to zoom in here, and if
you've been working along in the other
| | 00:17 | exercises and you haven't switched over
to with this file, you may already have
| | 00:22 | shut off the visibility of your roof,
but in this case our roof is back on. So we
| | 00:27 | need to select on the roof, the
gutters, as well as the fascia board that's
| | 00:31 | going to be there, and we need to hide
them so we can better see our building.
| | 00:35 | So I'm going to move down here and
I'm going to select on the Temporary
| | 00:38 | Hide/Isolate tool, which looks like a
little set of eyeglasses down at the
| | 00:41 | bottom of the screen.
| | 00:43 | Go ahead and select on those, come
back up and click on Hide Category. That
| | 00:49 | will hide all the different objects that
are of that type, so it'll hide all the
| | 00:53 | roofs, all the fascia boards, et cetera.
| | 00:56 | Now that we can see our building,
the important thing is that we can see where our
| | 01:01 | front steps are at, and that's
important because we're going to be drawing a
| | 01:05 | sidewalk right off of the front
there and tie it into a parking area.
| | 01:09 | So to begin with, we're going to come
back up here and we're going to select
| | 01:13 | on Massing & Site. From there, we're going
to move over and click on the Subregion tool.
| | 01:21 | Now the Subregion tool is going to
allow us to draw pretty much any shape that
| | 01:25 | we want along our existing site.
| | 01:28 | So I'm going to select on the Linework
tool and I'm going to zoom in. I'm going
| | 01:33 | to pick one edge of the staircase leading down.
| | 01:37 | Next, I'm going to move straight down,
and then I'm going to come down about 6
| | 01:42 | feet--you don't need to be exact on that,
but come down roughly 6 feet--and then
| | 01:47 | I'm going to come over and I'll say
approximately 30 feet in this direction.
| | 01:52 | Now that's going to be the outside edge of
our sidewalk, leading over to our parking area.
| | 02:00 | I'm going to hit Escape once on my
keyboard, I'm going to zoom in again, pick
| | 02:04 | the intersection of where these two
lines come together--they are at the edge of
| | 02:08 | the railing, at the edge of the
staircase--and I'm going to move straight down.
| | 02:12 | And I'm just going to come down
about a foot and then come straight over.
| | 02:16 | I'm just going to line it up
roughly where this one is lined up at.
| | 02:20 | Now we're not going to get the blue
dashed line in this case, at least not most
| | 02:23 | likely, so just bring it up
close. We can clean it up later.
| | 02:27 | Next, I'm going to move up here, and I'm
just going to take this up to about the
| | 02:32 | 10 foot mark and click.
| | 02:36 | Now I'm going to make this
parking area be about 30 feet wide.
| | 02:40 | So come over 30 feet, hit Enter.
Now draw this back down, approximately 40
| | 02:49 | feet. We have a nice big site to play
with; we might as well have a nice big
| | 02:52 | parking area to use.
| | 02:54 | Now from here we're going to start a
roadway, and we're going to go down the
| | 02:58 | street in this direction.
| | 03:00 | I don't have an exact dimension for you.
I'm just going to come right over here
| | 03:03 | toward the edge and I'm just going
to click way over here at the edge.
| | 03:07 | Now this road is going to be not a
terribly wide road. I'm going to make it a 24-
| | 03:13 | foot-wide road, which is fairly standard.
| | 03:16 | So come down 24 feet, move directly
over, and do about the same thing that we
| | 03:21 | did over on the right-hand
side over here on the left.
| | 03:24 | So come just all the way over to the
edge, start to move up, come up to the 24-
| | 03:29 | foot mark, and come back around.
| | 03:34 | Now the exact point where we need to
move this to I know it's going to be lined
| | 03:37 | up with this. I don't have
a point that I can select.
| | 03:39 | So just to click on this line, drop it
down, and then we're going to use our
| | 03:45 | Trim/Extend tool, which is right up
here--so it's actually the Trim/Extend
| | 03:48 | Corner tool--and then we're going to
select on this line and this line to bring
| | 03:52 | this to the corner.
| | 03:54 | Now I do want to point out that there
is another option that we have here, and
| | 03:57 | that is, if we're going to be driving in,
you might need a little bit of an arc
| | 04:01 | here, so you don't keep
running right over the curb.
| | 04:03 | So in order to be able to accomplish
that, there's another tool here called the
| | 04:07 | Fillet Arc. And if you select on
Fillet Arc, you can type in a radius.
| | 04:12 | In this case I'll leave what it has my default as
being 5 foot 4 inches. If yours doesn't
| | 04:16 | you can type in 5 foot or 6 foot, just
make it a nice round radius, in my case.
| | 04:21 | Once againm it's 5' 4". I'm going to pick
on one line and then the next line, and
| | 04:26 | you can see how it
automatically will give it that radius.
| | 04:29 | Once all this is accomplished, we can
kind of eyeball, and we can see we have
| | 04:33 | our road, we have our parking area, and we
have our sidewalk leading up to our house.
| | 04:39 | Come back up here to the big green
check mark. If it gives you an error like
| | 04:43 | this, look for the orange-colored dots.
| | 04:47 | What it's trying to tell us is that this
isn't one complete line as you follow it around.
| | 04:52 | So come up here, select on the Linework
tool, click a line, click another line
| | 04:57 | right there. Now it should be one
continuous line if we follow it around.
| | 05:02 | And we'll know if we click on the big
green check mark, and if it creates the site.
| | 05:07 | Now that we're here, let's
take a look at this in 3D.
| | 05:09 | I'm going to rotate this around so
we can see it a little bit better.
| | 05:13 | Now I'd like this to connect at
least toward almost the very edge of our
| | 05:16 | site, so I'm going to pick on this point right
here and I'm going to select on Edit Boundary.
| | 05:21 | Now click on the individual purple line
and just pull it out to your right, near
| | 05:25 | the edge of your site, and do the
same thing down here at the other end.
| | 05:29 | It doesn't have to be perfect but just
get it close, and now come up here to the
| | 05:33 | big green check mark in
order to finish that off.
| | 05:36 | One last thing: I don't want this to be
a dirt road, so I'm just going to select
| | 05:40 | on this material, I'm going to move
over here, and where it says Material, and
| | 05:45 | it says By Category, click in that box
and click on this little symbol here.
| | 05:49 | It's going to bring up our Materials dialog box.
| | 05:52 | Look for the word Site - Asphalt.
So click on OK, click off of it.
| | 05:59 | Now you can see it's gray instead of
the green or the brown that it was before.
| | 06:04 | Now we're not going to worry too much
about adding curbs to this at the moment
| | 06:08 | or doing any of that kind of more
advanced site work. What we want to do in this
| | 06:13 | case is just communicate the design
so it will look okay in Plan view,
| | 06:17 | and so if we're going to place
cameras in here, which we did earlier on,
| | 06:20 | everything is going to look nice if
we're looking at this in the 3D View or in
| | 06:24 | a rendered elevation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding plants| 00:00 | While not always required in your
construction documents, adding plants is a
| | 00:04 | good way to get a sense of scale and
feeling for how your building is going to
| | 00:07 | look when it's completed.
| | 00:09 | We will find our plants
underneath the Home tab, here, and Component.
| | 00:13 | Now, before we end up placing these
plants, I kind of like doing this inside
| | 00:17 | of a Site Plan view as well, because
if we do this inside of the First Floor
| | 00:21 | Plan view, we may or may not be able to
see those plants depending on just how
| | 00:25 | tall that they are.
| | 00:26 | So I am going to move into the Site
Plan view, and we can start placing
| | 00:30 | our plants from here.
| | 00:32 | Once again, underneath Home tab, we
can come up here to Component, and over
| | 00:37 | here we will have, underneath Properties, our
different types of objects that we can insert in.
| | 00:42 | Now, I am going to come over here to
Electrical Panel, which isn't what we want
| | 00:46 | obviously, and we are going to
start to look for our different plants.
| | 00:51 | In this case, I believe they are
going to be either a Shrub or a Tree.
| | 00:55 | And it says it's an RPC Shrub.
| | 00:58 | Now, whenever you see the letters RPC
with anything related to this sort of
| | 01:03 | thing inside of Revit, or really any
kind of rendering program, it indicates an
| | 01:07 | object that when it comes time to render it,
it's going to look like the actual object.
| | 01:12 | So if this was a person,
it would look like a real human being.
| | 01:15 | In this case there are trees and shrubs, they
are going to look like real trees and shrubs.
| | 01:20 | It's actually taken off of images of
real tree, shrubs, plants, so when it comes
| | 01:25 | time to render, it will look right.
| | 01:27 | But they may look a little bit odd when
we first place them in, and we will see
| | 01:30 | that here in just a second.
| | 01:31 | Now, the first thing we need to
place in is going to be some trees.
| | 01:35 | So I am going to select on
these Red Ash 25' tall trees.
| | 01:39 | Now, the reality of it is is that
trees, any kind of planting, will
| | 01:44 | automatically try to host themselves to the
site that you are getting ready to drop them on.
| | 01:48 | So the level really isn't a critical item here.
| | 01:52 | You could place them pretty much
at any level and they would be okay.
| | 01:55 | One thing that I am going to do
though is I am going to change this Offset
| | 01:59 | value, and the Offset value that I'm
going to make this will be a -4 inches.
| | 02:05 | Now, the reasoning behind that is is
that we do have a slope site, and as the
| | 02:09 | site slopes down, the bushes, trees
won't necessarily always twist themselves or
| | 02:16 | go along that slope; they
will always try to stand up.
| | 02:19 | Now, usually that's a good thing.
Unfortunately it also means we might see their
| | 02:22 | base kind of hovering above
the ground just a little bit
| | 02:25 | if the site continues to slope down
below where the bottom of the trunk or
| | 02:30 | branches of wherever else should be at.
| | 02:32 | So by putting them at -4 inches,
it drops them down just enough that you can't
| | 02:36 | tell that they are lower than what
they should be, but at the same time they
| | 02:40 | will follow the contour of the site and
look right when it comes time to render.
| | 02:45 | So I am going to move over here and
I am going to place my first tree.
| | 02:50 | Now, the exact location on
this isn't going to be critical.
| | 02:53 | In fact, if there's going to be a
time where I am going to recommend, "feel
| | 02:56 | free, have a little bit of fun with this
project," this would be the exercise to do it in.
| | 03:00 | Now, I am going to move over here,
and I am just going to draw in my first
| | 03:03 | tree right about this location. You can see
I am roughly 24 feet away from my building.
| | 03:09 | And I am going to actually do spacing
that's probably pretty close to that,
| | 03:13 | probably every 20, 25 feet on the tree.
| | 03:16 | Now, in order to do that and know that I
am spacing it roughly equal, I am going
| | 03:20 | to get out of the command, select on
the tree, and then I am going to use our
| | 03:23 | Copy command. And you will remember
the Copy command, to always click on the
| | 03:27 | multiple so you can do this multiple times.
| | 03:30 | Now, pick a base point and then move
over in this direction. You could do 24,
| | 03:34 | 25. I am going to type in 23 feet,
and I'm going to add a couple more here.
| | 03:41 | Now, this is going to look good if
you're going to be looking at the building
| | 03:44 | going down the street, and we actually
have a Camera view already that will make
| | 03:47 | this look really nice, and we
will see that here in just a moment.
| | 03:51 | Now that we have our trees in, let's
add some other smaller bushes and shrubs
| | 03:57 | around the perimeter of our building.
| | 03:58 | I am going to zoom out a little bit
and zoom back in, so that I have the
| | 04:03 | building a little bit more centered.
| | 04:05 | Next, I'm going to move back up, click
on Component, and we are going to pick
| | 04:11 | one of these other things off of the list.
| | 04:13 | In this case, I am going to pick this 5
foot Prairie Dropseed and we'll go ahead
| | 04:18 | and try to place this in.
| | 04:21 | Now, I am just going to move it and
place it right about in this location. And
| | 04:25 | we can always tweak it after the fact,
so wherever you place it, it doesn't
| | 04:29 | really matter too much.
| | 04:30 | One thing's first though: remember to
always do this -4 inches for the Offset.
| | 04:34 | If you don't right now, it's not a
problem; you can always select them after the
| | 04:38 | fact and then just adjust it. Say it
has a -4 Offset. It will automatically
| | 04:42 | lower itself and be in the right place.
| | 04:44 | So I am going to move it over to here,
place it roughly in this location here.
| | 04:48 | I am going to do another one over
here by the other corner of my building.
| | 04:53 | In fact, I will just pull this one away,
just a tiny bit, so it gives us some
| | 04:59 | room between the porch
and where that's located at.
| | 05:03 | Now I am going to add in a couple of
more shrubs, but this is going to be a
| | 05:06 | different kind; it's going to be our hollies.
| | 05:08 | So I am going to select on Holly.
| | 05:10 | I am going to try to line
it up with this other one.
| | 05:12 | It doesn't have to be perfect once again.
| | 05:15 | Once you get it right in that area, go
ahead and click. And I am going to try to
| | 05:18 | line it up with this one over here as well.
| | 05:20 | Now, I actually like the look of this
bush, so when we're doing this, I'm going
| | 05:25 | to add a few that comes down the side
here and a few that kind of block off the
| | 05:30 | end of our driveway. And it's going to
be a nice barrier, if you will, so we are
| | 05:33 | not going to have cars driving off the
end of the driveway and trying to drive
| | 05:36 | down the hill. It will be a
nice visual for that as well.
| | 05:39 | So we are just going to move over here,
I am going to click, and just place four
| | 05:44 | or five. I think we will get
about four in here just fine.
| | 05:47 | Once you have a few of those in,
let's place about six of them just going
| | 05:53 | straight down the side of our building here.
| | 05:55 | So I am just going to come over here,
click once, so that I can get it in a
| | 05:59 | straight line coming down here.
| | 06:01 | I am going to select on it, click on
Copy, make sure that Multiple has a check
| | 06:05 | mark in it, pick a base point,
and I'm going to copy it--
| | 06:09 | I am just sort of eyeballing it may be
every 7 feet or so, every 6 foot 6, so
| | 06:15 | somewhere in that area.
That should be good enough.
| | 06:19 | You can see that even if I'm getting
a half an inch off, I am not going to
| | 06:23 | complain too much about it.
| | 06:24 | If you do want to make the spacing
perfectly, you can always just type it in
| | 06:27 | and say 7 foot or 6 foot 6 or whatever
spacing you want on that, and it will
| | 06:32 | start to place them in.
| | 06:35 | Remember that it is going to
continue to try to host itself to the grade.
| | 06:40 | One last thing: if you didn't add that
Offset in for these other bushes, I'll
| | 06:44 | point out that you can always just hold
down your Ctrl key, move along, select
| | 06:49 | any of these shrubs that we just placed
in, and then change that Offset value to
| | 06:53 | be -4 inches, and it will
automatically drop them down.
| | 06:56 | Now let's go ahead and take a look at this
in a 3D view so we know what we have so far.
| | 07:00 | You can see that we now have our
bushes coming straight down here.
| | 07:06 | They don't look very pretty in this view,
but when it comes time to render, they
| | 07:09 | are going to look just like the actual trees.
| | 07:11 | Rotate this around.
| | 07:12 | I can see that this one might be
getting just slightly in the way of my stairs
| | 07:17 | here. That being the case, I can just
click on it, and you can use the arrow
| | 07:21 | keys on your keyboard to move them
frontward, backwards, and side to side.
| | 07:26 | That's once again your Nudge command,
so select on an object and use the
| | 07:30 | arrow keys on your keyboard to get
things exactly where you like it.
| | 07:33 | You can even look at it from the front.
A quick way from this 3D View to look
| | 07:37 | at it from the front is select on
Front here on the View cube, you can zoom
| | 07:40 | back, and you can see where each of these
plants are located at the front of your building.
| | 07:47 | So if you want to be able to place
plants in, easy things to remember.
| | 07:50 | Try to do it in the Site view, because
it's going to make it be easy to see.
| | 07:54 | You can always find your plants
underneath Components up here.
| | 07:57 | And it's not a bad idea to add an Offset
value if you know your site is going to
| | 08:01 | be sloping down in any direction.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
16. Presentations and RenderingsExploring dynamic renderings| 00:00 | Renderings are the visual tools we use
to communicate our designs, and those are
| | 00:05 | always accomplished by using a 3D view.
| | 00:08 | Now if we come up here, we can see
that we have a 3D View button up here.
| | 00:12 | We've been pushing this button quite a
few times over the course of our project.
| | 00:16 | Now we can render any 3D view
created by this 3D View button.
| | 00:20 | Also, underneath the View tab there's 3D View.
| | 00:24 | If you come down here and place a
camera inside of the space or on the outside
| | 00:28 | of the space, you can also render those views.
| | 00:31 | In fact, those are my favorite
types of views to do renderings from.
| | 00:34 | They show up things of
perspective really well, and they make real,
| | 00:38 | lifelike-looking views.
| | 00:40 | Now we already have a few examples of
those kinds of views that we've created
| | 00:44 | earlier in the project, and that is,
underneath our 3D views here we have such
| | 00:49 | things as our Exterior North Elevation,
our Exterior Street View of the House.
| | 00:55 | We also have the Interior
Kitchen and Dining Room view.
| | 00:59 | Each of these was created just using
the little 3D camera, placing it in there
| | 01:04 | and looking in that direction.
| | 01:07 | Let's get a better idea as to
what these actually are doing.
| | 01:10 | I am going to go ahead and close down
these views right here, and let's take a
| | 01:15 | look at what those views
look like when they're rendered.
| | 01:17 | I am going to come down to a rendering
and these renderings are contained in all
| | 01:22 | of the rest of the exercises that
we're going to be doing from here on out.
| | 01:25 | I didn't include them in our main
exercise here because I'd like you to do
| | 01:29 | those renderings after you
have a chance to look at them.
| | 01:32 | This happens to be the rendering for the
interior of our kitchen and dining-room area.
| | 01:37 | You can see how we have lights coming
in through the windows. It's reflecting
| | 01:41 | off of the ground here, here in the kitchen.
| | 01:43 | We can reflections here against the cabinetry.
| | 01:47 | In an earlier exercise, I made a really
big deal about getting the countertops
| | 01:51 | right and making sure that the
sink was placed right in the hole.
| | 01:55 | The reason is, is I knew when it
finally came time to look at this, we want to
| | 01:59 | make sure that the countertop wasn't
going through the sink. And we can see in
| | 02:02 | this case, it rendered out just perfectly.
| | 02:06 | Over here we have the light and we can
see how the light is casting its light up,
| | 02:10 | and it's reflecting off of the ceiling up above.
| | 02:14 | Because of this level of detail and
the light reflecting in all directions,
| | 02:18 | doing renderings can take some time.
| | 02:21 | At the lowest-level settings it can
take a few seconds; at the best-level
| | 02:24 | settings it can take hours
and hours and hours to do.
| | 02:28 | The longest rendering it took me to
do was somewhere in the 14 to 16 hour
| | 02:33 | range, and the reason why it took that
long to do is because I had, I believe it
| | 02:38 | was in the 150 to 200 lights on the
inside of this building, and it was a
| | 02:43 | nighttime scene, and we had all of
these lights and reflections coming off the
| | 02:47 | surfaces of the building.
| | 02:49 | Let's take a look at a
couple of more renders here.
| | 02:54 | This one right here, this is
the Exterior North Elevation View.
| | 02:59 | So we're looking at the back of the building.
| | 03:01 | We can see that staircase that we
developed on the inside, as well as the deck
| | 03:05 | that we created with the stairs coming down.
| | 03:09 | This view here, we are looking
down the street at our building.
| | 03:12 | This is that Exterior Street View of
home that I opened up just a moment ago.
| | 03:17 | This also contains all of the different bushes,
the trees that we placed in the exercises.
| | 03:22 | You can see the gutters.
| | 03:24 | If you look really close, you can start
to tell that these are the fascia boards
| | 03:28 | that we placed in our exercises.
| | 03:30 | In short, everything we've done up to
this point had a purpose, not just to be
| | 03:35 | showing up in a set of construction
documents, but so it will look nice,
| | 03:39 | realistic when we looked at
it inside of a rendered view.
| | 03:42 | And let's get back into our actual project here.
| | 03:46 | So I am back in 16_01_Renderings,
and we are going to take a look here at our
| | 03:51 | First Floor plan. And in this space we
had ended up placing the camera, and we
| | 03:57 | clicked here and we placed
it out into this direction.
| | 04:00 | That view was the 3D view of
Interior Kitchen and Dining.
| | 04:05 | We just saw this view rendered, and I
was commenting about the light coming in
| | 04:08 | and reflecting off of the floor.
| | 04:11 | That was rendered by coming down to the
little teapot tool, and that was done at
| | 04:15 | a high level of detail.
| | 04:17 | If you would click Render now, you
would start rendering and your final product
| | 04:22 | should look practically identical to the
image you just saw, if not identical to it.
| | 04:27 | There are other settings that are available.
| | 04:29 | Draft will do it at a
really low level of detail,
| | 04:33 | Best at the high level of
detail, but it will be very slow.
| | 04:37 | We have our different lighting schemes.
| | 04:39 | I usually like to do anything
Interior as Sun and Artificial.
| | 04:43 | It takes longer, but we get the sun
coming in through the windows as well as the
| | 04:47 | artificial light being cast from our
light fixtures that we installed with
| | 04:51 | accurate glare coming off of them.
| | 04:54 | Underneath here, we have Artificial only.
| | 04:57 | That would be a nighttime scene.
| | 04:59 | If you wanted to do exterior nighttime scenes,
Artificial only Exterior isn't a bad choice.
| | 05:06 | Also if you wanted to do a daytime scene,
actually I usually recommend this Exterior:
| | 05:10 | Sun only. You are not going to be able to see
the light fixtures on too much inside of
| | 05:14 | your house anyway if you're standing on
the outside and it's during the day.
| | 05:18 | So that's what I usually use.
| | 05:21 | As far as the Backgrounds go,
I usually use No Clouds or Few Clouds:
| | 05:26 | Few Clouds if I want a little bit of
character in sky, No Clouds if I want to
| | 05:30 | have a nice blue sunny sky.
| | 05:32 | My favorite one though is Image.
| | 05:34 | If I have an actual picture of the site,
then I'll take that picture of the site
| | 05:38 | and paste it into the background.
| | 05:41 | By doing that, we'll be able to see them
through your windows and through your doors.
| | 05:47 | Adjust Exposure, you can always use Adjust Exposure
after this scene has been rendered.
| | 05:52 | For instance, if I come up here to
Draft and click on Render, in just a few
| | 05:57 | moments, we're going to see a pixelated
image start to come across our screen.
| | 06:01 | Now it's going to do a couple of passes
here, so the first time that we look at
| | 06:05 | it, it's going to look really bad.
| | 06:07 | The second time when it comes back
across again, it's going to refine itself.
| | 06:11 | Just realize this is at a Draft level,
as opposed to that really nice level of
| | 06:15 | lighting that we were looking at
earlier. And you can see how much darker the
| | 06:19 | scene looks than the scene looked that
we saw rendered just at the start of this
| | 06:23 | exercise, because that one was fully
rendered at a high level of accuracy.
| | 06:30 | This doesn't, so it's
much darker and not as nice.
| | 06:34 | There are a few more
settings that you should know about.
| | 06:36 | First is Adjust Exposure.
| | 06:38 | We kind of mentioned it a second ago, but
I am going to go ahead and click on that.
| | 06:42 | By pulling the bars here, you can
make your scene wider and darker.
| | 06:45 | Take your time. Experiment with this.
| | 06:48 | See if you can find some settings that you like.
| | 06:52 | Click on Save to Project.
| | 06:53 | This will actually save that view to
your project environment, and it will show
| | 06:57 | up underneath the project
browser with the name that you give it.
| | 07:01 | Just realize the things are going to
go to be much bigger; your project is
| | 07:05 | going to be much bigger
| | 07:06 | if you do it this way. If you do three
or four of these images, that's okay.
| | 07:11 | If you do 40 or 50 of these images,
you're going to be adding 50, 60, may be more
| | 07:15 | MB to your project and it's
going to start slowing things down.
| | 07:20 | You also have Export here, and Export is
going to allow you to export it out to
| | 07:24 | any of these different formats.
| | 07:25 | I tend to use either this Portable
Network Graphics one, this PNG file, or the JPEG.
| | 07:32 | JPEG works really good if you want to
share it via email or if you want to
| | 07:35 | post it onto a web page.
| | 07:37 | One last thing that I am going to
mention is that you do have some
| | 07:40 | different settings here, as far as your
Artificial Lights, as well as your Sun Settings here.
| | 07:46 | If you click on these buttons here,
this is going to allow you to change the
| | 07:50 | position that the sun is in the sky.
| | 07:52 | If you use these settings, you can click
on things like Still or Single Day and
| | 07:57 | tell it that you want it to be this
day of the week, this time of year, and it
| | 08:02 | will render on the inside of
your building using those settings.
| | 08:06 | Also, if we select on Artificial
Lights here, if you wanted to have entire
| | 08:12 | groups of lights turned off, you could
just click little check boxes there, and an
| | 08:16 | entire series of lights will
shut off inside of your house.
| | 08:20 | If this is set to anything other than
one, like .5, .4, .3, it will dim the
| | 08:26 | lights on the inside of your space to
reflect whatever that particular wodge
| | 08:31 | would happen to be there that puts
percentage dimmer that it would need to be.
| | 08:34 | So, you have a lot of control on how
your rendering is going to look, just based
| | 08:40 | on the settings from the
Render Properties dialog box.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating floor plans for presentations| 00:00 | Most people have difficulties reading
the normal set of construction documents,
| | 00:04 | so it's always good to create a
presentation floor plan for them to be able to
| | 00:08 | more easily visualize the
floor plan layout of their home.
| | 00:11 | In order to accomplish this, come
underneath the Project Browser over here on the
| | 00:15 | left-hand side, select on, in this case,
First Floor, right-click, and come up
| | 00:21 | here to where it has Duplicate View.
And what we're going to do is we're going
| | 00:24 | to make a duplicate of this view.
| | 00:26 | So select on Duplicate here, and you
can see when we did that it automatically
| | 00:30 | removed some of the information
that was inside of the floor plan.
| | 00:34 | Now, most of the stuff that it got rid
of is actually very good. We didn't need
| | 00:38 | to see some of the dimensions and
notes and anything it might take to
| | 00:41 | construct the building.
| | 00:43 | Mostly what we just need to be able to
see are our walls, our cabinets, and be
| | 00:47 | able to describe what each of these things are.
| | 00:49 | Now, we still have a few things in
here that we don't need in order to
| | 00:52 | create this kind of plan.
| | 00:54 | The first thing is going to be these
symbols right here, which are our section symbols.
| | 00:59 | So if we just click on one, we can come
down here to our Temporary Hide/Isolate
| | 01:03 | command, which looks like a little set
of eyeglasses down here. Let me go ahead
| | 01:07 | and make sure this is selected.
| | 01:08 | So make sure the entire thing is blue, click
on the eyeglasses, and then hide the category.
| | 01:14 | When you do that, you'll see that
the two section symbols are now gone.
| | 01:19 | We need to do that same thing now with
their Elevation tags here in the middle.
| | 01:23 | So I'm going to zoom in here,
select on an Elevation tag, click on the
| | 01:28 | little eyeglasses down here at the
bottom, and I'm going to hide that
| | 01:31 | category of object.
| | 01:32 | Before I get too far out, I do want
to point out that we have nice dark
| | 01:36 | lines going around our walls, but
our walls are currently kind of empty-
| | 01:40 | looking; they're clear.
| | 01:42 | And sometimes that's okay, but other
times we'd like those walls to pop out so
| | 01:46 | it's really obvious that this is a room
or this other space is a room and this
| | 01:50 | is where the separation of those things are at.
| | 01:52 | In order to accomplish that, you'll find
that your walls have certain properties
| | 01:55 | associated with them.
| | 01:57 | Now, if we zoom in here and pick on any
of the walls, come up here to Edit Type,
| | 02:01 | underneath the Properties of the Wall,
| | 02:03 | you'll see there is an
option here called Graphics.
| | 02:06 | Now, if you pick here where it has Solid
fill, you'll see that there's a variety
| | 02:11 | of different kinds of patterns inside of here.
| | 02:14 | And the one that I've chosen is Solid fill;
| | 02:17 | this is going to give the
wall a nice solid dark look.
| | 02:21 | There's Coarse Scale Fill Color. This is
what color do you want this pattern to be?
| | 02:28 | In this case I want them to be Black.
| | 02:29 | If yours doesn't say Black, go ahead
and click on it and choose the Black color
| | 02:34 | off of the list. Or if you'd like it to
be a different color, feel free to choose
| | 02:38 | a different color off of the list and
your walls will be that color when we
| | 02:40 | finish this project.
| | 02:42 | Go ahead and click on OK to that.
| | 02:45 | Once it's Solid fill on Black,
click OK one more time.
| | 02:48 | Just because we did that didn't
automatically, one, make all the walls dark;
| | 02:53 | in fact, that wall we
just selected is still light.
| | 02:55 | The first thing you'll need to do is
anytime there's a different wall type,
| | 02:58 | different wall style, you need to
select on that wall, come back to the wall
| | 03:02 | type, and make sure it has Solid fill
and that color associated with it as well;
| | 03:07 | if not, it will stay white.
| | 03:10 | But there is a special word in here
that I've been kind of overlooking, and
| | 03:14 | that's the word Coarse.
| | 03:16 | This comes down to if this is
at a coarse level of detail.
| | 03:19 | Now, you can set the coarse level of
detail by--and I'm just going to click on
| | 03:24 | OK for this, and OK out of the dialog--
| | 03:27 | the coarse level of detail is
right here down by your Scale.
| | 03:30 | So if you click on this box right here
and change it to Coarse, anytime that's
| | 03:35 | set to Coarse, those wall styles will
automatically turn nice and dark, and it
| | 03:41 | really pops this presentation out,
pops these walls out, and makes it easy to
| | 03:44 | be able to see things.
| | 03:46 | It's very easy to see where our staircase is,
where the wall surrounding or kitchen are at.
| | 03:50 | We can see where each space is located.
| | 03:54 | But there's one thing I'd still like to
do, because it's very difficult to say.
| | 03:58 | Now go to the dining room if you don't
know which of these spaces is the dining room.
| | 04:02 | So what we need to do is we need
to put a tag into these spaces.
| | 04:06 | To do that, we're going to come
underneath the Annotate tab, move over, and
| | 04:11 | there's an option here that's called Tag All.
| | 04:13 | Go ahead and click on Tag All.
| | 04:15 | Now, the kind of tag that we want to
place in here is called a Room Tag.
| | 04:19 | So just highlight the word Room Tag by
clicking once and coming down here and click on OK.
| | 04:25 | It's now going to automatically place
a tag every place that we have a room
| | 04:30 | inside of this space.
| | 04:32 | As a result, you can see we now have a
nice Room Tag here for the great room, the
| | 04:35 | bedroom, the closet, and
all of our different spaces.
| | 04:39 | Now, if you go and print this off on a
regular printer, it's going to look just fine.
| | 04:44 | One other thing that we need to do
first though: come down here to your little
| | 04:47 | eyeglasses, and apply the
Hide/Isolate to the view.
| | 04:51 | That's going to ensure that all those
other things are still turned off when it
| | 04:55 | comes time to print.
| | 04:56 | And finally, it's never a bad idea to
rename this view as something that you can
| | 05:01 | identify and come back to later.
| | 05:03 | In this case I'd like to
rename it Presentation Plan.
| | 05:06 | So highlight on it, right-click, and
then we're going to go, come up to Rename
| | 05:11 | to rename the view. And I'm just
going to name it Presentation Plan.
| | 05:17 | Click on OK.
| | 05:20 | And you can do this again and again by
simply just selecting on the floor plan
| | 05:24 | you want to be able to create a
presentation plan for, right-clicking,
| | 05:29 | duplicating the view, clicking on
Duplicate, and then changing the walls so that
| | 05:34 | they have a nice solid dark fill, and
finally, changing that level of detail
| | 05:39 | down to a Coarse level of detail.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
17. Sheets and CDsCreating standard sheets| 00:00 | Now we need to create our
sheets and borders for our project.
| | 00:04 | While we won't create every sheet
required to build a home, the same process you
| | 00:07 | see in this video can be used to
create the rest of your required documents.
| | 00:12 | To begin with, we're going to come
up underneath the View tab up here on
| | 00:15 | the Ribbon and we're going to look for Sheet,
and that can be found over in Sheet Composition.
| | 00:20 | So click on Sheet and it's going to
ask, what title block do you want to use?
| | 00:26 | So we only have one currently loaded into our
project, so just pick that one and click on OK.
| | 00:31 | When we did that, you'll see that
underneath the Project Browser over here on
| | 00:34 | the left-hand side, we now have a new
category, and it's going to be Sheets.
| | 00:38 | If you click on the little plus sign next to it,
you can see we have A503 and it says Unnamed.
| | 00:44 | That's the same information that we
can find in our title blocks over here.
| | 00:49 | Now one of things that I would like to
do is set up the rest of our project, and
| | 00:53 | that's going to require us
to have eight sheets in total.
| | 00:56 | So to accomplish that, I'm going to
come back up here, I'm going to click on
| | 01:00 | Sheet, and I'm going to click OK
each time that that dialog box comes up.
| | 01:06 | Now we're going to continue to do this
and ultimately, we're going to want to
| | 01:10 | have eight different sheets here.
| | 01:13 | So just keep clicking until you have
eight different ones listed underneath your
| | 01:17 | project browser, over
there on the left-hand side.
| | 01:22 | Once you get to the point where you
have all the sheets that you need, we're
| | 01:25 | going to come back and we're going to
rename these sheets so they're going to be
| | 01:28 | ready to go to have information placed on them.
| | 01:32 | In order to rename a sheet, you simply
move over to where the sheet is located
| | 01:36 | at in the Project Browser, you can
right-click on that name, and there's an
| | 01:41 | option there that says Rename.
| | 01:43 | If you select on Rename, we can rename it.
| | 01:46 | In this instance, I'm going to rename
it 001. For the Name, call it Cover.
| | 01:52 | Make sure that whenever you're going
to place the name, you do it on the next
| | 01:55 | line down, because it's going to fill in
that information appropriately inside of
| | 02:00 | the title block over here on the side.
| | 02:02 | In order to better illustrate that,
let's go ahead and rename this A510 Unnamed,
| | 02:08 | which is currently up on my screen.
| | 02:10 | If you have a different one on your
screen, pick that one underneath the Project
| | 02:14 | Browser and go through this process.
| | 02:16 | For this one, I want to name this one
A101 Site, and there's really two different
| | 02:21 | ways we can go about doing it.
| | 02:23 | The first way is by right-clicking on
that title, going to Rename, and naming
| | 02:27 | this A101 and then putting
in the information of Site.
| | 02:34 | As soon as you click on OK, if you
take a look over here at that information
| | 02:38 | in your title block, you'll see that
it automatically updates to what we
| | 02:42 | called it over here.
| | 02:43 | Now there is another option that we have.
| | 02:45 | The other option is if you just double-
click in order to open up that view, you
| | 02:50 | can zoom in on your title block.
| | 02:52 | From here, you can click on the title
block itself. You may need to click one
| | 02:57 | more time to click on the text,
which is the actual name of the view.
| | 03:01 | And in this case, we're going
to create a foundation sheet.
| | 03:04 | So you can go ahead and type in
"Foundation" once you click on that text.
| | 03:08 | You can click out in space
in order to set that name.
| | 03:12 | You can come back in here. And in this case,
we're going to give this a number of A201.
| | 03:16 | So you can change that information
the same way that we just did up above.
| | 03:21 | Let's do that same thing
here with our next sheet.
| | 03:24 | So just pick one of the
Unnamed sheets that we created.
| | 03:27 | The next one needs to be a first floor plan.
| | 03:31 | So zoom in here, click where we have the--in
this case, A505, and we're going to name this A301.
| | 03:41 | It is the first floor plan, so where
you see the word Unnamed, we're going to
| | 03:45 | just going to call this First Floor.
| | 03:47 | If you want to call it First
Floor Plan, you can do that as well.
| | 03:52 | Next, we have four more to do. One is
going to be for North and South Elevations.
| | 03:57 | For this one I'm going to come back
underneath our Project Browser so we don't
| | 04:00 | have to keep opening up these views.
| | 04:02 | I'm going to right-click.
I'm going to click on Rename again.
| | 04:05 | This is going to be A401.
| | 04:09 | Also, where we have the Name field, this is
just going to be North and South Elevations.
| | 04:14 | We're going to do a second sheet, one
that's going to be following this one up, and
| | 04:22 | it's going to be A402.
| | 04:25 | All of our elevations are
going to be in the 400 series.
| | 04:28 | So I'm going to come down here and
pick on another one of the Renames. We're
| | 04:32 | going to rename, and this is going to be A402,
and it's going to be East and West Elevations.
| | 04:47 | Now we only have two more to go.
One is going to be for our wall sections.
| | 04:51 | So I'm just going to select on
that, Rename. This will be a 501,
| | 04:55 | so A501, and it'll be Wall Section.
| | 04:59 | Make sure to drop that down to the
next line and type in "Wall Sections."
| | 05:07 | And just to show it I'm going to go
ahead and double-click on A509, bring that
| | 05:12 | sheet up, and I'm just going to
rename it here inside of the title block.
| | 05:15 | So once again, select on the title block.
| | 05:18 | If you ever see these question marks in
the title block, it means that this is
| | 05:21 | just looking for information and it
just currently hasn't been filled in yet.
| | 05:27 | Once that information would be filled in,
it'll automatically populate on the title block.
| | 05:31 | So go ahead and select on Unnamed,
type in Standard Details for the name, and
| | 05:41 | change this number to be A502.
| | 05:45 | So while this process takes a little while,
it's really pretty painless and quick.
| | 05:50 | All you have to do is remember to
create a new sheet, come up here to the View
| | 05:54 | tab, click on Sheet, and then click
the appropriate title block and it'll
| | 05:58 | automatically insert it in.
| | 06:00 | You want to change the information?
You can either do that by coming over to the
| | 06:03 | Project Browser, right-clicking, and
then renaming it or changing its properties
| | 06:09 | and information, or just come right
to the title block itself and just
| | 06:13 | double-click inside of the space and
give it the appropriate names and info.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up standard sheets| 00:00 | Our next goal in this project is to
pull our views over onto our sheets.
| | 00:05 | In order to do that, first, you
obviously need to be onto a sheet, and in this
| | 00:08 | case I am on my Sheet A001.
| | 00:11 | If you are not already here,
make sure to just come down on your Project
| | 00:14 | Browser, look for Sheets, and
double-click on A001 to bring it up.
| | 00:19 | Next, we are going to place
General Notes here on the sheet.
| | 00:23 | In order to do that, come over,
find General Notes underneath your
| | 00:27 | Schedules/Quantities, highlight on it,
left-click, drag it over, and then just
| | 00:32 | place it up here in the upper
left-hand corner of our sheet.
| | 00:36 | I am going to zoom in here.
| | 00:39 | Here we can see our General Notes.
| | 00:41 | I will point out that if I would
double-click in here, add a new row, start
| | 00:46 | typing in more new General Notes--I am
going to click the x--then it would just
| | 00:50 | continue on, adding General Notes to
the bottom here, and it might go down off
| | 00:54 | the bottom of the sheet.
| | 00:56 | If that were to occur, you just select
on that particular schedule and click on
| | 01:00 | the little break symbol here.
| | 01:02 | By clicking on the break symbol,
it will break your General Notes up into
| | 01:05 | two different segments.
| | 01:07 | You can do this three, four,
however many times you need to.
| | 01:11 | But if you ever need to bring them
back together again, all you have to do is
| | 01:14 | click on the little control here, pull
it back, and once it's touching the spot
| | 01:19 | that you want it to join with, it
will automatically clean itself up again.
| | 01:23 | One other thing: it's actually fairly
common whenever you have General Notes, for
| | 01:28 | there not to be individual
lines on them underneath each other.
| | 01:32 | If you want it to look a little bit more
traditional, one of the things that you
| | 01:35 | can do here is you can come over here
to General Notes, highlight on it, come
| | 01:40 | here to your Formatting and Appearance,
and click on Edit next to Formatting.
| | 01:45 | Here we can see our Numbers, our Notes.
Which direction do you want it to be at?
| | 01:50 | Do you want it to be over to the Left,
do you want it to be Centered? And that's
| | 01:53 | what's controlled here with your Alignment.
| | 01:56 | We also have Appearance here. If we
don't want these lines showing up underneath
| | 01:59 | the General Notes, we can
always clear that check box.
| | 02:02 | If I would click OK to that, all these
lines would end up disappearing, and all
| | 02:06 | you would have is just Number, Notes,
and all the information without the line-
| | 02:10 | work going around the perimeter of it.
| | 02:13 | Point being, it's fairly easy to customize
these things once it has been put onto a sheet.
| | 02:19 | But for right now, I'm going to leave
it the way that it is, because I kind of
| | 02:22 | like the way that it's set up.
| | 02:24 | So next, I am going to come on to our
next sheet and it's going to be our A101
| | 02:28 | Sheet, and that's going
to be our Site Plan Sheet.
| | 02:32 | So double-click on A101, underneath your
Project Browser, and then pull your Site
| | 02:37 | Plan information on over.
| | 02:39 | Find your Site Plan underneath Floor
Plans up here, Site, just drag it over,
| | 02:45 | and then place it where you want it on the
sheet. Click for placement; it's pretty easy.
| | 02:52 | One thing that I will point out is if
for some reason if you didn't want this
| | 02:55 | box surrounding it, you wouldn't
necessarily have to have it. You can always
| | 02:59 | select on the View, come up here to
Activate View, and then you can come down
| | 03:04 | here at the bottom, and you now have
all your controls that you had when you
| | 03:08 | were originally drawing this
view back in the earlier projects.
| | 03:12 | The next thing you are going to do
though is you can come down and we can hide
| | 03:15 | this box, and to do that, we can Hide the
Crop Region, which shows up right here.
| | 03:20 | And if you click on that,
you see how the box goes away.
| | 03:23 | Next, if I like it the way that it
is, you can right-click and you can
| | 03:27 | deactivate the view.
| | 03:29 | So just right-click somewhere in the
space and Deactivate View, and then
| | 03:33 | you'll have your project.
| | 03:34 | You notice the border isn't around
there anymore, and it kind of is what it is.
| | 03:38 | You could always undo that as well if
you wanted that border to come back.
| | 03:42 | Next thing that we are going to do is
we are going to create another sheet,
| | 03:46 | which is going to be A201.
| | 03:49 | So let's look down here at A201.
| | 03:53 | And A201 is going to be our Foundation Plan.
| | 03:55 | So double-click on that, and we are
going to want to pull our foundation
| | 03:59 | information on over.
| | 04:01 | So come up here on the list. We are
going to find our Foundation Plan, which is
| | 04:05 | actually called Basement in this
case, and just drag it on over.
| | 04:10 | Place it over here on the right-hand side.
| | 04:12 | Now, if we needed to make any
adjustments to where this was located at, if we
| | 04:16 | wanted to move it up and move it down,
you could always move the title by
| | 04:19 | clicking on it, dragging it up,
dragging it down, and placing it in a more
| | 04:23 | appropriate location.
| | 04:25 | Another thing that you could do is
you can actually turn off this site
| | 04:29 | information that's surrounding this.
| | 04:31 | If you wanted to do that, then just
select here on the site, come up here to
| | 04:35 | Activate View, and once again, you're
inside of your view and you can work in
| | 04:39 | this like it was your normal project.
| | 04:41 | In this case, if I wanted to turn
off the site, I come over here near the
| | 04:45 | Visibility/Graphics, click on
Edit, come down to the bottom.
| | 04:49 | The Site information is already off--
that's the reason why we can't see our
| | 04:53 | trees that were placed into this view--
but if we turn off Topography, which
| | 04:57 | you'll remember there was a
Topography command that created the grain, we
| | 05:00 | can then click on OK, and you can
see that, that information has now been
| | 05:04 | removed from this View.
| | 05:06 | Now to get back to a drawing area,
meaning the actual Floor Plan View, go ahead
| | 05:11 | and right-click, and then we are
going to need to deactivate the view.
| | 05:15 | We can also select on this title, and
now we can move this up if you wish, so
| | 05:22 | it's better centered on our project.
| | 05:24 | Now let's go ahead and go to our A301 View.
| | 05:27 | We are going to come down here on our
Sheet list, look for A301. This is going
| | 05:32 | to be the First Floor Plan.
| | 05:34 | And in the First Floor Plan, well,
obviously we are going to have the first floor.
| | 05:38 | So come over, select on First Floor,
drag it over, place it where you want to. I
| | 05:43 | am going to place it a
little bit over toward the right.
| | 05:45 | Once you to get it just
the way that you like it,
| | 05:48 | we are also going to add some notes.
| | 05:50 | One of the things you might remember
that we did with our Basement, as well as
| | 05:53 | our First Floor, is we added some
notes for it, and those were schedules.
| | 05:58 | So we need to find those notes. In this
case here is our First Floor Notes, drag
| | 06:02 | it over, and place it up
here in the upper corner.
| | 06:06 | Just like I was mentioning earlier with
the General Notes, you can always select
| | 06:10 | on those. You can move them
around and adjust it accordingly.
| | 06:14 | But also, you can always highlight on
First Floor Notes over here on the side,
| | 06:18 | and then you could change its
formatting, its appearance so it looks the way
| | 06:22 | that you would like with the correct
fonts, linework, et cetera, by just
| | 06:27 | clicking on the Appearance >
Edit button over here at the side.
| | 06:31 | Few more pieces of information we need to add.
| | 06:33 | We had an enlarged Bathroom Plan, and
you can see that callout bubble right
| | 06:37 | here that created it.
| | 06:39 | Well, let's go ahead and drag
it out and pull it on this sheet.
| | 06:43 | So we are going to look for that
underneath our Floor Plan Views, I believe it is.
| | 06:47 | So let's just take a look
here and see what we have.
| | 06:50 | And it's this Callout of First Floor, so
pull it out and place it up here at the top.
| | 06:56 | We now have that view in here.
It's called Callout of First Floor.
| | 07:00 | I will point out one other piece of information.
| | 07:03 | If you select on the actual view itself,
you can then come in and click on the
| | 07:08 | title. So if you want to rename it
something like Enlarged Floor Plan, Enlarged
| | 07:11 | Bathroom Plan, by all means, you can.
| | 07:14 | I am going to leave it as Callout of
First Floor, so it's still obvious it's
| | 07:17 | referencing this view over here.
But if you want to be able to type that in
| | 07:21 | right now, you can, and it will work.
| | 07:23 | One other location that you can type
that in and it will automatically update
| | 07:27 | this information is if you select back
on the View, and then we take a look at
| | 07:32 | the Properties over here on the side,
one of the options here is Title on Sheet.
| | 07:37 | Title on Sheet is an override for the
name of the view, so any information you
| | 07:41 | enter in on Title on Sheet will
automatically update this title underneath your view.
| | 07:46 | I am going to come in and I am going to
drag in yet another view, and that view
| | 07:51 | is going to be this Interior
Elevation View we had of our bathroom.
| | 07:54 | So it's an Elevation View. We need to
find Elevations Interior on our list.
| | 08:01 | This one we can see says Elevation 1 - d,
so that's going to be the one we are
| | 08:06 | going to want to drag out onto our sheet.
Click on it, drag it out, line it up
| | 08:11 | where you want it to be.
| | 08:12 | You can rename this. If you wanted to
select on this overall view, you could then
| | 08:18 | click in here and you could rename
this to be MBath, Interior Elevation, or
| | 08:24 | anything that made sense to you.
| | 08:26 | Once again, I am going to leave the same so
we know that we are referencing this view.
| | 08:32 | One other thing to know though: because
we have been putting that information in,
| | 08:36 | it's automatically been
filling in information on our pages.
| | 08:39 | So let's go ahead and zoom in here on this
Bathroom, and you can see Detail 2 on A301.
| | 08:47 | If I zoom back, you can see this is A301.
And this is number 2, so it is in fact
| | 08:55 | corresponding to the appropriate
location over here on our floor plan.
| | 09:00 | Also, this Elevation tag now says A301.
| | 09:07 | Now, if we zoom in here, we can see
this is that same elevation, and if we look
| | 09:12 | down here, it's A301.
| | 09:14 | So all these tags are updating as soon as
we place the view on the appropriate sheet.
| | 09:20 | Now, I want to add one more thing.
| | 09:23 | You don't have to do these in any
specific order. If you wanted to go back to
| | 09:27 | one of your sheets and make
updates, that's fine; you can do that.
| | 09:30 | In the case of this example, we can come
back to our Foundation and we could add
| | 09:35 | those Basement Notes that were never
added, by just clicking, pulling up here,
| | 09:40 | and placing it in the proper location.
| | 09:42 | So you can come up here, click, move
stuff around, reorganize everything that's
| | 09:48 | on these sheets, and very quickly
produce a set of construction documents by
| | 09:53 | just clicking and dragging and dropping
those views into those proper locations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing| 00:00 | When we finally reach to the point
where we are ready to print our work, we'll
| | 00:03 | want to go to our Printer dialog box.
And we can find that Printer dialog
| | 00:07 | underneath the big R up here.
| | 00:09 | So go ahead and select on the
R, come down, and find Print.
| | 00:13 | Then move over and just select on Print.
| | 00:16 | It's going to bring up the Printer
dialog, and there are a few options to know.
| | 00:21 | One is is you'll want to select the
appropriate printer off of the list.
| | 00:26 | This is your office printer, taken
from your office Windows network.
| | 00:30 | The properties related to it over here, these
are from your printer drivers on your network.
| | 00:36 | They in no way are related to Revit proper.
| | 00:39 | These settings are going to be settings
you are going to need to set up so that
| | 00:41 | it's configured so it works for your printer.
| | 00:45 | The settings that Revit does control
are down here, and it's called Settings,
| | 00:50 | and currently, it's set as being Default.
| | 00:52 | But that information can be changed.
| | 00:54 | So if you select on the Setup button
down here, you'll notice that it has your
| | 00:58 | printer name, which is the same
one that was here originally.
| | 01:01 | There is a Default option here.
| | 01:04 | Now, this is the default print settings.
| | 01:07 | But you can save your own print settings
by coming over here and either clicking
| | 01:11 | on Save or Save As once you've made a change.
| | 01:16 | You can name that anything that you
want so that it makes sense so you can
| | 01:19 | reprint it with these settings again and again.
| | 01:22 | Underneath this dialog box, you can see that
we have such information as your paper sizes.
| | 01:28 | This too is pulled from your printer driver.
| | 01:30 | So if you see a paper size that isn't
there, you'll need to probably go into
| | 01:35 | your printer driver and reassign that
inside of there, and then when you bring
| | 01:38 | it up here inside of the Revit
settings, it'll show up on the list.
| | 01:43 | Orientation, where it's going to pull
the paper from. The Placement, whether or
| | 01:49 | not it's going to be in the center of
the page, or whether or not you want it to
| | 01:52 | be offset from a corner.
| | 01:53 | I personally like to offset my plots
from a corner. The reason is, that way I
| | 01:58 | always know the exact spot
that plot is going to be at.
| | 02:01 | So, all the borders will always align
up, and if I start through flip to the set,
| | 02:06 | everything is just going to be
lined up right on top of each other.
| | 02:10 | There's going to be Zoom.
| | 02:12 | The number one error that people make is
they forget to change this to Zoom 100%.
| | 02:18 | Zoom 100% will give you full-size
plots. Fit to page will usually get you
| | 02:23 | very close to full-size plots, but it
will be about 98-99% plot. So you'll
| | 02:29 | put in a scale to it and you'll
realize it's off by a sixteenth of an inch,
| | 02:33 | three thirty seconds of an inch, and
you'll wonder why. Always check Fit to
| | 02:37 | page because that's probably it.
| | 02:38 | A few other things, Vector Processing:
| | 02:42 | try it first; it's going to be faster.
| | 02:45 | Most people, it works just fine for.
| | 02:47 | I will point out though, that if you
start losing information, if it starts not
| | 02:53 | printing the way you'd expect, if you
see a line that starts drawing out and
| | 02:57 | there's a big gap in the middle of
that line and you see another end of that
| | 03:00 | line, it's probably because it's
having issues with it, and some of the older
| | 03:04 | printers had issues with this kind of
processing, and you might need to change
| | 03:08 | this back to a raster processing.
| | 03:11 | I used to work with a printer with
Revit and the E's in all of my sentences
| | 03:15 | would just disappear.
| | 03:16 | Everything else would show up fine
except for the letter E. Nobody has an
| | 03:20 | explanation for it, but if we change it to
the other processing, it would just work.
| | 03:25 | Appearance, it's pretty self-explanatory.
| | 03:28 | I usually do everything on High.
| | 03:29 | I haven't found a huge difference in
speed, and High usually looks pretty good.
| | 03:36 | You could try it, and depending on your
plotter, it can make a difference or it
| | 03:39 | might not make much of a
difference at all. Colors:
| | 03:43 | I usually do either black lines of color.
| | 03:46 | I avoid grayscale, because
grayscale prints stuff in a series of grays.
| | 03:50 | It's sort of like if you took a color
photograph and took it through a black-and-
| | 03:54 | white copy machine, it may look okay,
but more than likely, you get some
| | 03:59 | muddiness in there, and it
doesn't turn out all that well.
| | 04:02 | Once again, it kind of depends on
your plotter as well, but I usually
| | 04:05 | recommend either black lines or color,
depending on what kind of end result
| | 04:10 | that you are looking for.
| | 04:12 | The options down here at the
bottom, you can read over those.
| | 04:15 | Just know that if anything starts to
print that you're not expecting to have
| | 04:19 | print, there's a good chance that one
of the settings down here in the options
| | 04:23 | probably get changed, and you just need
to be able to change that so such things
| | 04:27 | as your crop boxes and other
things inside of Revit no longer print.
| | 04:35 | If you want to save these settings,
you can come up here to save, and you will
| | 04:38 | give it a default name, and then it'll be
available on the list from that point on.
| | 04:42 | I am going to go ahead and click on OK to this.
| | 04:45 | One other thing to know is the
options underneath Print Range here.
| | 04:50 | By the way, I'll also point
out that you have File available,
| | 04:53 | sSo if you need to print to a file, you can.
| | 04:54 | I'll come back down here to Print Range.
There are three different options.
| | 04:59 | one is Current Window.
| | 05:01 | If you select Current Window, it will
print everything in the current window.
| | 05:05 | In this instance if I clicked on Current
Window, it would print everything that we see here.
| | 05:11 | If I zoomed in really tight so all we
would see is the bathroom, it would still
| | 05:15 | print everything that we are
currently seeing on the screen,
| | 05:19 | not just the bathroom,
but everything that's there.
| | 05:23 | On the other hand, Visible Portion
of current window will print just what
| | 05:27 | you see on the screen.
| | 05:28 | So even if you have all this other
stuff available, if the only thing you
| | 05:33 | could see on the screen is that bathroom,
that will be the only thing that would print.
| | 05:37 | One trick that you should know is
if you wanted to print just a certain
| | 05:41 | window around an object, then one of
the things that you can do is you can
| | 05:45 | minimize this view, you can pull it
down, and then just get the view so that only
| | 05:50 | that little part is in it.
| | 05:53 | Once you just have that part inside of
the view, you can always come back up to
| | 05:58 | your printing settings, and you can
print the visible portion of the current
| | 06:02 | window and it will just print that
little section, and you can go on and mark it
| | 06:07 | up and show other people.
| | 06:09 | Now, the last thing that we are going
to talk about is Selected views/sheets,
| | 06:12 | probably the most powerful
thing inside of the program really.
| | 06:16 | If I come in here and I select on the
Select button, you have some options here.
| | 06:21 | Right now it's showing all of
our sheets and all of our views.
| | 06:23 | If I clear that out, we have our sheets.
| | 06:27 | Now, by putting little checks next to each of
these, now this is going to be my selection set.
| | 06:34 | It would only print these sheets,
anything that has a check mark next to it.
| | 06:38 | You could do a mix of views and sheets.
| | 06:42 | Whenever that's done, you can either
click on OK and then OK again in order to
| | 06:46 | print just those sheets or if you
know that you are going to need that
| | 06:49 | selection set again--maybe you are
going to be having this house go out for
| | 06:53 | bids; you're going to need to print
those views again and again and again--
| | 06:57 | you can come up here, click on Save As,
give it a name, and when you do, it will
| | 07:02 | end up showing up here in the pulldown list.
| | 07:05 | Then it would just be a matter of
clicking on that anytime that you wanted to
| | 07:08 | print those specific sheets.
They'd automatically get the check marks. You'd click on OK.
| | 07:13 | I am going to click No to that. Then
you click on OK, and then it would just
| | 07:18 | be ready to print, and it would tell
you the name of that--whatever it is you
| | 07:22 | called it with all of those sheets--and
it would be ready to print. Click on OK
| | 07:25 | and it will send all those sheets to
the printer, printed exactly the way that
| | 07:30 | you wanted, based on the settings
from underneath Settings and Setup.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | I want to thank you for taking these
courses today here on lynda.com and if you
| | 00:04 | have any interest, I also have a
LinkedIn group called Revit Users.
| | 00:08 | So just type in Revit Users on LinkedIn,
and you should find my LinkedIn group.
| | 00:12 | It's the single largest
Revit users group on LinkedIn.
| | 00:16 | So, take care and feel free to take a
look at all the other Revit offerings that
| | 00:21 | are currently available here on lynda.com.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
